SBA SOP 50 50 4

LOAN SERVICING

Office of Financial Assistance 

Borrower an  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

d Lender Servicing

U.S. S all Business  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ m

Administration  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊
TABLE OF CONTENTS

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

CHAPTER 1........................................................................................................................................................ 1

WHAT DOES THIS STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE (SOP) COVER, AND HOW IS IT 

ORGANIZED?...............................................................................................................................................1-1 

1. What is the Purpose of this SOP? ....................................................................................................1-1 

2. How is this SOP Organized?............................................................................................................1-1 

3. What are the Sources of Authority and Guidance for Servicing Activity?....................................1-1 

CHAPTER 2.....................................................................................................................................................2-1

HOW DOES SBA SERVICE LOANS? .......................................................................................................2-1 

1. What is a Servicing Action?.............................................................................................................2-1 

2. Who Has Authority to Take Servicing Actions on SBA Loans? ...................................................2-1 

3. Which 327 Actions Must SBA Counsel Review? ..........................................................................2-5 

4. What Other 327 Actions Does SBA Counsel Typically Review? .................................................2-7 

CHAPTER 3.....................................................................................................................................................3-1

ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS FOR LOAN SERVICING......................................................................3-1 

1. Transferring Loans to the Commercial Loan Servicing Centers (CLSC)......................................3-1 

2. Lender/CDC/Office of the Inspector General (OIG) Reviews.......................................................3-3 

3. What Actions May You Take if the Lender/CDC is Not Properly Servicing its Loans?..............3-4 

4. Setting Up Lender and CDC File.....................................................................................................3-5 

5. SBA Field Visits to Borrowers with Lender or CDC-Serviced Loans...........................................3-7 

6. SBA Field Visits to Borrowers for SBA-Serviced Loans...............................................................3-7 

7. What Fees Does SBA Charge a Lender?.........................................................................................3-7 

8. What Fees Can a Lender Charge?....................................................................................................3-8 

9. What Fees Relate to Certified Development Companies (CDC) and to CDC Loans?................3-11 

10. How Do You Suspend/Terminate/Reinstate CDC Servicing Fees?.............................................3-11 

CHAPTER 4.....................................................................................................................................................4-1

LOAN SERVICING REQUESTS AND ACTIONS ...................................................................................4-1 

1. General Guidelines for Loan Servicing and SBA's Policy on Lender Servicing...........................4-1 

2. What is the Objective of Loan Servicing Actions?.........................................................................4-2 

3. What are Indicators of Potential Servicing Problems? ...................................................................4-2 

4. How Should You Prepare a Response to a Servicing Request?.....................................................4-3 

5. What is Required in the Servicing Request to SBA?......................................................................4-3 

6. What are Additional Requirements for Actions Affecting the Loan Collateral?...........................4-5 

7. Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) National Financing Statement Renewing, Modifying, or 

Releasing Security Interests Responsibilities..................................................................................4-6 

8. What is the SBA Form 327, Modification or Administrative Action? ..........................................4-7 

9. Maintaining Record of Servicing Requests, Actions, and Loan Account Communications.......4-10 

10. What are Seasoned Loans?.............................................................................................................4-11 

11. What Lender Actions Must Have SBA's Approval?.....................................................................4-12 

12. What is Unilateral Authority? ........................................................................................................4-12 

13. What Actions May the Lender/ALP-CDC Approve with Unilateral Authority? ........................4-13 

CHAPTER 5.....................................................................................................................................................5-1
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

ii 

SPECIFIC LOAN SERVICING ACTIONS.................................................................................................5-1 

1. Servicing Actions During the Disbursement Period. ......................................................................5-1 

2. Preparation and Submission of a Servicing Request.......................................................................5-1 

3. Requests for Information..................................................................................................................5-2 

4. Pre-Authorized Debits (PADs). .......................................................................................................5-6 

5. Release of Collateral.........................................................................................................................5-6 

6. Subordination of Collateral/Lien. ....................................................................................................5-8 

7. Substitution of Collateral..................................................................................................................5-9 

8. Deferments of Loan Payments.......................................................................................................5-10 

9. Inter-Creditor Agreements. ............................................................................................................5-14 

10. Assumption of a Loan by an Unrelated Party. ..............................................................................5-14 

11. Processing "Paid in Full" Loans.....................................................................................................5-16 

12. Proceeds from Condemnation of a Borrower's Collateral. ...........................................................5-17 

13. Release of, or Changes to, a Standby Agreement. ........................................................................5-18 

14. Guarantor Release/Substitution......................................................................................................5-18 

15. Extension to the Maturity of the Borrower's Loan........................................................................5-20 

16. Interest Rate Changes.....................................................................................................................5-22 

17. Other Loan Repayment Term Changes. ........................................................................................5-23 

18. Hazard Insurance Requirements. ...................................................................................................5-23 

19. Life Insurance Requirements. ........................................................................................................5-25 

20. Proceeds of Life Insurance upon Death of Insured.......................................................................5-26 

21. Claims Against Estates of Deceased Borrowers/Guarantors........................................................5-26 

22. Flood Insurance Requirements.......................................................................................................5-27 

23. Proceeds from Insurance Claims for Losses on Collateral. ..........................................................5-30 

24. Borrower Financial Statements: Changes in Form or Frequency.................................................5-31 

25. Loan Agreement Management Compliance Covenants (Salary/Dividend Limits, Performance 

Ratios, etc). .....................................................................................................................................5-34 

26. Assignment of Interest in a Loan/Transfer of Loan(s)..................................................................5-35 

27. Transfer of Loans between Participating Lenders.........................................................................5-37 

28. Surrender of CDC Certification & Transfer of Portfolio..............................................................5-38 

29. Assistance Provided to Existing Borrowers who Suffer Losses in a Declared Disaster. ............5-38 

CHAPTER 6.....................................................................................................................................................6-1

SPECIAL LOAN PROGRAMS....................................................................................................................6-1 

1. General Guidance. ............................................................................................................................6-1

2. Participation 7(a) Loans. ..................................................................................................................6-1 

3. Direct 7(a) Loans..............................................................................................................................6-1 

4. Certified Lenders Program (CLP) - Servicing.................................................................................6-2 

5. Preferred Lenders Program (PLP) - Servicing. ...............................................................................6-3 

6. Low Documentation Loan Program (LowDoc) - Servicing...........................................................6-5 

7. FA$TRAK Loan Program - Servicing.............................................................................................6-9 

8. CAPLines Loan Program - Servicing............................................................................................6-11 

9. Export Working Capital Program (EWCP) - Servicing................................................................6-13 

10. Disaster Loans - Servicing. ............................................................................................................6-16 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

iii

11. Disaster Farm Loans.......................................................................................................................6-17 

12. Certified Development Company Loans (504 Loans) - Servicing...............................................6-17 

13. Accredited Lenders Program (ALP) - Servicing...........................................................................6-20 

CHAPTER 7.....................................................................................................................................................7-1

WORKOUT AND INTENSIVE SERVICING RESPONSIBILITIES.......................................................7-1 

1. General Guidelines for Intensive Servicing.....................................................................................7-1 

2. What Questions Must You Ask Before You Process a Workout? .................................................7-3 

3. What are the Limitations on Extensions of Loan Maturity Dates? ................................................7-5 

4. What are the Issues You/Lender/CDC Should Consider Before Agreeing to a Workout?...........7-5 

5. What are Some of the Actions Available for a Workout? ..............................................................7-7 

6. How Must you Process a Workout Action? ..................................................................................7-12 

7. What Resources are Available from SBA to Help Borrowers, and When Should You Refer a 

Borrower for Assistance?...............................................................................................................7-14 

8. How Do You Process Advances/Expenses During Loan Workouts?..........................................7-15 

9. Real Property and Personal Property Appraisals. .........................................................................7-15 

10. Classifying a Loan as "In Liquidation" or "In Litigation." ...........................................................7-16 

CHAPTER 8.....................................................................................................................................................8-1

THE SECONDARY MARKET FOR SBA GUARANTEED LOANS .....................................................8-1 

1. Why Did SBA Establish a Secondary Market Program for SBA Loans?......................................8-1 

2. What Do the Regulations State About the Secondary Market?......................................................8-1 

3. Who at SBA is Responsible for Oversight of the Secondary Market? ..........................................8-1 

4. Why Would a Lender Want to Sell its SBA Loans?.......................................................................8-1 

5. When Should a Lender NOT Sell an SBA Loan?...........................................................................8-2 

6. What Types of SBA Loans Can a Lender NOT Sell? ....................................................................8-2 

7. What is the Sale Process for SBA Loans?.......................................................................................8-2 

8. What are the Lender's Responsibilities After the Sale? ..................................................................8-3 

9. Are There Any Changes to a Sold Loan Which a Lender Can Make Without the Approval of the 

Investor?............................................................................................................................................8-4 

10. What Are the Responsibilities of the Fiscal Transfer Agent (FTA)?.............................................8-5 

11. When Can the Lender or SBA Repurchase a Loan Sold on the Secondary Market?....................8-5 

12. How Do You Know if an SBA Loan is Sold?.................................................................................8-7 

CHAPTER 9.....................................................................................................................................................9-1

PURCHASING SBA'S GUARANTY..........................................................................................................9-1 

1. Time is of the Essence......................................................................................................................9-1 

2. Regulations. ......................................................................................................................................9-1 

3. When Does SBA Purchase from the Lender? .................................................................................9-1 

4. Information Required from a Lender...............................................................................................9-2 

5. When Must the Lender Submit the Complete Purchase Request?.................................................9-3 

6. Determining the Earliest Uncured Payment Default.......................................................................9-3 

7. Determining the Interest Rate for Purchase.....................................................................................9-5 

8. Payment of Accrued Interest............................................................................................................9-6 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

iv 

9. What Do You Verify in a Lender's Transcript of Account? ...........................................................9-9 

10. Review of Loan Documentation....................................................................................................9-10 

11. When a 327 Action is Approved, How Does the Lender Receive the Funds from the SBA? ....9-12 

12. If the Lender Acquires the Collateral Before Purchase, How is SBA's Purchase of the Guaranty 

Affected?.........................................................................................................................................9-13 

13. What is SBA's Unilateral Purchase Privilege, and When Should You Invoke It? ......................9-14 

14. Notice to Lender of Purchase.........................................................................................................9-16 

15. When Must a Loan be Purchased from the Secondary Market (by Lender or SBA)? ................9-18 

16. How Does SBA Purchase from the Secondary Market? ..............................................................9-18 

17. Transfer of Loan Servicing from Lender to SBA..........................................................................9-21 

18. SBA's Purchase of the Unguaranteed Portion/Lender's Share of the Loan..................................9-23 

19. Purchase Log. .................................................................................................................................9-23 

CHAPTER 10.................................................................................................................................................10-1

MISCELLANEOUS ISSUES REGARDING PARTICIPATION LOANS.............................................10-1 

1. 13 CFR  120.524.............................................................................................................................10-1 

2. Cancellation, Termination, and Expiration of an SBA Guaranty.................................................10-2 

3. Reinstating an SBA Guaranty........................................................................................................10-4 

4. Can SBA Approve a Reduction in the SBA Guaranty (an Increase in the Lender's Share) of the 

Loan?...............................................................................................................................................10-7 

CHAPTER 11.................................................................................................................................................11-1

PREPAYMENT OR PURCHASE OF A DEVELOPMENT COMPANY LOAN OR DEBENTURE.11-1 

1. Factors Unique to Development Company Loan Servicing.........................................................11-1 

2. Documentation Required for the Prepayment...............................................................................11-4 

3. Prepayment Procedural Steps.........................................................................................................11-5 

4. Release of Debenture and Note......................................................................................................11-8 

5. Alternatives to Prepayment of Debentures....................................................................................11-8 

6. Purchase of Debentures..................................................................................................................11-9 

7. Processing of 327 Actions For Debenture Purchases. ................................................................11-14 

8. Loan Accounting after Debenture Purchase................................................................................11-15 

9. Placing Loans in Liquidation. ......................................................................................................11-15 

10. Termination of CDC Servicing....................................................................................................11-15 

11. Termination of CSA Servicing. ...................................................................................................11-16 

12. Servicing Fees...............................................................................................................................11-16 

13. CDC Liquidating Functions.........................................................................................................11-17 

CHAPTER 12.................................................................................................................................................12-1

FEDERAL DEPOSIT INSURANCE CORPORATION (FDIC) TAKE OVER OF A PARTICIPATING 

LENDER ......................................................................................................................................................12-1 

1. The FDIC Takeover of a Participating Bank.................................................................................12-1 

2. What are the Rules Governing How SBA Interacts with FDIC After a Takeover? ....................12-1 

3. What Must You Do When a Bank Fails? ......................................................................................12-1 

4. SBA's Responsibilities after an FDIC Takeover...........................................................................12-6 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

v

5. FDIC's Responsibilities for SBA's Loan Portfolio After FDIC Takeover. ..................................12-7 

6. Who Collects Loan Payments and Maintains Loan Data? ...........................................................12-8 

CHAPTER 13.................................................................................................................................................13-1

DISCLOSURE OF LOAN INFORMATION ............................................................................................13-1 

1. What is SBA's Policy Governing Disclosure of Information about Loans? ................................13-1 

2. Types of Information that are Generally Available to any Requester Under the Freedom of 

Information Act (FOIA).................................................................................................................13-1 

3. Types of Information that are "NOT" Available to any Requestor..............................................13-3 

4. What Must You Determine if You Receive a Request for Information Contained in a Loan File? 4 

5. What Must You Do if You Receive a Subpoena for Your Testimony or for SBA Records?.....13-7 

CHAPTER 14.................................................................................................................................................14-1

REFERRALS TO THE OFFICE OF THE INSPECTOR GENERAL.....................................................14-1 

1. Referrals to the Inspector General (IG). ........................................................................................14-1 

2. What Matters Must You Refer to the IG? .....................................................................................14-1 

3. How do you make an IG Referral? ................................................................................................14-2 

4. What is the Format and Content of a Written IG Referral?..........................................................14-3 

5. What Happens After You Refer a Matter to the IG? ....................................................................14-5 

6. What are Your Ongoing Responsibilities After You Have Referred a Matter to the IG?...........14-6 

7. What are Areas That Commonly Generate IG Referrals? ............................................................14-7 

CHAPTER 15.................................................................................................................................................15-1

LOAN COLLECTION MONITORING & REPORTS.............................................................................15-1 

1. General Guidelines for Loan Collections. .....................................................................................15-1 

2. Computer Databases for Loan Collection Status. .........................................................................15-1 

3. Reporting of Delinquent Loans......................................................................................................15-2 

4. Basic Steps in the Loan Collection Procedure. .............................................................................15-4 

5. Recording a call in the DLCS. .......................................................................................................15-7 

CHAPTER 16.................................................................................................................................................16-1

SERVICING PROCEDURES.....................................................................................................................16-1 

1. Introduction.....................................................................................................................................16-1 

2. Summary Review of the PCFG Program. .....................................................................................16-4 

3. Coordination of Servicing Activity................................................................................................16-6 

4. Bondholder's Trustee......................................................................................................................16-7 

5. Servicing Pollution Control Financing Guarantees.......................................................................16-9 

6. Controls.........................................................................................................................................16-11 

7. Yearly Pollution Control and Report...........................................................................................16-12 

8. General Administrative Activities. ..............................................................................................16-12 

9. Servicing Actions Requiring Payment Relief..............................................................................16-14 

10. Collateral.......................................................................................................................................16-15 

11. Indemnification Agreements........................................................................................................16-16 

12. Liquidation Considerations. .........................................................................................................16-17 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

vi 

13. Special Guidance/Assistance. ......................................................................................................16-18 

APPENDIX.......................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 1....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 152, PARTICIPATION CERTIFICATE................................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 2....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 155, STANDBY AGREEMENT................................................................................................ 1 

SBA FORM 155, STANDBY AGREEMENT (cont.).................................................................................... 2

APPENDIX 3....................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 4....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 172, TRANSACTION REPORT ON LOANS SERVICED BY LENDER ............................ 1 

APPENDIX 5....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 327, MODIFICATION OR ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION ................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 6....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA 327 STAMP -- EXAMPLE ..................................................................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 7....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 397, NOTICE OF FULLY PAID ACCOUNT.......................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 8....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 466, TRANSCRIPT OF ACCOUNT-EXAMPLE.................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 9....................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 515, NOTE RECEIVABLE REPORT....................................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 10..................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 596 B, CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT................................................................ 1 

APPENDIX 11..................................................................................................................................................... 1

SBA FORM 888, MANAGEMENT TRAINING REPORT.......................................................................... 1 

APPENDIX 12..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 13..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 14..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 15..................................................................................................................................................... 1
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

vii

APPENDIX 16..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 17..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 18..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 19..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 20..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 21..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 22..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 23..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 24..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 25..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 26..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 27..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 28..................................................................................................................................................... 1

APPENDIX 29..................................................................................................................................................... 1
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

1-1

CHAPTER 1 

WHAT DOES THIS STANDARD OPERATING 

PROCEDURE (SOP) COVER, AND HOW IS IT 

ORGANIZED? 

1. What is the Purpose of this SOP? 

 The purpose of this SOP is to provide guidelines for servicing activities for loans made under the 

7(a), 504, and direct business loan programs by: 

 a. SBA personnel; 

 b. Participating lenders; and 

 c. Certified Development Companies (CDC). 

2. How is this SOP Organized? 

 a. This SOP provides both the regulations and the policy you need to know to perform your 

job in loan servicing. 

 b. The applicable Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) are cited in the various sections of the 

SOP where they apply. 

 c. In this SOP, "MUST" is used when the action is mandatory. Deviations from the 

mandatory actions must be approved by the Associate Administrator for Financial 

Assistance (AA/FA) or designee. 

 d. The term "You" refers to the recommending official (loan officer). The term 

recommending official is defined in the Chapter 2, "How Does SBA Service Loans?" 

All references other than "YOU" (recommending official) will be identified in the text. 

3. What are the Sources of Authority and Guidance for Servicing Activity? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 As a loan servicing official you must be aware that all servicing activ

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ities you take 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

must conform to the:

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Small Business Act; 

 (2) Code of Federal Regulations; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

1-2 

 (3) SBA policy and procedures, including SOPs and Notices that are issued and 

amended periodically; and 

 (4) SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation)." 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What do you need to know about the regulations?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) From time to time, SBA publishes changes to the CFR to implement new 

legislation or to clarify or modify existing regulations. These changes are 

published in the Federal Register and incorporated into the bound version of the 

CFR annually. 

 (2) This SOP provides the text of the regulations related to loan servicing contained 

in CFR, Title 13 "Business Credit and Assistance," Part 120 "Business Loans" (13 

CFR Part 120).

 NOTE: The "MANDATORY" words in the CFR are "SHALL," "WILL," and 

"MUST."

 The subsections of 13 CFR Part 120 which pertain to loan servicing are provided 

in the corresponding sections of this SOP. Other parts and sections of 13 CFR 

which relate to loan servicing are: 

 (a) 13 CFR Part 101.104 which contains current policy on the delegations of 

authority for loan administration; 

 (b) 13 CFR Part 102 which pertain to disclosure regulations under the 

Freedom of Information and Privacy Act of 1974; and 

 (c) 13 CFR Part 105 which contains the "Standards of Conduct." 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What do you need to know about SBA policy in this SOP?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (1) This SOP provides 7(a), 504, and direct business loan policies to follow for 

servicing all loans. These policies were established based on sound lending 

practices derived from the experience of SBA loan servicing officials like you. 

On occasion, SBA policy may not adequately address a special circumstance you 

are handling. In those cases, you may be able to justify an exception to policy 

while still practicing prudent lending standards. 

 (2) The policies in this SOP are applicable to all SBA loans classified as in "regular 

servicing" status (which include loans undergoing "intensive servicing") and are 

serviced by: 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

1-3

 (a) SBA; 

 (b) Lender; or 

 (c) Certified Development Company (CDC). 

 (3) For SBA loans classified as "in liquidation" status, refer to SOP 50 51, "Loan 

Liquidation & Acquired Property." 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What do you need to know about the 750 agreement (Loan Guaranty Agreeme

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

nt)?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation)," is 

SBA's contract with the lenders in the 7(a) Program. You should read it along 

with any supplemental agreements and understand it fully. You should refer to 

them whenever you have a question of what is expected of the SBA or the 

participating lender. 

 (2) The lender - SBA contracts for the 7(a) Program include: 

 

 (a) SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation);" 

 (b) SBA Form 750B, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation)" 

for Short Term Loans; 

 (c) SBA Form 1186, "Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Certified Lenders 

Program (CLP);" 

 (d) SBA Form 1347, "Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Preferred Lenders 

Program (PLP);" 

 (e) SBA Form 750EX, "Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Export Working 

Capital Program (EWCP);" 

 (f) SBA Form 1918, "Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, FA$TRAK 

Program;" and 

 (g) SBA Form 750B or SBA Form 750 for use in the LowDoc and CAPLines 

programs. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

1-4 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-1

CHAPTER 2 

HOW DOES SBA SERVICE LOANS? 

1. What is a Servicing Action? 

 A servicing action is any action that changes the existing terms of the loan. Generally, a 

servicing action results from a request from the borrower for SBA-serviced loans, and from the 

lender or CDC for loans serviced by them. Servicing actions generally require that loan 

servicing "recommending" and "approving" officials complete an SBA Form 327, "Modification 

or Administrative Action" (327 action). 

2. Who Has Authority to Take Servicing Actions on SBA Loans? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Who can recommend a loan servicing action?

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The  ̊ ̊ ̊ recommending official. 

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A recommending official is an SBA staff member who has met the requirements outlined 

in the Delegations of Authority published in the Federal Register, and who is authorized 

by his/her supervisor to take such actions. (This is usually the servicing loan officer.) 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Who can 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

approve a loan serv

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

icing action?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The  ̊ ̊ ̊ approving official.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 An approving official is an SBA staff member who has met the requirements outlined in 

the Delegations of Authority published in the Federal Register, and who is authorized by 

his/her supervisor to take such actions. (This is usually the line supervisor.) 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Who can approve servicing requests not otherwise delegated to an approving 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

official?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) This SOP will identify the actions which will require a higher level of approval 

(e.g., actions requiring the approval of the AA/FA or designee). 

 (2) Approval authority for actions related to loans classified as "in liquidation" are 

identified in SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation & Acquired Property." 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-2 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

Supervisory attorney

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 is defined as follows:

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) District counsel in a district office; 

 (2) Senior litigation counsel in the litigation units and administrative law litigation 

units. 

 (3) Supervisory attorney in the Santa Ana Disaster Loan Servicing and Liquidation 

Office and the commercial loan servicing center(s); and 

 (4) Servicing center attorney in a disaster home loan servicing center (or, if there is 

none, the district counsel in the nearest district office). 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

Rule of Two approval process?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) What is the "Rule of Two?"

 All servicing actions taken under delegated authority must reflect the 

recommendation(s) of the recommending official who initiated the action and 

approval by an approving official [e.g., using SBA 327, Liquidation Litigation 

Tracking System (LLTS) screens, etc.]. Both officials must be certified under the 

delegation of authority to take the action. This process is called the "Rule of 

Two." (Special actions that may be approved under the "Rule of Two" or 

require the authority of the Claims Review Committee are discussed in the 

SOP 50 51, Chapter 17, "Compromise Actions.")

 NOTE:  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 It is important to recognize that you must carefully exercise this loan servicing 

authority. 

 (a) Prudent lending practices must always be followed. All actions must be 

consistent with applicable loans and regulations. 

 (b) Servicing actions must be taken only if: 

 i. It will assist the small business in solving the problem and improve 

its ability to repay the loan; and 

 ii. It will assist the Agency in realizing maximum recovery. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-3

 (2) What happens if your recommendation for action is NOT approved by the 

approving official?

 (a) If your approving official does NOT approve your recommendation for 

action, he or she must add comments and recommendations to your 327 

action and refer the case to the second level of authority. That next level 

of authority must indicate the final action taken and the basis for the 

decision. 

 (b) If the position taken at the second level of authority is contrary to the 

differing recommendations of both you (the recommending official) and 

the first approving official, the matter will go forward to the next level of 

authority until concurrence with a prior recommendation is reached. 

 (3) Example:

 (a) You are an economic development specialist, and you recommend a 

subordination in a 327 action to your approving official, for example, the 

assistant district director for economic development (ADD/ED). 

 (b) If the ADD/ED approves your 327 action, the action is final and the 

subordination is approved. 

 (c) If the ADD/ED declines the action, he or she must refer the action to the 

second level of authority which, for example, is the deputy district director 

(DDD). If the DDD concurs with either your recommendation or that of 

the ADD/ED, the action is final. For example, if the DDD concurs with 

your recommendation to approve the subordination, the subordination is 

thereby approved. However, if the DDD concurs with the ADD/ED's 

decision to decline the subordination, the subordination is declined. 

 (d) If the DDD does not uphold either recommendation, and recommends yet 

another action, such as a shared security interest, the DDD must refer the 

action to the next highest level of authority. In this example, the DDD 

would refer the action to the district director (DD). 

 Note: Regardless of title, all officials must have appropriate Delegation of Authority 

from the associate administrator for financial assistance (AA/FA).

 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What actions can you approve WITHOUT the rule of two?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-4 

 Any SBA employee who has completed the Commercial Credit Course - Level I may, 

when authorized by his/her supervisor, unilaterally: 

 (1) Correct obvious typographical errors in loan authorizations; 

 (2) Extend disbursement periods on partially disbursed loans; 

 (3) Release the cash surrender value or dividends to pay premiums due on insurance 

policies; 

 (4) Extend initial principal payment dates; 

 (5) Adjust interest payment dates; and 

 (6) Release equipment (or hazard insurance checks) where the total value being 

released does not exceed $5,000. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you handle a request for 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

reconsideration?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You should handle requests for reconsideration of proposals in the same manner as the 

original proposal with the "Rule of Two" process. You must submit the request to the 

next level of authority. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you handle a non

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

deserving verbal 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

request for a servicing action?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You may reject any verbal request for loan servicing which is grossly lacking in merit or 

supporting documentation. You do not need to write a recommendation or refer the case 

to an approving official. You must document the request and your action in the 

Delinquent Loan Collection System (DLCS). 

 i

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you handle 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

exceptions to policy?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-5

 (1) Any servicing action which is not in full compliance with mandatory policy 

("must" sections) is an "EXCEPTION TO POLICY." Final authority to 

approve an exception lies with the AA/FA or designee. 

 (2) If you are recommending a 327 action which is an exception to policy, you must: 

 (a) Justify fully in the 327 action the reason for deviating from standard 

policy; 

 (b) Route the 327 action through SBA counsel; 

 (c) Route the 327 action through your approving official for action; and 

 (d) If concurrence is obtained, have your approving official refer the action to 

the AA/FA or designee for action. 

 j

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you handle servicing actions whe

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

n an 

 ̊  ̊ ̊

SBA employee or an employee's 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

relative is the obligor?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must refer all requests for substantial relief from an SBA employee or "close 

relative" of an SBA employee who is an obligor on a loan, through the chain of 

command, to AA/FA for final action. 

 (1) Substantial relief actions include the release of an obligor on a loan, substantial 

restructuring of payments, substantial release of collateral, etc. When in doubt, 

consider the requested action to be substantial. 

 (2) Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.10. 

 Definitions.

 Close Relative is a spouse; a parent; or a child or sibling; or the spouse of any such person.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

3. Which 327 Actions Must SBA Counsel Review? 

 a. Legal counsel must review all 327 actions involving the following activities (exceptions 

are noted in the corresponding categories): 

 (1) Exceptions to policy; 

 (2) Conflict of interest/preference; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-6 

 (3) Acquisition of environmentally impaired property; 

 (4) Transfer of a loan to another lender; 

 (5) Subordinations (review includes the 327 action and other documents deemed 

necessary); 

 (6) Assumptions (review includes the 327 action and other documents deemed 

necessary); 

 (7) Release or substitution of collateral; 

 (8) Release or substitution of obligors; 

 (9) Workouts; 

 (10) Purchase under the SBA guaranty, including "repairs" and denials of liability; 

 (11) Deeds in lieu of foreclosure; 

 (12) Review of liquidation plans (for issues regarding legal compliance, e.g., legal 

expenses); 

 (13) Payment of attorneys' fees; 

 (14) Transfers of a loan into litigation; 

 (15) Transfers of a loan out of litigation; 

 (16) All 327 actions on loans in litigation status; 

 (17) Purchase and/or payment of prior liens; 

 (18) Payment of real estate taxes; 

 (19) Compromise actions; 

 (20) All charge-offs; 

 (21) Any other document or 327 action with issues regarding legal compliance; and 

 (22) Substantive revisions to the loan authorization; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-7

 NOTE: Other exceptions may be noted in Chapter 6, "Special Loan Programs." 

 b. Counsel must refer all purely credit issues or administrative aspects to the servicing 

division. 

 c. For lender-serviced loans, the lender is responsible for the proper preparation and legal 

review of all documentation. 

 d. For CDC loans, the CDC is responsible for preparing all documents. The SBA counsel 

must review all CDC prepared documentation. 

4. What Other 327 Actions Does SBA Counsel Typically Review? 

 Besides the 327 actions listed above which counsel must review in each instance, the following 

are examples of other 327 actions which counsel should review: 

 a. Transfers into liquidation status; 

 b. Protective bids at foreclosure sales; 

 c. Assignment for the benefit of creditors; 

 d. Alterations in the terms of any loan instrument; 

 e. Disposal of ColPur; 

 f. Transfers to servicing from liquidation; and 

 g. Abandonment of collateral. 

NOTE: For all matters discussed in this SOP where there is an issue regarding legal compliance, 

final authority rests with the General Counsel or designee.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

2-8 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

3-1

CHAPTER 3 

ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS FOR LOAN SERVICING 

1. Transferring Loans to the Commercial Loan Servicing Centers (CLSC). 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Which loans must a field office/processing center transfer to a CLSC?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 (1) A field office (district, branch, or the PLP processing center) must transfer all 

SBA loans, whether serviced by SBA, a lender, or a CDC to the appropriate SBA 

CLSC. 

 BEFORE you transfer a loan, the loan must: 

 (a) Be fully disbursed (any undisbursed balance must be canceled before a 

transfer); 

 (b) Be current in payments (under 30 days past due); 

 (c) Be in "regular servicing" status; 

 (d) Have the guaranty fee paid; and 

 (e) For SBA-serviced loans secured by personal property collateral or fixture 

filings, be current on Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) National 

Financing Statement filings with the appropriate data input. You must: 

 i. Continue all UCCs which have lapsed or will lapse within 6 

months of the transfer; 

 ii. Input the UCC-1 refiling dates into the SBA's "Loan Accounting 

Update Display (LAUD)" database screens, specifically on the 

LAUD30 screen. 

 

 NOTE: For CDC-serviced loans, CDCs must track and file the UCCs and 

submit them to SBA for signature.

 (2) You must also transfer all loans that: 

 (a) Are classified as "returned to regular servicing" status; and 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-2 

 (b) Have been returned to regular servicing status, because the borrower has 

made at least three payments as agreed. 

 NOTE: EWCP is an exception to this policy for loans being 

transferred to the CLSC. (Refer to Chapter 6, "Special 

Loan Programs," paragraph 9 titled "Export Working 

Capital Program (EWCP)" subparagraph -- "Servicing 

responsibilities" for additional information.)

 (3) The locations of SBA commercial loan servicing centers are: 

 (a) Little Rock.

 

 U.S. Small Business Administration  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 Commercial Loan Servicing Center 

 2120 Riverfront, Suite #100 

 Little Rock, AR 72202 

 Little Rock s  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ervices loans for Regions I, II, III, IV, and VI.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (b) Fresno.

 U.S. Small Business Administration 

 Commercial Loan Servicing Center 

 2719 N. Air Fresno Dr., Suite 107 

 Fresno, CA 93727-1547 

 Fresno services loans for Regions V, VII, VIII, IX, and X.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What loans must the field office retain?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Loans which require special servicing action at the field office level. 

 (2) Loans that are not fully disbursed. 

 (3) Loans for which the loan status does not show "regular servicing." 

 (4) Loans that have been paid-in-full or charged-off. 

 (5) Loans with potential problems which have an erratic payment history or loans 

with ongoing or anticipated problems. 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-3

 (6) Loans classified as "in-liquidation/litigation." 

 NOTE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Litigation files must be retained by the field office.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What loans will the CLSC transfer to the field office?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Loans which are 60-120 days or more past due and for which a workout plan in 

the CLSC is not possible, [unless the CLSC determines that the lender/CDC/small 

business company (SBC) has a viable workout plan in place (or being 

developed)]; 

 

 (2) Loans to be classified as "in liquidation," "in liquidation-litigation," or "in 

litigation;" 

 

 (3) Loans (when requested) for which the field office is processing a new SBA loan 

application (alternately, the field office may request comments of CLSC); and 

 (4) Loans which the field office could better handle, for example: 

 (a) Complicated loan workouts; 

 (b) SBA-serviced loans which are chronically past due; 

 (c) Loans with an irregular payment plan which requires frequent adjustment; 

or 

 (d) Loans requiring a manual accounting system. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 When do you transfer loans between field offices or between commercial loan 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

service centers?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) From time to time, you will need to request that another field office or CLSC 

accept responsibility for further action on a loan. An example is when a borrower 

moves outside of your jurisdiction. 

 (2) A field office or CLSC must accept a valid transfer of a loan and should perform 

any reasonable task on a non-transferred loan for another field office. 

 (3) A loss generated under any transferred account will be attributed to the 

transferring office. 

2. Lender/CDC/Office of the Inspector General (OIG) Reviews. 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-4 

 Refer to Appendix 30, "Loan Policy and Program Oversight Guide for Lender Reviews," in 

 this SOP for the policy and procedures for lender and CDC reviews. 

 In the event that an OIG's investigation raises questions regarding SBA's obligation to honor it's 

guaranty for an SBA guaranteed loan, the field office will follow the same guidelines as noted in 

Appendix 30, paragraph VII.D., titled "Loan Deficiency Notification." If the results of the OIG 

review go to OFA instead of the field office, OFA will provide the field office with the 

appropriate information to comply with Appendix 30. 

3. What Actions May You Take if the Lender/CDC is Not Properly Servicing its Loans? 

 a. You have the responsibility to report and act on the findings of your field reviews. 

 b. Regulations for 7(a) lenders: 

 13 CFR  120.431.

 Suspension or revocation of eligibility to participate.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA may suspend or revoke the eligibility of a Lender to participate in the 7(a) program because of a 

violation of SBA regulations, a breach of any agreement with SBA, a change of circumstance resulting in 

the Lender's inability to meet operational requirements, or a failure to engage in prudent lending 

practices. Proceedings for such purposes will be conducted in accordance with the provisions of part 134 

of this chapter. A suspension or revocation will not invalidate a guarantee previously provided by SBA.

 See Subpart D in SOP 50 10, "Business Loan Program - Loan Processing" for additional 

information. 

 c. Regulations for CDCs: 

 ( ̊1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 13 CFR  120.982.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Correcting CDC servicing deficiencies.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA may require corrective action, including the transfer of existing or pending financings to 

another CDC in good standing. SBA must notify the CDC in writing of any servicing, reporting 

or collection deficiencies and the corrective actions to be taken. SBA may instruct the CSA to 

withhold service and late fees and may assess the CDC up to $250 per day for expenses incurred 

by SBA to correct the deficiencies. If non-compliance continues for 90 days, SBA may take the 

fees as compensation for its efforts to obtain compliance.

 ( ̊2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 13 CFR  120.983.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Transfer of CDC servicing to SBA or another CDC.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 If a CDC fails to correct servicing deficiencies, or is unable or unwilling to service its portfolio, 

SBA may assume the servicing or require the transfer of all or part of the CDC's portfolio to 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-5

another CDC within or adjoining the deficient CDC's Area of Operations. If there is no suitable 

CDC, SBA may approve a transfer to another entity. Future service fees from transferred loans 

will be paid to the transferee. In addition, the CDC's processing authority will be temporarily 

suspended.

 ( ̊3

 ̊

)

 ̊

 13 CFR  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  120.984.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Suspension or revocation of CDC certification.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 (a)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Suspend or revoke.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 The AA/FA may suspend or revoke the CDC's certification if a CDC:  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 (1) Violates a statute, an SBA regulation, or the terms of a Debenture, 

authorization, or agreement with SBA; 

 (2) Makes a material false statement, knowingly misrepresents, or fails to state a 

material fact; 

 (3) Fails to maintain good character; 

 (4) Fails to operate according to prudent lending standards; 

 (5) Fails to correct servicing, collection, reporting, or other deficiencies; or, 

 (6) Is unable or unwilling to operate in accordance with the requirements of this 

part. 

 (b)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Transfer portfolio  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊.

 ̊

 Upon suspension or revocation, the CDC must transfer its remaining portfolio and any 

504 applications or financings in process to another CDC designated or approved by 

SBA. If a pending 504 financing is completed after a transfer, any deposit must also be 

transferred. Any fees must be apportioned by SBA between the two CDCs in proportion 

to services performed. 

 (c)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Provide written notice  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊.

 ̊

 SBA must give written notice to the CDC at least 10 business days prior to the effective 

date of a suspension or revocation, informing the CDC of the opportunity for a hearing 

pursuant to part 134 of this chapter.

4. Setting Up Lender and CDC File. 

 a. Each field office and Commercial Loan Servicing Center (CLSC) must create and 

maintain a "Lender File" and a "CDC File" for each lender and CDC that participates 

with SBA in the market served by the office. Use SBA Form 232, the standard SBA loan 

file folder. The details listed below are to be used as a guide for the field offices. The 

CLSCs will use these files to maintain correspondence and general loan servicing 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-6 

information for a specific lender or CDC. 

 b. Divide the file into six sections which will contain material as follows. 

 (1) Section I - Guaranty Agreements.

 (a) For a 7(a) lender, a copy of the executed SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty 

Agreement" and supplemental loan guaranty agreements. 

 (b) For a CDC, a copy of the certification letter with any amendments, such as 

change in service area or approval under the Accredited Lender Program 

(ALP). 

 (2) Section II - Annual Report.

 Current lender or CDC annual statement/report.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (3) Section III - Examiner's Reports.

 (a) Lender Review Report (Appendix 30, "Loan Policy and Program 

Oversight Guide for Lender Reviews"). 

 (b) "Chron" type summaries of lender telephone contacts. 

 (c) Other formal or informal reports by SBA personnel who contact or are 

contacted by lender. 

 (4) Section IV - Correspondence.

 Copies of general correspondence to/from lender. (Do not include 

correspondence relating only to a specific loan.) 

 (5) Section V - Loan Servicing Documents.

 Quarterly Guaranty Loan Status Report (which the SBA Form 1502 has replaced), 

or any loan status report for a lender or CDC. [Note: The SBA Form 1502 will 

not be sent to the field offices but to the fiscal transfer agent (FTA).] This 

information will be input into the SBA database electronically and available to the 

field offices via the computer terminal. (See Chapter 15, "Loan Collection 

Monitoring & Reports.") 

 (6) Section VI - Miscellaneous Documents.
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-7

 General information regarding the lender or CDC, including newspaper clippings 

and other information not accommodated in other sections of file. 

5. SBA Field Visits to Borrowers with Lender or CDC-Serviced Loans. 

 a. Generally, a field visit to the borrower for an SBA guaranteed or development company 

loan will be made by the lender or CDC. However, you may make a field visit on behalf 

of SBA if a lender, CDC, or borrower requests your presence or if you conclude that a 

field visit by SBA is necessary. 

 b. You should make the visit jointly with the lender or CDC loan officer. If that is not 

possible, advise the lender or CDC that you intend to conduct a field visit. Report the 

visit on the Delinquent Loan Collection System (DLCS). 

 c. Refer to SOP 50 51 for additional information. It is in Chapter 8, "Lender-Serviced 

Liquidations" in paragraph 8 titled, "What Steps Should SBA Take after Being Notified 

of an Adverse Event?" 

6. SBA Field Visits to Borrowers for SBA-Serviced Loans. 

 For information on this topic, refer to SOP 50 51. It is in Chapter 6, "SBA ServicedLiquidations" in paragraph 5 titled, "Mandatory Field Visit Requirements."

7. What Fees Does SBA Charge a Lender? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

Servicing Fees

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 (1) Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.220 (c).

 Fees that L  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ender pays SBA.

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 The Lender shall also pay SBA an annual service fee equal to 0.5 percent of the outstanding 

balance of the guaranteed portion of each loan. The service fee cannot be charged to the 

Borrower. SBA may institute a late fee charge for delinquent payments of the annual service fee 

to cover administrative costs associated with collecting delinquent fees.

 (2) This fee was effective as of October 13, 1995, for all loans approved on that day 

and forward. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

Review Fees

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Regulations: 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-8 

 1 CFR 3  120.454.

 PLP performance review.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 SBA may review the performance of a PLP Lender. SBA may charge the PLP lender a fee to 

cover the costs of this review.

 (2) SBA's PLP review center will conduct periodic reviews of PLP lenders. The 

regulations permit SBA to assess a fee for a PLP review. 

8. What Fees Can a Lender Charge? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Fees charged by lender to borrower.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 ( ̊1

 ̊

)

 ̊ Extraordinary servicing fees.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Regulations: 

 1F 3 C R  120.221 (b). 

 Fees which the Lender may collect from a loan applicant.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Extraordinary servicing.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 

 Subject to prior written SBA approval, if all or part of a loan will have extraordinary 

servicing needs, the Lender may charge the applicant a service fee not to exceed 2 

percent per year on the outstanding balance of the part requiring special servicing.

 (b) An example of extraordinary servicing is the special servicing required on 

an Asset Based Line of Credit, under the umbrella of the CAPLines 

program where the lender must conduct field audits of inventory and 

accounts receivable, collect receivables, and maintain cash collateral 

accounts. 

 ( ̊2

 ̊

)

 ̊ Out

 ̊  ̊ ̊- ̊

of

 ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

pocket expenses.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.221 (c). 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-9

 Fees which the Lender m  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ay collect from a loan applicant.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Out  ̊  ̊ ̊-

 ̊

of

 ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

pocket expenses.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 The Lender may collect from the applicant necessary out-of-pocket expenses such as 

filing or recording fees.

 (b) Expenses incurred by the lender may be added to the loan balance while 

SBA's guaranty is outstanding with SBA's approval (except for PLP, 

LowDoc, and FA$TRAK). For loans sold in the secondary market, they 

may NOT be added to the loan balance prior to SBA purchasing the 

guaranty. 

 ( ̊3

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Late payment fee.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 (a) Regulations: 

 1F 3 C R  120.221 (d). 

 Fees which the Lender may collect from a loan applicant.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Late payment fee.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 The Lender may charge the Borrower a late payment fee not to exceed 5 percent of the 

regular loan payment.

 (b) Is the fee mandatory? 

 i. No, the late fee is optional; and 

 ii. Lenders may charge less than 5 percent. 

 (c) When can the lender charge the late fee? 

 The late fee may be collected if the lender receives a payment more than 

10 days after its due date. For example, if the payment is due on the 5th, 

the lender can collect the late fee if the payment is received on or after the 

16th. 

 (d) Who is responsible for collecting the late fee? 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-10 

 It is the lender's responsibility to collect the late fee from the borrower. 

The lender must not add the late fee to the principal amount of the loan 

under any circumstances. 

 (e) Does the lender have to share the late fees collected with the investor if 

the loan has been sold in the secondary market? 

 No. The late fee belongs to the lender and is not shared with the investor.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 (f) What happens to the late fee if the loan is purchased by SBA? 

 The lender must not add late fees to the transcript of account submitted by 

the lender for purchase of the guaranty. The SBA will not be responsible 

for paying any late fees. If SBA purchases a loan, SBA will permit the 

lender to collect late fees from the borrower which were owed at the time 

of purchase, but only AFTER SBA has been paid in full. The lender must 

apply all scheduled loan payments first to interest and then to principal. 

 ( ̊4

 ̊

)

 ̊ What 

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊fees are prohibited? ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.221 (e). 

 Fees which the Lender may collect from a loan applicant.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 No prepayment fee.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 The Lender may not charge a fee for full or partial prepayment of a loan.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Fees charged by le

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

nder to SBA for servicing purchased loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender may deduct a servicing fee for collecting and remitting SBA's share of 

a borrower payment on a loan where SBA has purchased the guaranty (an XGP 

loan). 

 (2) The lender must compute the fee based on SBA's participation in the loan and the 

number of days of interest collected. (For method of computing fee, see 

SBA Form 172, Transaction Report on Loan Serviced by Lender.) A lender must 

not collect a servicing fee from principal received (for example, payment from 

liquidation proceeds). 

 (3) The lender deducts the service fee prior to remitting SBA's share of a payment to 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-11

SBA. The lender must use SBA Form 172 to remit payment to SBA. 

 (4) The lender must submit XGP loan payments for loans in regular servicing status 

to the SBA's Denver Finance Center (DFC) in Denver, within 15 days from the 

date the lender receives the funds from the borrower. Denver will notify 

electronically the appropriate district office of the receipt of funds. 

 (5) Reviews of lenders participating in the Preferred-Lender Program (PLP) and 

Certified-Lender Program (CLP) will include a review for compliance with the 

15-day payment period. Lenders that are found not to be making timely payments 

may be subject to corrective actions by the Agency. 

 (6) Servicing and liquidation expenses paid by the lender must be customary and 

reasonable for the services obtained and consistent with local practice. The SBA 

will examine expenses during lender reviews and at the time of guaranty purchase 

or completion of liquidation to ensure that they meet these guidelines. Particular 

emphasis will be placed on review of legal expenses. 

9. What Fees Relate to Certified Development Companies (CDC) and to CDC Loans? 

 a. Some of these fees are: 

 (1) Servicing fee; 

 (2) Late fees; and 

 

 (3) Assumption fees. 

 b. See Subpart H, "Development Company Loan Program" in SOP 50 10, "Business Loan 

Program - Loan Processing," for a detailed explanation of all fees relating to CDCs and 

CDC loans. 

10. How Do You Suspend/Terminate/Reinstate CDC Servicing Fees? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 If the CDC does not comply with its servicing responsibilities in accordance with the 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

requirements of the regulations

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 and of this SOP, the SBA may:

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Suspend or terminate the CDC's servicing fees; 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-12 

 (2) Take such action as provided in SBA's regulations, quoted in this chapter; and 

 (3) Take necessary action to correct any servicing deficiency. A CDC may be liable 

for administrative expenses as a result of a servicing deficiency that could cause 

serious harm to SBA. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Notification of deficiency.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) If you identify a deficiency, you must contact the CDC to resolve any 

problem/misunderstanding. A deficiency may exist with respect to an individual 

loan, multiple loans or the total portfolio of the CDC. 

 (2) If the deficiency is not corrected, you must submit written notice to the CDC. 

This notification must describe the nature of the deficiency and recommended 

actions to resolve the problem. 

 (3) If no response is received from the CDC within 15 days, you must send a second 

letter by Certified Mail-Return Receipt Requested to the CDC clearly specifying 

the consequences involved. 

 (4) If the CDC responds that efforts to correct the servicing problem(s) were 

attempted without results due to lack of cooperation or failure by the SBC(s), the 

CDC and SBA will work together to resolve the problem. Responsible, good 

faith efforts by the CDC and SBA should avoid the need for further action against 

the CDC. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Suspension of servicing 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

fees.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) If the CDC is unable to resolve its servicing deficiencies or does not submit the 

required reports within the specified time frame, it is negligent in performing its 

servicing responsibilities. The district office/Servicing Center must proceed to 

suspend or terminate the CDC's servicing responsibilities and fees. These fees s

will continue to be collected and remitted to the Agency. If another CDC should 

take over servicing, then it will receive the fees collected. 

 (2) If based on the inability to resolve deficiencies you decide by 327 action to seek 

termination of CDC Certification (described in paragraph 4) titled "What Actions 

May You Take if the Lender/CDC is Not Properly Servicing its Loans?"), you 

should suspend the CDC's servicing responsibilities and fees during the process of 

revocation of CDC certification. 

 (3) You must process your recommendation to suspend CDC servicing fees by a 327 

action for approval/decline under the rule of two. The 327 action must identify 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-13

the reason for the suspension and identify the CDC to which servicing and 

servicing fees are to be transferred. If a CDC is not available to assume servicing 

responsibility, servicing must be transferred to SBA. If approved, you must 

provide written notification to the CDC, the Central Servicing Agent (CSA), and 

the reciprocating field office/Servicing Center cooperating in the servicing of the 

CDC's portfolio. You must send a copy of the 327 action and fee suspension 

notice to the AA/BLS. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reinst

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

atement of 

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

fees.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must process a reinstatement of servicing fees by a 327 action. If approved, you 

must provide written notice to the CDC and the CSA of the effective date of the 

reinstatement. Such action must be processed and approved under the rule of two. You 

must send a copy of the 327 action and fee reinstatement notice to the AA/BLS. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 327 distribution.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must file the original 327 action in the lender (CDC) case file with a copy in the loan 

case file(s). 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Termination of servicing 

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

fees.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Termination of servicing fees will result only from suspension or termination of 

the CDC's certification. 

 (2) When a termination action is taken, you must assign all or part of the CDC's 

portfolio to another responsible CDC or, if necessary, to SBA. In this case, the 

assignor CDC will have no rights to any further fees. These fees will be paid to 

the transferee. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Transfer of servicing fees to SBA.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (1) SBA will perform the servicing functions if a CDC is no longer performing these 

functions and SBA cannot transfer the portfolio to another CDC. 

 (2) You must submit written notice to the CSA to transfer the servicing fees to SBA. 

Your notification must identify the CDC of record and the effective date of 

transfer to SBA. Upon notification, the CSA will remit servicing fees to the 

Denver Finance Center (DFC) in Denver,CO. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Collection of administrative expenses from the CDC.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-14 

 (1) If the CDC does not rectify a negligent situation after having been notified to do 

so, you may charge the CDC with the administrative costs/expenses incurred by 

SBA to correct the servicing deficiencies. 

 (2) You should base administrative costs/expenses on time and charges necessary to 

correct a deficiency. The amount charged on a per diem basis must not exceed 

$250 per day. You must credit the CDC for any suspended servicing fees 

collected by the SBA. 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

3-15

SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-1

CHAPTER 4 

GENERAL

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

LOAN SERVICING REQUESTS AND ACTIONS 

1. General Guidelines for Loan Servicing and SBA's Policy on Lender Servicing. 

 a. It is SBA's policy that all lenders must service and liquidate all loans which were 

approved on or after October 1, 1997. For loans approved before October 1, 1997, all 

lenders are expected to service and liquidate a loan when they have asked SBA to honor 

its guaranty. 

 b. This chapter provides a description and guidance for processing of servicing requests 

received from borrowers, lenders, and certified development companies (CDCs). For 

most servicing actions, the process is the same for lenders, CDCs and SBA personnel. 

Actions delegated to the lender or the CDC must follow the same requirements. 

Exceptions to this general policy are noted. 

 c. As you follow the guidance of this SOP, we ask that you remember three factors: 

 (1) The individuality of each business; 

 (2) Your loan servicing responsibility; and 

 (3) The general steps for loan servicing. 

 d. Each small business is unique. For that reason, you must: 

 (1) Analyze all servicing actions within the context of the situation; and 

 (2) Consider what is in the best interest of the small business borrower and the SBA. 

 e. You must follow accepted standards of prudent lending. Loan servicing includes 

monitoring or reviewing: 

 (1) Borrower's business operations, as generally reflected in the borrower's financial 

statements and other information; 

 (2) Borrower's loan repayment history; 

 (3) All actions must be commercially reasonable; and 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-2 

 (4) Lender's servicing and liquidation actions must be consistent with the lender's 

procedures on non-SBA loans. 

 f. Loan servicing assistance involves: 

 (1) Recognizing a borrower's opportunity for growth; 

 (2) Recognizing a problem or potential problem early; 

 (3) Identifying the basic reason for a servicing action; and 

 (5) Determining the solution and taking appropriate action. 

2. What is the Objective of Loan Servicing Actions? 

 Loan servicing should reflect a positive outlook to meet the short and long term needs of the 

small business. You must recognize the possible results of your action (or inaction) on the 

ultimate success of the borrower. 

 You are responsible for: 

 a. Servicing actions necessary to support the normal growth of the business; and 

 b. Evaluating and responding to problems which may arise; this may require providing 

relief to the borrower through modification of loan terms. 

3. What are Indicators of Potential Servicing Problems? 

 a. The loan servicing function starts at the time of initial disbursement. You should 

continuously monitor your portfolio for warning signals. 

 b. Warning signals include: 

 (1) Payment default notices or checks returned for insufficient funds (NSF); 

 (2) Requests for relief in loan terms and conditions; 

 (3) Cash flow problems (e.g., placement of borrower on Cash On Delivery by 

suppliers); 

 (4) Adverse changes or declining financial/economic trends in the trade; 

 (5) Cancellations of life or hazard insurance policies; 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-3

 (6) Death or illness of a principal(s); 

 (7) Tax problems (local, State, or Federal; especially failure to pay "withholding" 

taxes); 

 (8) Substantive changes in officers, managers, ownership, control, or method of 

operation; 

 (9) Fire or loss of collateral due to natural disasters; 

 (10) Legal actions; 

 (11) Loss of contracts; and 

 (12) Borrower's failure to submit financial statements timely. 

 c. Business loan delinquencies in excess of 60 days should trigger intensive servicing 

activity by the loan officer since this is a prime symptom of underlying problems. This 

SOP provides more guidance regarding problem loan workouts in Chapter 7, "Workout 

and Intensive Servicing Responsibilities of Field Offices and Service Centers." 

4. How Should You Prepare a Response to a Servicing Request? 

 a. You must be familiar with all documents which contain the terms and conditions for the 

loan (e.g., notes; mortgages; loan, guaranty, and participation agreements). 

 b. Documentation, terms and conditions vary with different loan programs. You should be 

familiar with the loan programs and their required documents. For individual loan 

servicing actions, you may need to review the following: 

 (1) Loan application and related documents; 

 (2) Processing Loan Officer's report; 

 (3) Authorization; 

 (4) Settlement Sheet (for follow-up if counsel's review indicates problems); and 

 (5) All documents supporting the loan (Note, lien instruments, evidence of insurance, 

etc.). 

5. What is Required in the Servicing Request to SBA? 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-4 

 In general, requests for all servicing actions should address a common set of elements from 

which you can make a decision. For lender/CDC-serviced loans, the lender/CDC must submit to 

SBA the information necessary to support the proposed action. For SBA-serviced loans, you 

must tell the borrower what information to submit. 

 a. Each servicing request to SBA must include the following: 

 (1) A statement of the proposed action. 

 (2) A description of why the request is needed. 

 (3) A summary of the analysis of the business, including analysis of financial 

statements. 

 NOTE: For SBA-serviced loans, you should request that the borrower 

submit year-end and interim statements, if available.

 (4) Summary of prior servicing experience with the borrower. 

 (5) Identification of guarantors/co-makers and a statement as to whether their consent 

for the proposed action has been or will be obtained. 

 (6) A summary of the impact/benefit of the action on the business. 

 (a) Will the proposed action address the needs or solve the problem of the 

business? 

 (b) Will the action protect the interests of the lender/CDC and SBA? 

 (7) For loans sold in the secondary market, the lender/ALP-CDC must state whether 

they have obtained approval from the FTA. 

 b. For lender/CDC-serviced loans, a copy of their internal credit memorandum may be used 

if it provides the information necessary for you to consider their servicing requests. To 

help with preparation of servicing requests, the SBA's CLSCs have suggested loan 

servicing formats for use as a guide for submitting the requests. You may request a copy 

of the guide from either of the centers. 

 c. For development company loans, the CDC should also provide the status of the 

participating third party loan and indicate whether the third party lender concurs with the 

recommended action. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-5

6. What are Additional Requirements for Actions Affecting the Loan Collateral? 

 It is SBA's policy to protect its interests by maintaining responsible control over collateral items 

pledged to secure the loan. For issues regarding adjustments to the collateral, it is necessary for 

you to fully review the benefits and risks. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servicing request.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For all actions which affect "collateral," you must address the following items in addition 

to those listed in paragraph 4-5 titled, "What is Required in the Servicing Request to 

SBA?": 

 (1) Summary of prior collateral actions approved by the lender/CDC unilaterally that 

SBA has not acknowledged; and 

 (2) Summary analysis of collateral before and after the requested change. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Valuation of collateral.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Appraisals. 

 A recent appraisal prepared by a qualified appraiser must indicate the fair market 

value of the collateral. If an appraisal is not available, you must identify the 

alternative form of valuation (such as net book value, property tax assessment, 

internal valuation, etc.). 

 (2) Valuation of collateral. 

 Generally, you calculate the net realized value of collateral by applying the 

following liquidation percentages to the fair market value (if you use alternative 

liquidation values, please justify): 

 Real Property: Commercial RE .75% 

 Residential RE ................................................... 80% 

 Unimproved Land .............................................. 50% 

 Business Assets (net of Depreciation): 

 Machinery/Equipment ....................................... 50% 

 Furniture/Fixtures .............................................. 10% 

 Accounts Receivable/Inventory........................ .20% 

 Leasehold Improvements.................................. .05% 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-6 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Best interests of borrower.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You should not use abundance of collateral as a reason to approve a servicing 

request if the action is not in the best interests of the borrower and SBA. 

 (2) Similarly, you should not decline a servicing request if the action is in the best 

interests of the borrower/SBA when the lack of collateral is the sole reason for the 

decline. 

7. Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) National Financing Statement Renewing, Modifying, or 

Releasing Security Interests Responsibilities. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Security interests (commonly known as "liens") in personal property collateral 

and many types of non-real estate business assets, are created through the 

borrower's execution of a Security Agreement. 

 (2) To ensure the enforceability of the lien, against other creditors and in the event 

that the borrower files bankruptcy, a creditor must "perfect" its lien through a 

UCC financing statement filing. 

 (3) The form and procedure for the filing of the Financing Statements vary from state 

to state. Consult with local counsel regarding the form and procedure for your 

state. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

servic

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ed loans.

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Each UCC filing has an expiration date. The term of the UCCs vary for different 

states. Within 6 months prior to the expiration date, you must file a continuation 

of the UCC filing. The form and procedure for doing so vary from state to state. 

 NOTE: If you file a continuation earlier than 6 months prior to the 

expiration of the UCC, it will not be executed.

 (2) SBA maintains a database for tracking the filing of UCCs. At the time of loan 

closing, SBA files its UCCs and places a record of that transaction in its database. 

 You then are responsible for monitoring the expiration date for each UCC filing. 

 (3) Certain loan servicing actions such as partial releases, subordinations, 

assumptions and changes in form of borrower's legal entity may require an 

amendment to the security interest. You must prepare and record a UCC 

amendment. The form and procedure for doing so vary from state to state. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-7

 (4) If there is a release of the lien or the loan is paid-in-full, you must prepare a 

termination of the UCC filing. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For lender-serviced loans, the lender is responsible for filing, monitoring, and releasing 

the UCCs. In some circumstances, the lender may approve the release of a lien under 

Unilateral Authority (see paragraph 4-11 titled, "What Lender Actions Must have SBA's 

Approval."). 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

se

 ̊ ̊

rviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The CDC must prepare and record the appropriate UCCs at the time of loan 

closing. 

 (2) The CDC is responsible for monitoring the expiration dates of UCCs. 

 (3) For paid-in-full development company loans, the Central Servicing Agent (CSA) 

provides a letter confirming that the loan has been prepaid. 

 (4) For continuations, amendments and terminations, the CDC must prepare and send 

the appropriate UCC Form for execution by the SBA. The SBA will sign and 

return the UCC(s) to the CDC for recording. The CDC must return the recorded 

UCC(s) to the SBA for placement in the borrower's collateral file. 

8. What is the SBA Form 327, Modification or Administrative Action? 

 The term "Modification or Administrative Action" refers to an action to modify the authorization 

or other actions which are necessary to help the borrower respond to a business growth 

opportunity or to respond to a problem. It also refers to actions that SBA may take that would 

effect the loan, (e.g., change the status of loan from regular servicing to "in-liquidation," to 

transfer the loan from one lender to another, etc.) 

 Modifications or administrative actions on specific loans are taken by the completion of an SBA 

Form 327 (see appendix), or the 327 stamp format. The result is a 327 action. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA Form 327.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA Form 327 is available as a pre-printed form or on-line from SBA computer 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-8 

software. The report must contain all the essential information pertinent to the issue 

being considered, such as status of the loan, collateral, guarantors, and comments of the 

loan specialist or loan servicing assistant (LSA) originating the report. 

 (1) The recommending official's comments should include: 

 (a) Summary of the Request; 

 (b) Evaluation of Supporting Documentation; and 

 (c) Recommendation for Approval or Denial. 

 (2) The approving official must: 

 (a) Take final action to approve or deny the request; and 

 (b) Document the reason for the decision. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 327 stamp format.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 You may accomplish routine or uncomplicated changes in the authorization by using a 

327 stamp. 

 (1) 327 stamp. 

 (a) The 327 stamp is a stamp format which can be affixed to incoming 

borrower/lender/CDC correspondence to reflect SBA action. You may 

use the 327 stamp in those cases where you are not required to distribute 

the action to DFC. 

 (b) You should limit its use to less complicated requests where the incoming 

letter (and any enclosures) satisfactorily describes the action requested and 

provides sufficient information to allow final action. 

 (c) In some cases, you may use the 327 stamp for administrative actions that 

are not in response to bank or borrower requests (e.g., submissions of a 

request corrections to DFC). 

 (2) You must consecutively number these actions with other 327 actions and each 

action must reflect the signature of the recommending and approving officials. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Authority for action.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-9

 You must cite on the 327 form/stamp the applicable SOP chapter and paragraph number 

that provides authority for the action. If you take more than one action with a 327 

form/327 stamp, you must cite each action with the applicable chapter and paragraph 

numbers. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Filing of the action.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must file the 327 action (with related documents such as a credit memo, etc.) with 

other 327 actions in the borrower's loan file. The field office may use a photocopy or 

facsimile as a response to the borrower/lender/CDC. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Actions requiring approval by another office.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You must use SBA Form 327 to recommend loan servicing action on specific 

cases which require approval at an office other than the originating office. The 

proposed action and the signatures and titles of the recommending/approving 

officials must be on the report. It is essential that the report contain all the 

pertinent information necessary to make an informed decision. 

 (2) The originating office will forward the action to the next office (e.g., branch to 

district, district/service center to BLS) with a copy retained by the originating 

office pending final action. The report must include the comments and 

recommendations of the highest supervisory official using the rule of two on an 

SBA 327 at each office and of counsel (on legal issues). 

 NOTE: This process will be the same for actions that must be sent to 

Headquarters for a final decision.

 (3) The office taking final action will do so on the form, or if needed, by separate 

letter. The office taking final action will retain a copy and return the original 

action to the originating office. 

 (4) Where the action taken requires notice to lender/CDC/borrower, the originating 

office must: 

 (a) Give such advice by separate letter; and 

 (b) File a copy of the letter in the correspondence section of the loan case 

folder. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-10 

9. Maintaining Record of Servicing Requests, Actions, and Loan Account Communications. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must maintain records of all servicing requests, actions approved/declined and other 

communications regarding loans. Such records are critical to loan servicing personnel in 

all offices that service the lender/CDC/borrower loan account. 

 (1) SBA's CLSC will receive all current fully disbursed loans from the originating 

offices (see Chapter 3, "Administrative Aspects for Loan Servicing" for 

information on transferring loans to the CLSC). CLSC personnel must have 

access to as much information as is available in order to make prudent servicing 

action decisions. 

 (2) On occasion, the servicing center will transfer the loan back to the originating 

office. In those cases, the originating office will need to have access to 

information received by the servicing center. This information will be in the form 

of documentation in the file and in the Delinquent Loan Collection System 

(DLCS). 

 (3) Similarly, SBA will have occasion to receive loans for servicing from lenders or 

CDCs and will expect good records from them. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servici

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ng request/action log.

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The servicing centers must maintain a log of all servicing requests. 

 The log should identify the: 

 (a) Requestor; 

 (b) Name of the borrower; 

 (c) Loan number; 

 (d) Type of loan; 

 (e) Date the request was received; 

 (f) Date the action was taken; and 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-11

 (g) Whether the action was approved or declined. 

 (2) With the possibility that both an originating office and a servicing office will 

receive inquiries on the same loan, the log provides a basis to track the status of 

actions. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Computerized database of communications.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You must record all servicing requests and actions in the DLCS. The 

computerized database allows any SBA employee to view the PMQD26 screen 

for the details of servicing activity for the loan. This is especially important for 

personnel in the originating office if the docket file is at a service center, and 

vice-versa. 

 (2) Similarly, if you receive any letters or telephone calls regarding a specific loan 

account where the contents of the communication may be important for future 

servicing actions, you must summarize the communication into the DLCS 

database for that borrower. 

 (3) If you receive communications on a loan not being serviced in your office, you 

should forward a copy of the communication to the servicing office. This could 

be a copy of the letter or summarization of a phone call in an E-Mail message. 

The servicing office would then be responsible for updating the DLCS system. 

 (4) With the exception of CLP and CDC/ALP Loans (which have shorter response 

times), district offices should actively complete and respond to servicing requests 

within 10 working days. Such servicing actions must be documented in the file 

and in DLCS as described in paragraph 4-9.c. 

10. What are Seasoned Loans? 

 a. The term "seasoned" loan applies to a borrower's loan that has demonstrated excellent 

repayment history over a period of time. For this reason, servicing requirements should 

generally be less stringent for "seasoned" loans. However, you must exercise care to 

avoid abuse of the classification. 

 b. If you recommend an action based on the "seasoned" loan classification, you must 

identify this classification in the 327 action. 

 c. "Seasoned" loans are those loans (direct, guaranty, or CDC) which meet the following 

criteria: 

 (1) At least 4 years have elapsed since the loan was funded, or for loans under 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-12 

7 years, where the original principal balance has been reduced at least 25 percent. 

 (2) The loan has been paid "as agreed" for the past 12 months. 

 (3) Collateral is at or near "approval" levels, subject to any approved modifications. 

 (4) The financial statements are favorable. 

 (5) The account is satisfactory in all other respects. 

11. What Lender Actions Must Have SBA's Approval? 

 a. ̊ ̊ Imposed by regulatio  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊n:

 ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120.513. 

 What servicing actions require the prior written consent of SBA?

 Except as otherwise provided in a Supplemental Guarantee Agreement with the Lender, SBA must give its 

prior written consent before the Lender takes any of the following actions: 

 (a) Alters substantially the terms or conditions of any Loan Instrument (for example, any increase in 

the principal amount or change in the interest rate, or action conferring a Preference on the 

Lender); 

 (b) Releases collateral having a cumulative value in excess of 20 percent of the original loan amount; 

 (c) Accelerates the maturity of the note; 

 (d) Sues upon any Loan Instrument; 

 (e) Compromises or waives any claim against any Borrower, guarantor, obligor or standby creditor 

arising out of any Loan Instrument; or 

 (f) Increases the amount of any prior lien held by the Lender on the collateral securing the loan.

 b.

 ̊ ̊

 SBA policy also requires prior written appr

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

oval when there is:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 (a) The acquisition or purchase of environmentally impaired property; and 

 

 (b) Any contested litigation and litigation involving fees over $3,000. 

12. What is Unilateral Authority? 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-13

 a. To help streamline delivery of its financial services to small businesses, SBA places 

increased reliance on its private sector lending partners. The SBA encourages its lending 

partners to utilize "unilateral authority" (i.e., without prior written consent of SBA) 

whenever possible. 

 b. It is important to recognize that you, the lender, and ALP-CDC must NOT exercise 

"unilateral authority" indiscriminately.

 (1) Prudent lending/credit practices must always be used.

 (2) Unilateral actions can(_) be taken only when they:

 (a) Assist the small business in solving a problem;

 (b) Assist in its ability to repay the loan;

 (c) Will not adversely affect the interest of the lender/SBA; and

 (d) Are in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.

 (3) Remember that certain terms and conditions were placed in the loan and agreed to 

by all parties (borrower, lender, and SBA):

 (a) To ensure repayment ability and success of the small business; and

 (b) As a condition to the approval of the loan.

 c. Accredited Lender Program CDC-serviced loans.

 (1) SBA authorizes unilateral authority to ALP-CDCs similar to that of regular 7(a) 

lenders. All CDCs are accountable for the servicing of their loans. At the time of 

debenture funding, CDCs assign their loans and collateral documents to the SBA. 

 (2) ALP-CDCs may act under this unilateral authority if: 

 (a) The SBA retains the notes and collateral documents; 

 (b) The SBA requires the ALP-CDC to prepare the legal documents for SBA 

signature at the local SBA field office or service center; and 

 (c) The SBA counsel reviews the documents for legal sufficiency. 

13. What Actions May the Lender/ALP-CDC Approve with Unilateral Authority? 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-14 

 Lenders and ALP-CDCs have unilateral authority to make adjustments in the terms and 

conditions of a loan if SBA does not consider the action to be "substantial" and the action does 

not confer a preference on the lender/ALP-CDC. 

 The lender/ALP-CDC must notify SBA on all actions that they take using unilateral authority. 

They must also document the borrower's file for all unilateral actions taken. 

 The following is a listing of allowable unilateral actions lenders/ALP-CDCs may take without 

the prior written consent of SBA. This is not all inclusive, but rather a compilation of the most 

frequently occurring loan servicing actions. 

 Appropriate circumstances for unilateral actions include: 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Correcting obvious 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

typographical errors.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Correct obvious typographical errors in the loan authorization.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Providing 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

pay

 ̊ ̊ ̊

 off figures.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Provide pay off figures to the borrower (the lender/ALP-CDC is not required to provide 

or send a copy to SBA). 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Modifying financial statement requirements.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC may: 

 (1) Waive audited financial statements, for seasoned borrowers, using prudent credit 

practices, or change the audit requirement to compilation and/or review where, 

 (a) In the judgement of the lender/ALP-CDC, the business is not of a size and 

type to warrant such statements; or 

 (b) The cost would be prohibitive to the borrower. 

 (2) Grant waivers for only 1 year at a time and must reserve the right to reinstate the 

requirement in the event of loan default. 

 (3) Approve changes in financial statement frequency and/or due date requirements, 

as necessary consistent with prudent lending/credit practices. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-15

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Deferment of principal and/or interest payments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A deferment is defined as the postponement of scheduled loan payments of principal 

and/or interest to a later date. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Loans NOT sold on the s

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

econdary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For lender-serviced loans NOT sold on the secondary market, the following 

applies: 

 (a) The lender may defer the borrower's payments of principal and/or interest. 

 The principal payment may be deferred to the next month or further (e.g., 

to the maturity of the note). However, interest continues to accrue even if 

the payment of interest is deferred. When the next scheduled payment is 

due, it will be allocated to interest first then to principal. The interest 

payment is not deferred to the end of the note. 

 (b) The amount deferred must not exceed a cumulative total of 6 months 

during the life of the loan or a cumulative value in excess of 20 percent of 

the original amount of loan, whichever is less. 

 (c) The lender must retain deferment documentation in the loan file, including 

current financial statements. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Loans sold on the secondary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For a loan sold on the secondary market, using the SBA Form 1086, "Secondary 

Participation Guaranty Agreement": 

 (a) The lender may grant a one time deferment of up to 3 consecutive months 

without written consent of SBA/holder. 

 (b) The lender must promptly notify SBA/holder when the lender takes this 

action. 

 NOTE: On deferment actions for which the lender has unilateral authority 

(mentioned earlier), the request for approval only needs to be 

submitted to the FTA and not SBA.

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

ALP

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The ALP-CDC may approve up to 6 months (cumulative) of payment deferment 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-16 

or 20 percent of the original amount of the loan whichever is less. 

 (a) The ALP-CDC may approve a deferment only if the borrower can 

reasonably project that it will bring current the deferred amount within 5 

years after the deferment period. 

 (b) The ALP-CDC must NOT defer development company loan payments to 

the end of the loan term. 

 (c) The ALP-CDC must send notification of the deferment to the SBA 

servicing office and the CSA. 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Interest accrual notification.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC must notify the borrower that interest continues to accrue 

during any period of the deferment. When payments resume: 

 (a) For 7(a) loans, the payments will be applied first to accrued interest; and 

 (b) For CDC loans, the payments will be applied to the loan in the following 

order: 

 i. Accrued fees; 

 ii. Interest; and 

 iii. Principal. 

 (

 ̊

5

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Consent of 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

borrower and guarantors.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC must obtain written consent of the borrower, all 

guarantor(s) and FTA, as appropriate. 

 (

 ̊

6

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Reinstatement of default.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If a loan was in default when a deferment was approved, and the borrower has not 

made the first payment by the time the deferment expires, the loan will be 

reclassified as in default. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Release

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 of collateral.

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC may release collateral up to a cumulative value of 20 percent of 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-17

the original loan amount. To do this the lender/ALP-CDC must determine the value of 

the collateral to be released at the time of the decision to release. The borrower should 

use proceeds from release of collateral for business purposes. The lender/ALP-CDC 

should rarely give favorable consideration to release business assets in order to provide 

funds for personal reasons. 

 There must be ample indication that: 

 (1) The remaining collateral or enhanced repayment ability is reasonable in relation 

to the outstanding loan balance; and 

 (2) The release will not materially interfere with the operation of the business or 

decrease the value of the other collateral securing the loan; or 

 (3) The action is clearly necessary for the survival of the business, and future 

repayment from profits are anticipated. 

 NOTE: The lender/ALP-CDC must obtain written consent of all 

guarantor(s) and advise the SBA servicing office of the release of 

collateral.

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Substitution of collateral.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC may: 

 (1) Substitute automotive or other minor equipment (with equal or greater value) 

taken as partial collateral for the loan. 

 (2) Substitute equal, or greater equity, in like kinds of collateral, (e.g., exchange of 

real property excluding the primary real estate for the location of the principal 

business operation). 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Subordinations to senior liens.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender/ALP-CDC may permit the subordination of collateral for refinancing 

of senior liens held by another lender if: 

 (a) The refinancing is on more favorable terms for the borrower; and 

 (b) The borrower does not receive any funds from the refinancing (e.g., there 

is no increase in the principal balance of the senior lien, except for 

reasonable closing costs of refinancing). 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-18 

 (2) The lender/ALP-CDC is responsible for ensuring that this action does not 

adversely affect the priority of the lender/ALP-CDC/SBA lien. 

 (3) For development company third party loans (e.g., first lien holder), the ALP-CDC 

must ensure that the term of the refinanced third party loan equals or exceeds the 

term of the original third party loan. The participating third party loan must not 

be replaced by a loan under a Federally funded program (e.g., an SBA 7(a) 

guaranteed lender loan). 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Changes to 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

life insurance or hazard insurance requirements.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender/ALP-CDC may make changes to life insurance or hazard insurance 

requirements in accordance with the lender's own standard practices. 

 (2) On current loans, the lender/ALP-CDC may release insurance proceeds for the 

repair or replacement of damaged collateral. 

 (3) Cash surrender value of life insurance may be released, subject to the restriction 

noted in this section in the earlier sub-paragraph 13.e, "Release of collateral." 

 (4) The lender/ALP-CDC must NOT make any changes to Federal flood insurance 

coverage that is in effect, or might become applicable, without obtaining the prior 

written consent of SBA. 

 i

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Adjustments to the 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

installment amount.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender may adjust the installment amount to allow for correct amortization of 

the balance as a result of interest rate changes or anticipated balloon balances. 

This adjustment may be made only upon written consent of the borrower, all 

guarantors, and the secondary participant, if any. 

 NOTE: This provision does not affect variable interest rate loans that 

already have the provision to increase or decrease the payment 

amount, to an amount necessary to amortize the principal 

remaining unpaid after any scheduled interest rate change under 

the terms of the note.

 (2) An ALP-CDC must not make any adjustment to the installment amount for a 

development company loan. However, the ALP-CDC may approve such an 

adjustment for the participating third party loan. 

 j

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Make loans to the borrower which do not affect the collateral.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-19

 The lender/ALP-CDC may make loans to the borrower which do not affect the collateral 

lien position supporting the SBA guaranteed loan. This includes purchase-money loans 

for business assets and loans subordinate to the SBA guaranteed loan. 

 k

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assumptions 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

--

 ̊ ̊

 Approve a borr

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ower's change in form of organization.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender/ALP-CDC may authorize the assumption of an SBA loan when a 

borrower changes its form of organization, provided there is: 

 (a) No release or subordination of existing collateral; 

 (b) No release of original obligor(s) or guarantor(s) (no change in ownership 

or management); and 

 (c) No decrease in equity position of the business as a consequence of the 

assumption. (An example of this is when a partnership is converted to a 

corporation, and the same partners now have the same percentage 

ownership in the corporation as they had in their partnership.) 

 (2) The lender/CDC must ensure that the guarantee of the original borrower and 

guarantors are maintained. 

 (3) For CDC loans, the ALP-CDC must notify the CSA of the change and provide 

required tax identification information. 

 l

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Adjustments to 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

management covenants.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender/ALP-CDC may, using prudent credit practices, approve adjustments to 

management covenants (e.g., limitations on compensation, fixed assets, working capital 

maintenance levels, lease liabilities, or dividend payment), if the loan: 

 (1) Is seasoned; 

 (2) Has not been extended or deferred within 24 months before the date of the 

adjustment request; and 

 (3) Reflects that repayment ability/cash flow exists for all debt including the SBA 

guaranteed loan after the adjustments to the management covenants have been 

made. 

 m

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Accept 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

prepayments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) For lender-serviced loans, the lender may accept partial or full prepayments of the 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-20 

loan account. For loans approved by SBA after February 14, 1985, and sold on 

the secondary market, the lender must give 10 business days advance notice to 

the secondary holder or FTA of any intended prepayment of the note. Refer 

to SBA Form 1086 for further details.

 (2) For development company loans, the ALP-CDC may approve the partial or full 

prepayment of the participating third party loan. 

 

NOTE: The lender/ALP-CDC should direct specific questions relating to loan servicing to the 

SBA field office or servicing center having the delegated authority to service.
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

4-21

S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-1

CHAPTER 5 

SPECIFIC LOAN SERVICING ACTIONS 

1. Servicing Actions During the Disbursement Period. 

 a. The Finance Division (FD) retains the loan until it is fully disbursed. FD is responsible 

for the loan until it is: 

 (1) Fully disbursed; 

 (2) Transferred into "Regular Servicing" status; and 

 (3) Transferred to the Commercial Loan Servicing Center (CLSC). 

 b. Chapter 3, "Administrative Aspects for Loan Servicing" provides additional guidance for 

transferring a loan to a CLSC. 

 c. Six common actions that occur before transfer of a loan to a CLSC are: 

 (1) Increases in the balance of an outstanding loan; 

 (2) Extension of disbursement period; 

 (3) Cancellation of undisbursed balance; 

 (4) Change in use of proceeds; 

 (5) Response to an adverse change; and 

 (6) Collection of guarantee fees. 

2. Preparation and Submission of a Servicing Request. 

 For the preparation and the submission of a request of all actions noted in this chapter, you must 

follow the guidance set out in Chapter 4 "General Loan Servicing Request and Actions" in 

paragraph 4 "How Should You Prepare a Response to a Servicing Request?" and paragraph 

5 "What is Required in the Servicing Request to SBA?" 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-2 

3. Requests for Information. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A common loan servicing action involves responding to a request for information. If you 

are unsure whether the request is being made by a duly authorized representative of the 

borrower, you should request written authorization from the borrower. For other parties 

or for information requests not covered in this section, follow the disclosure policy 

guidelines in Chapter 13, "Disclosure of Loan Information." 

 For lender or CDC-serviced loans, the borrower should contact the participating 

lender/CDC directly. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Loan payoff amount.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender must provide the loan payoff amount to the borrower.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Development company loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must provide the loan payoff amount to the borrower. 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) If the debenture has not been purchased, the Central Servicing Agent 

(CSA) must provide the loan payoff amount to the CDC. 

 (b) If the debenture has been purchased, SBA will provide the loan payoff 

amount to the CDC. 

 (c) However, if the loan has been transferred to SBA for servicing, SBA will 

respond to the borrower. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You can obtain loan payoff amounts locally by accessing the Agency database in 

the PMQD09 screen (Accounting Pay Off Data). This display provides the 

principal balance, accrued interest as of the specified date and the daily interest 

accrual. 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-3

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Statement of account.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For an SBA-serviced loan, you must request an SBA Form 596 B, "Certified Statement 

Account," from Denver, OFO. Usually, you will only need this certification in a loan 

involving litigation, court action, etc. The statement indicates 

 the principal outstanding loan balance, accrued interest to a specified date, and the daily 

interest accrual. This form, when completed, is signed off by an official in the Office of 

the Chief Financial Officer (CFO). 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Transcript of account.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender will provide a transcript of account to the borrower.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Development company loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC will provide a transcri

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

pt to the borrower. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) If the debenture has not been purchased, the CSA will provide the 

transcript to the CDC. 

 (b) If the debenture has been purchased, SBA will provide the transcript to the 

CDC. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You have two alternatives: 

 (a) History of payments.

 A history of payments (principal and interest) is available from SBA's 

database in PMQD11 screen. For most situations, this information should 

fulfill the borrower's request. 

 (b) Official transcript.

 OFO manually prepares an official transcript SBA Form 466, "Transcript 

of Account" (Appendix 8). It may cover the entire period from loan 

inception to current date or a specific period only (e.g., last 12 months). 

 It includes: 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-4 

 i. All applicable disbursements and collection transactions and dates; 

 ii. The application of payments to principal and interest; and 

 iii. Ending principal and interest balances. 

 As this report can be lengthy and time consuming to prepare, you should 

request transcripts only when necessary. In most cases it is not necessary 

to reconcile all transactions from inception. You should determine the last 

date that the borrower and SBA's records were in agreement and work 

from that point. 

 You should NOT request a transcript if a borrower's concern is whether 

SBA has received a particular payment. You should first determine if the 

SBA database, PMQD11, shows receipt of the payment. If not, you 

should request a transcript only for the specific time period involved. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Credit/audit confirmations.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 When an auditor or someone seeking credit confirmation contacts you, you must verify 

that the borrower has provided written authorization to release the requested data. 

 (1) For lender/CDC-serviced loans, the lender/CDC will respond. 

 (2) For SBA-serviced loans, you must respond. You should provide this information 

from the computer database, if possible, (e.g., PMQD09, PMQD10, PMQD11, 

etc.). 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Statement of loan account/interest paid.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) SBA Form 1032, "Statement of Loan Account," (Appendix 16) is mailed 

annually by Denver, OFO, in late January, to all SBA direct and SBAserviced borrowers, primarily for income tax purposes. It is used for loans 

paid in full and charged-off in the previous calendar year. It is, also, used 

for loans charged-off in the previous calendar year if interest was 

collected. This statement is not sent for active loans or loans charged-off 

in prior years. The report indicates the loan's principal balance as of the 

end of the calendar year, the year end balance of accrued or prepaid 

interest, and total amount of interest paid during the calendar year. 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-5

 (b) SBA Form 1201, "Repayment Notice," (Appendix 22) is also used to 

report the same details as in SBA Form 1032 for all loans with an 

outstanding principal balance as of December 31. These details will be 

 reported on this statement for the months of January, February, and 

March. The primary purpose of this form is to serve as a payment notice 

to SBA borrowers. 

 For telephone inquiries from the borrower, the PMQD10 screen display provides 

calendar year to date interest paid. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Development company loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For development company loans, the CSA mails an annual statement to all 

borrowers, with a copy to the CDCs. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Change in name or 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

address of borrower.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Active loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 When a borrower/lender/CDC notifies you of a change in the name or address of 

a borrower, you must: 

 (a) Change all "in-house" records as appropriate; 

 (b) Forward the change to the collateral cashier; and 

 (c) Consult with SBA counsel for the need to amend the debtor's name and 

address in any financing statement which was previously filed to perfect 

the SBA security interest in collateral. 

 Name and address changes must be processed immediately to avoid misdirected 

or undelivered mail. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Loans in liquidation or possible liquidation.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If a borrower ceases business operations or vacates the business premises, you 

should: 

 (a) Identify a current, accurate mailing address; or 

 (b) Consider using the current address of the owner, principal, partner, or 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-6 

principal officer of the corporation or guarantor. 

 If the new address is not available (responsible individual, etc.), consider using 

the local field office address. This action must be recorded in DLCS. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Return of documents to borrowers.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 At the request of the borrower, you may recommend returning only the documents that 

were clearly NOT used in the approval process and NOT required for servicing the loan. 

All other documents must be maintained in the borrower's file. 

4. Pre-Authorized Debits (PADs). 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a pre

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

authorized debit?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Pre-authorized debit (PADs) are the mechanism by which loan payments are 

automatically withdrawn from the borrower's bank account and paid to the lender, CDC 

or SBA. All borrowers are encouraged to utilize PADs for their monthly loan payments. 

 This payment procedure: 

 (1) Reduces manpower requirements for SBA, lenders and CDCs; and 

 (2) Results in more timely application of payments. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process PADs?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) For lender or CDC-serviced loans, the borrower must contact the lender or CDC. 

 (2) For SBA serviced loans, the SBA-DCS Manual (which can be located in the SBA 

Intranet) provides instructions for establishing a PAD. If you need assistance 

accessing or downloading portions of the manual contact your information 

resource manager (IRM) for assistance. 

5. Release of Collateral. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a release of collateral?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A release of collateral occurs when SBA or, when authorized, a lender or CDC, releases 

the security interest or lien on specific loan collateral. The request may be for a full 

release of all collateral or a partial release of only a portion of the collateral. A release of 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-7

collateral requires legal review. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process a release of collateral?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 To release collateral, you must make a credit decision regarding the impact of the 

release on the interests of the borrower, lender, and SBA. Generally, the 

borrower must maintain collateral coverage: 

 (a) At or near the "approval" level; or 

 (b) At an amount to protect the remaining balance of a seasoned loan. 

 However, primary consideration must be repayment ability from profits and cash 

flow, and not liquidation of assets. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You are not required to review, or recommend for approval, the release 

documents. The SBA relies on the lender's attorney to review documents for 

legal sufficiency. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

CDC loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must prepare the collateral release documents for execution by SBA. 

The CDC will be responsible for recording the release. 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA will prepare the required collateral release documents. You should 

work with counsel to ensure that documents are legally sufficient. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA counsel review of 327 actions for collateral release.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-8 

 (1) The SBA counsel must review all 327 actions involving release of SBA collateral 

for SBA-serviced and development company loans. 

 (2) Counsel must determine if notice to or consent of the guarantor(s) is required and 

determine the consequences, if any, of noncompliance by the Agency for SBAserviced loans. 

6. Subordination of Collateral/Lien. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a subordination of collateral?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A subordination occurs when a third party is permitted to take a superior lien on specific 

collateral on an SBA loan. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 There are generally three types of subordination requests: 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) A request to subordinate SBA's/lender's lien on specific collateral to a third party 

for a specific period of time. 

 

 (2) A request by a lender to increase the amount of financing which has a superior 

lien to an existing SBA lien. 

 (3) A request to allow an extension of an existing subordination of an SBA lien. If 

the extension is for the purpose of refinancing, you will not need to prepare a 

complete analysis when the refinancing is for the loan balance plus normal 

refinancing costs. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process a subordination of collateral?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Lender/CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) You must review the request and supporting documentation to ensure that 

the lender/CDC addressed the critical elements and necessity of the 

recommended action to the survival or growth of the business. 

 (b) Lender-serviced loans will not require SBA approval or signature on the 

subordination documents. The SBA relies on the lender's attorney to 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-9

review documents for legal sufficiency. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

CDC loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must prepare the subordination documents for execution by the 

borrower, third party lender and SBA. The CDC must use its counsel to prepare 

any necessary documents. The SBA counsel must review the documents for legal 

sufficiency. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must additionally work with counsel to prepare required subordination 

documents for execution by the borrower, the third party lender and the SBA. 

 NOTE: You must follow the same guidelines for the "Release of Collateral" when 

considering a subordination of collateral.

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA counsel review of subordination 327 actions.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA counsel must review all 327 actions involving subordination of SBA 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

collateral.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

7. Substitution of Collateral. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a substitution of colla

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

teral?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A substitution of collateral occurs when you allow the lender/CDC/SBA to take a 

security interest in one item or type of collateral while releasing its interest in another 

item or type of collateral previously taken. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process a substitution of collateral?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You may recommend approving a substitution of collateral where: 

 (a) The collateral being substituted is similar in nature (e.g., the substitution 

of one piece of real estate for another -- NOT to include the primary real 

estate for the principal business operation) and provides equal or greater 

equity; or 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-10 

 (b) The replacement collateral has a higher level of confidence (e.g., a cash 

collateral account or real estate as compared to leasehold improvements or 

receivables). 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA will prepare the required collateral substitution d

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

ocuments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

CDC loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must prepare the collateral substitution documents for execution by 

SBA. The CDC will then be responsible for recording of the documents as 

needed. 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

servi

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You are not required to recommend approval of the substitution documents. The 

SBA relies on the lender's attorney to review documents for legal sufficiency. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA counsel review of 327 action

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

s for substitution of collateral.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA counsel must review all 327 actions involving substitution of collateral.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

8. Deferments of Loan Payments. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 CFR  120.530.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Deferment of payment.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA may agree to defer payments on a business loan for a stated period of time, and use such other 

methods as it considers necessary and appropriate to help in the successful operation of the Borrower. 

This policy applies to all business loan programs, including 504 loans.

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

deferment?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) A deferment is a postponement of a payment (principal and/or interest) to a later 

date without causing the loan to be considered late or in default. The purpose of a 
S0P 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-11

deferment is the enhancement of a borrower's cash flow to assist the borrower in 

responding to short term needs. 

 (2) You must not grant a deferment for the sole purpose of statistical reduction of the 

SBA's delinquency rate. 

 Note: Deferments should be used only where it appears that it will assist the borrower in 

solving a temporary cash flow problem.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 When and how do you approve a deferment?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may recommend approving deferment of future loan payments. Generally, 

you must not approve deferment of more than 6 months in the future. No single 

deferment action must exceed 1 year of future payments. A 1 year deferment 

should be used only when absolutely necessary and with strong justification. 

 

 (2) You may recommend approving a deferment of delinquent loan payments only if: 

 (a) The borrower has a workout plan that will allow the loan to be repaid 

through regular installments (returning the loan to regular servicing); and 

 (b) It appears that the deferment will solve the problem. 

 This should only be used as an exception.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (3) Before approving a deferment or an extension of a deferment, the borrower 

should provide you with updated financial statements [e.g., the last year end and 

interim (current within 90 days) financial statements] If the borrower's request is 

in response to a natural disaster, fire, or other loss of facilities, you may waive the 

requirement for financial statements. 

 (4) SBA and lender-serviced loans.

 (a) You (or lender/ALP-CDC under unilateral authority) may recommend 

approval of a deferment of payments until the maturity of the loan. You 

or the lender should notify the borrower that the deferred amount will 

result in: 

 i. A balloon payment at maturity, or 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-12 

 ii. The need to extend the maturity of the loan. 

 (b) As an alternative, the borrower may establish a payment plan to return the 

loan to the regular payment schedule before loan maturity. 

 (5) Lender-serviced loans sold on the secondary market.

 The lender must receive approval from the FTA and SBA if the borrower's 

request exceeds the lender's unilateral authority as noted in paragraph 4-13 titled 

"What Actions May the Lender/ALP-CDC Approve with Unilateral Authority?" 

 (6) CDC loans.

 (a) You can recommend a deferment on a CDC loan only if the borrower can 

reasonably project that they will bring current the deferred amount within 

5 years after the deferment period. 

 (b) You may recommend deferring CDC loan payments until the end of the 

loan term only if the debenture has been purchased. 

 (c) You must send notification of the deferment to the SBA servicing office 

and the Central Servicing Agent (CSA). 

 (d) You should submit SBA Form 1614, "Loan Information Request," to the 

CSA to request the amount deferred and the amount of catch-up payments 

based on what you believe the borrower will be able to pay. The CSA 

Status of Portfolio Report will show the loan status as "D" for under 

deferment or "C" for under the loan catch-up period. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Does interest accrue during a deferment?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Yes, interest will continue to accrue during the deferment period. You must 

inform the borrower that payments will apply to accrued interest first and then to 

principal following the deferment period. 

 (2) If the borrower makes partial loan payments during the deferment period: 

 (a) For 7(a) loans, the payments will be applied first to accrued interest; and 

 (b) For CDC loans, the payments will be applied to the loan in the following 

order: 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-13

 i. Accrued fees; 

 ii. Interest; and 

 iii. Principal. 

 (3) In some cases, you may want to approve deferment of principal only. However, 

particularly during the early years of a loan, this may not grant significant relief to 

the borrower. You should consider the deferment of principal and interest if the 

cause for the deferment is justified. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Borrowers called to 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

active military duty.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You should assist borrowers in adjusting their SBA obligation in contemplation 

of military service. The SBA does not have a policy to defer payments solely 

because a borrower enters the service. You should consider each case 

individually on the basis of the borrower's ability to continue payments on the 

loan. Factors to consider include: 

 

 (a) Size and structure of the company; 

 (b) Whether the business can continue (e.g., leased, other managers available, 

etc.); and 

 (c) Affect on the collateral with a possible shutdown of the business. 

 (2) You should be aware that under the Soldier's and Sailor's Relief Act (50 

Appendix U.S.C.,  526), no obligation bearing interest of over 6 percent per year 

incurred by a person in military service before that person went into the service 

shall, during any time that person is in military service, bear interest over 6 

percent, unless a court rules that the person's ability to pay such interest is not 

materially affected because of such military service. 

 If this issue comes up, consult with SBA counsel.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 If the first payment following the deferment is missed.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender or CDC must immediately notify SBA if the borrower misses the first 

payment following the deferment period. 

 If this occurs, you must make a determination as to whether to grant another deferment or 

to transfer the loan into intensive servicing/loan workout. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-14 

9. Inter-Creditor Agreements. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is an 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

inter

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

creditor agreement?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 When two or more lenders make separate loans to a borrower with commonality of loan 

purpose and/or collateral, the lenders enter into an "Inter-Creditor Agreement" to 

delineate their: 

 (1) Rights to the collateral; 

 (2) Responsibilities for loan servicing; and 

 (3) Rights/responsibilities in the case of a borrower default on one or all of the loans. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process inter

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

creditor agreements?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You must carefully review the complete inter-creditor agreement to ensure that: 

 (a) SBA's collateral lien positions are not adversely affected; and 

 (b) You agree with the rights and responsibilities for loan servicing and 

possible default. 

 (2) If the borrower requests a collateral action (subordination, substitution, release, 

etc), you must have written concurrence that all parties are in agreement. 

 (3) The inter-creditor agreement must be reviewed by the SBA counsel. 

10. Assumption of a Loan by an Unrelated Party. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is an assumption of a 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊

loan?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 An assumption of a loan occurs when one legal entity takes on the contractual obligation 

of another legal entity. This usually occurs when a business or residence (if a disaster 

home loan) is sold. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-15

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What are some of 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

the different types of assumptions?

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) When the borrower changes form of legal entity, see paragraph 4-13.k. titled 

"Assumptions -- Approve a borrower's change in form of organization." 

 

 (2) If an individual is looking to purchase a business in which they are currently 

employed and in which they hold a key management position, you may not need 

to conduct a detailed credit analysis as required for individuals not associated 

with the firm. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do you process a loan assumption?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You must: 

 (a) Identify the reason for the assumption. Except for unilateral authority 

actions, the assumption must have prior approval of the SBA. 

 (b) Analyze an assumption request in the same way that you would analyze a 

new loan application. To guide you through this process you are 

 strongly encouraged to use the lender checklist and loan assumption 

 worksheet when considering an assumption. (Appendix 29, "Loan 

 Assumption Guidelines") 

 (c) Have counsel review the assumptor's form of legal entity and related 

organizational documents. 

 (d) Check the assumption agreement to identify the terms of the assumption 

for all parties. 

 (e) NOT release existing obligors from liability, except in rare cases and if the 

assumptor is "reasonably equal" or better in the areas of both financial and 

business experience. This release must be supported in the 327 action. 

 (2) If there is any indication of the existence of an environmental hazard, you must 

NOT release an existing obligor(s) or other personal collateral pledged as security 

unless additional equivalent collateral is offered for substitution. 

 (3) If the existing obligor is receiving substantial income from the transaction and 

there is doubt whether the assumptor is "reasonably equal," you should not release 

the existing obligor and should obtain a stand-by agreement if a note was 

executed for these funds. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-16 

 (4) Development company loans: 

 (a) Regulations:

 1 37.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊3 CFR  120.9

 Assumption.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 A 504 loan may be assumed with SBA's prior written approval.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) The CDC must:

 i. Identify the status of the participating third party loan (first 

mortgage) and obtain the lender's concurrence for the assumption 

if the lender will remain as the third party lender for the assumptor. 

 

 ii. Submit the SBA Form 1614, "Loan Information Request," CSA to 

obtain the assumption loan balance. 

 iii. Notify the CSA when the assumption is approved. 

 iv. Provide the CSA with an IRS Form W-9, Request for Taxpayer 

Identification Number and Certification, indicating the assumptor's 

identification number and name, the pre-authorized debit form, and 

a copy of the assumption agreement including the agreement to 

comply with the servicing agent agreement. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA counsel review 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

of 327 actions for loan assumptions.

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The SBA counsel must review all 327 actions involving assumptions. 

 (2) The SBA relies on the lender's attorney to review documents for legal sufficiency. 

11. Processing "Paid in Full" Loans. 

 When a loan is "paid in full," you must release all collateral of any nature, unless the collateral is 

pledged to secure another loan. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Generally, you should process the release only after receipt of SBA Form 397, "Notice of 

Fully Paid Account," (Appendix 7) from DFC. However, at the borrower's request prior 

to receipt of the SBA 397, you may recommend approval of the release of collateral by 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-17

327 action if: 

 (1) Payment in full is by certified or cashier's check; or 

 (2) Payment in full is by check from an attorney or escrow agent, and you are 

confident that no problems will be encountered in collecting any outstanding 

balance. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Development company loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Generally, you will process the release of collateral only after receiving a memorandum 

from the CSA confirming receipt of funds to pay the loan in full. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender is responsible for releasing collateral for lender-serviced loans. The SBA 

relies on the lender's attorney to review documents for legal sufficiency. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reinstatement of a loan.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 There may be circumstances where a loan is mistakenly reported as paid in full by a 

lender. For guidance on how to reinstate an SBA guaranty on a loan see Chapter 10, 

"Miscellaneous Issues Regarding Participating Loans," in paragraph 3, "Reinstating an 

SBA Guaranty." 

12. Proceeds from Condemnation of a Borrower's Collateral. 

 You must determine whether the loss of the property being condemned will adversely affect the 

operation of the business. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 If the borrower uses the proceeds from the condemnation to replace the condemned 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

property, you may release the proceeds:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) To the borrower, if the borrower documents the replacement and you have the 

required liens on the replacement property; or 

 (2) To a trustee, if the trustee will release funds as the borrower replaces the 

collateral and will file the required liens on the replacement property. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-18 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You may release the proceeds to the borrower without consideration, if:

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The property condemned is not significant to the operation of the business; 

 (2) The loss does not adversely affect the value of SBA's collateral; and 

 (3) The proceeds from the condemnation are not significant (less than $5,000 or 

10 percent of the loan whichever is greater). 

13. Release of, or Changes to, a Standby Agreement. 

 For you to be able to recommend a borrower's request to make a full or partial payment to a 

standby creditor, you must: 

 a. Prepare an SBA Form 327. 

 b. Weigh the original reasons for requiring the standby agreement against the present ability 

of the borrower to pay the standby creditor. 

 c. Consider the risk, if any, to full and timely repayment of the SBA loan. You must 

analyze the effect of the change on the cash flow of the business in conjunction with all 

other debts (including SBA's). 

 d. For this action to be approved, cash flow/repayment ability for all debts, including debts 

on SBA loans, must exist. You must base your actions on at least 3 months of adequate 

cash flow/repayment ability. 

14. Guarantor Release/Substitution. 

 You may, using a 327 action, recommend the release of a secured or an unsecured guaranty, or 

accept other guaranties or collateral of any worthwhile type, in substitution for a secured or an 

unsecured guaranty being released. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Guarantor's obligat

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ion for repayment.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Personal guaranties on SBA Form 148, Guaranty, are guaranties of payment of the entire 

indebtedness unless specifically limited or qualified. When a loan becomes significantly 

delinquent, guarantors should be advised of their obligation and requested to cure the 

default or see that the borrower makes arrangements to do so. If it is apparent that the 

borrower's financial condition will not allow payments to keep the loan current, and the 

guarantors have the financial ability to make payments, they should be required to do so. 

 The SBA guaranty forms provide that guarantors must furnish financial statements on 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-19

request. Accordingly, if there is any question as to the ability of the guarantors to furnish 

aid to the borrowers, statements should obtained. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Criteria to be considered before effecting release.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The following points must be considered before taking any actions to release or substitute 

guarantees. 

 (1) The status of the loan.

 It should be current in all respects without a history of unjustified delinquencies, 

unpaid taxes, or deferment of installments. 

 (2) Written requests.

 The field office must have a written request from the borrower, the guarantor to 

be released, or the proposed substitute. 

 (3) Consent of other parties.

 The written consent of all parties (e.g., other guarantors, standby creditors, etc.) 

must be obtained before the transaction is finalized. 

 (4) Opinion of counsel.

 You must obtain the opinion of counsel showing that no legal rights of the 

Agency will be adversely affected. 

 (5) Sale or reorganization.

 Where a request is received for the release of a guarantor because of 

reorganization or sale of the firm, you must obtain full information as to the terms 

and conditions of the proposed transaction. You must take care to ensure that the 

guarantor's position is not improved at the expense of SBA, or that a possible loss 

to the guarantor is not passed on to the Agency. Wherever possible, 

you/lender/CDC should urge the parties to pay off the debt to SBA (or apply any 

available cash to it), and require the guarantee to the extent of the cost paid to 

him/her (limited guarantee). The guarantor should not be permitted to substitute 

SBA for his or her ownership position. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-20 

 (6) Evaluation of substitute guarantors.

 Before you recommend accepting a substitute guarantor in place of the original, 

you should analyze/compare the values of the guarantors. The borrower must 

furnish personal financial statements and any other information satisfactory to the 

approving official. 

 (7) Claim against estate of deceased debtor.

 (a) Generally you should file a claim against the estate of the deceased debtor 

(guarantor obligor), via SBA Form 327. 

 (b) You do not need to transfer the case file to "In Liquidation/Litigation" for 

the sole purpose of filing a Proof Of Claim unless there is other 

justification, such as business ceased operation or other legal 

consideration (bankruptcy, etc.). 

 (c) The approving official should NOT approve the release of a claim unless: 

 i. The death has had no adverse affect on the business operation; 

 ii. The loan is seasoned; 

 iii. The experience satisfactory; and 

 iv. The collateral is reasonably adequate to secure the remaining loan 

balance. 

 v. Any such release of claim must have supporting written 

documentation. You may consider recommending placing the 

proceeds from claims in an escrow account for equitable 

distribution at a later date depending on business viability, 

remaining collateral and other assurances of full repayment of the 

remaining loan balance. 

 (d) SBA and lender-serviced loans and development company loans. 

 The 327 action for release of a guarantor must have SBA counsel's review. 

 (You may approve the addition of a guarantor without counsel's review.) 

15. Extension to the Maturity of the Borrower's Loan. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-21

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Maximum maturities based on the Small Business Act.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) For 7(a) loans, the maximum term is 25 years, which includes renewals and 

extensions. 

 (2) For 7(b) loans (disaster loans), the maximum term is 30 years, which includes 

renewal and extensions. Under the law, if the Agency determines it is necessary 

to avoid severe financial hardship, it can approve an extension of the maturity not 

to exceed 5 years at a time, up to a maximum of 30 years. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Justification for extension of maturity.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 As a general rule, you may extend the maturity of a loan (but not beyond the statutory 

maximums) if the borrower is not able to pay off the loan balance at the original note 

maturity date, because the borrower received a deferment(s), or reduction in loan 

payments, during the term of the loan which resulted in a balloon at the end of the note. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Special exception.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Loans having "maximum" maturities as stated above, may be renewed, or the maturity 

extended, for additional periods not exceeding 10 years as an aid to the orderly 

liquidation of the loan. This provision does not require that a loan be classified as "In 

Liquidation" or that a foreclosure action be initiated. It permits extensions of maturity 

beyond the stated "maximum" for orderly repayment of the 

 debt. This provision may be used only when absolutely necessary and primarily for 

the benefit of the Agency.

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120 31 .5 .

 Extension of maturity.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 SBA may agree to extend the maturity of a loan for up to 10 years beyond its original maturity if the 

extension will aid in the orderly repayment of the loan.

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Loans sold in the secondary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender must obtain written approval of the registered holder (through the FTA) prior 

to submitting the request to SBA. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-22 

 You must not extend the maturity until SBA purchases the debenture and transfers the 

loan servicing to SBA. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Regulations: 

 1  20 5  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊3 CFR 1 . 24.(a).

 When is SBA released from liability on its guarantee?  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 (8) The Lender has failed to request that SBA purchase a guarantee within 120 days after 

maturity of the loan;...

 (2) The lender must submit to SBA a written request for an extension or 

reinstatement of maturity. 

 (3) The SBA guaranty expires 120 days after the maturity date of the note. An 

extension of the maturity automatically extends the guaranty. The SBA is not 

obligated to purchase the guaranteed portion of a loan if the lender did not 

demand purchase or request to extend the maturity within 120 days after maturity. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serv

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

iced and CDC loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must submit an amendment to a note to SBA counsel for review.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

16. Interest Rate Changes. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For changes to the borrower's interest rate which result in an increase to the rate, the 

lender must have SBA's prior written consent. This does not apply to the prime feature 

of a variable rate loan. The lender must have SBA's approval to increase the spread on a 

variable rate loan. (e.g., prime + 1 -- The "prime" rate can be adjusted according to the 

note and authorization. The spread "+1" must not be increased without SBA's approval.) 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Loans sold in the secondary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender must have written approval from the registered holder (through the FTA) for 

an interest rate change. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-23

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The interest rate can NOT be changed, unless all of the following items have been met: 

 (1) The loan has been transferred into liquidation or workout status; 

 (2) The SBA has purchased the debenture; and 

 (3) Servicing has been transferred to SBA. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Interest rate increases.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You should NOT recommend approval for an increase in the interest rate unless the 

increase results in an overall lower cost to the borrower. [e.g., Where two outstanding 

loans had different rates and had been refinanced into one loan (decreasing the rate for 

one and increasing the rate for the second) resulting in a reduced combined payment and 

cost to the borrower.] 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 For SBA serviced loans, including development company loans transferred to SBA, 

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

you must work with SBA counsel to prepare the amendment to the note.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

17. Other Loan Repayment Term Changes. 

 a. You may recommend approving a change in the frequency of payments (e.g., from 

monthly to quarterly, seasonal, annual, etc.). The change should not result in a change in 

the amount of principal reduction, unless other factors indicate that the 

 change is desirable. (See Chapter 7, "Workout and Intensive Servicing Responsibilities of 

Field Offices and Service Centers.") 

 For any change in payments, you must consider the impact on the cash flow of the 

borrower. 

 b. You may recommend approving a change in loan payments as a part of a loan workout 

plan. 

18. Hazard Insurance Requirements. 

 a. Every borrower must maintain hazard insurance coverage as required in the loan 

authorization. The policy must reflect appropriate loss payee clauses covering the 

lender/CDC/SBA. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-24 

 b. SBA-serviced loans. 

 Each month the SBA Form 1201, "Repayment Notice," reminds the borrower of his/her 

responsibility to maintain hazard insurance. 

 c. Lender and CDC-serviced loans. 

 The lender/CDC is responsible for monitoring each loan to ensure that the borrower is 

maintaining insurance at the required levels. 

 d. You may recommend approving a reduction in coverage only if the loan is seasoned and 

the assets covered by the insurance have been sold or depreciated. 

 e. If, during the life of a loan, circumstances are such that adequate insurance (or 

assignment of interest in insurance) on collateral is not obtainable or is available only at 

an exorbitant cost, the loan file must contain a memorandum explaining the unavailability 

of coverage. 

 f. It is the general practice of SBA not to purchase or maintain payments on hazard 

insurance on property securing a loan. However, purchase by SBA of insurance coverage 

may be necessary when: 

 (1) The value of the collateral appears to reasonably assure ultimate recovery of the 

full amount of borrower's debt including advances made to purchase insurance; 

 (2) It is necessary to preserve a third party guaranty; 

 (3) Damage to the property may result in the owner or other obligors having a right to 

recourse against SBA as "Mortgagee in Possession" or otherwise; 

 (4) The value of the Agency's collateral equity is substantial; 

 (5) The potential for consequential loss is significant; 

 (6) The period of SBA purchased coverage is clearly limited; and 

 (7) The obligors are not in a position to pay the necessary premiums. 

 g. When a decision has been made not to purchase/maintain insurance, a 327 action is not 

required. In the event of special circumstances, SBA purchase of insurance might be 

advisable. In all instances where you decide to recommend purchasing insurance, a 

simultaneous determination must be made (on the same 327 action) as to the advisability 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-25

of a reclassification of the account to "In Liquidation" status. 

 NOTE: Refer to SOP 50 51, Chapter 22, "Insurance: Property, Life, and Public Liability" 

for additional information.

19. Life Insurance Requirements. 

 a. Each borrower must maintain life insurance coverage as required in the loan 

authorization. The policy must reflect appropriate loss payee clauses covering the 

lender/CDC/SBA. The SBA generally requires reducing term life insurance. However, 

you may accept other forms of insurance such as whole life or universal life. 

 b. You may recommend approving a reduction in coverage as the balance is reduced and the 

loan becomes seasoned. 

 c. The SBA does not generally purchase or maintain payments on life insurance for the 

loan. 

 d. If, during the life of a loan, circumstances are such that adequate insurance (or 

assignment of interest in insurance) on a principal is not obtainable or is available only at 

an exorbitant cost, the loan file must contain a memorandum explaining the unavailability 

of coverage. 

 e. Notice to guarantors and beneficiaries. 

 You must advise all guarantors in writing immediately when you receive notice of 

cancellation of assigned life insurance on the life of any borrower, principal of borrower, 

or other guarantor. 

 You must consult with counsel to determine if the consent of other parties, such as 

beneficiaries or guarantors, is necessary for actions affecting life insurance used as 

collateral. 

 f. If the insured party will not continue payment of premiums, you should consider 

surrendering the policy to the issuing company for the cash surrender value to protect 

against invocation of automatic premium loans. Prior to surrendering any policy, you 

should give each guarantor an opportunity to pay the premiums. You must apply 

proceeds on the loan inverse order of maturity (i.e., to the end of the note), transaction 

code 304 (Collection of Loans-Repayment by Borrower-Inverse Order of Maturity). 

 g. Lender and CDC-serviced loans. 

 The lender and CDC are responsible for monitoring all loans to ensure that the borrower 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-26 

is maintaining insurance at the required levels. 

 NOTE: Refer to SOP 50 51, Chapter 22, "Insurance: Property, Life, and Public Liability" 

for additional information.

20. Proceeds of Life Insurance upon Death of Insured. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Proceeds upon death of insured. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must apply proceeds of life insurance on the principal of the loan without advancing 

the payment date [process payments using "code 304," inverse order of maturity (IOM)]. 

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You may consider requests (by 327 action) for the release of funds for other 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

purposes if:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) There is evidence that the release of funds would serve a valid business purpose 

and the business and loan remain viable; or 

 (2) The death of the insured has no serious effect on the management of the business 

and full payment is anticipated in accordance with the repayment terms. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You may recommend approving placement of funds in an escrow/collateral account 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

with proper controls if:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The policy was owned by a guarantor; 

 (2) The application of funds would result in an unfair or inequitable situation; and 

 (3) The collateral/repayment situation is not strong enough to allow release or weak 

enough to require immediate application of the funds. 

 (4) Funds placed in such an escrow account may be considered for future release if 

the borrower demonstrates repayment ability, or if the items noted above have 

been overcome. The request for release would be processed as described in 

paragraph 5-5 titled, "Release of Collateral." 

 NOTE: You should only consider the release of these funds in rare circumstances with 

strong justification.

21. Claims Against Estates of Deceased Borrowers/Guarantors. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

5-27

 When a borrower or guarantor dies, you should file your claim against the estate of the deceased. 

 You should use an 327 action to initiate the claim. You do not need to transfer the loan into "In 

Liquidation/Litigation" just to file a Proof Of Claim, unless there is other justification, (e.g., a 

business has ceased operation or there are other legal considerations such as bankruptcy filings.) 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You may recommend not filing a claim by a 327 action if:

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The death has no adverse affect on the business operation; 

 (2) The loan is seasoned and SBA's experience with the business is satisfactory 

(including current management); and 

 (3) The collateral is reasonably adequate to secure the remaining loan balance. 

 Any release of claim must be supported by written documentation. 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You may recommend placing claim proceeds into an escrow/collateral account for 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

release and equitable distribution at 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

a later date if:

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The business is viable, but the loan is not seasoned; 

 (2) The remaining collateral is NOT reasonably adequate to secure the loan balance; 

and 

 (3) You do NOT have other assurances of full repayment of the remaining loan 

balance. 

 

 Funds placed into an escrow account may be considered for future release if the borrower 

demonstrates repayment ability. The request for release would be processed as described 

in paragraph 5-5 titled, "Release of Collateral." 

22. Flood Insurance Requirements. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Background.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP) is administered primarily under 

two statutes: the National Flood Insurance Act of 1968 (1968 Act) and the Flood 

Disaster Protection Act of 1973 (1973 Act). The 1968 Act made Federally 

subsidized flood insurance available to owners of improved real estate or mobile 

homes located in special flood hazard areas (SFHA) if their community 

participates in the NFIP. An SFHA is an area within a flood plain having a 1 

percent or greater chance of flood occurrence in any given year. The SFHAs are 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-28 

delineated on maps issued by the Federal Emergency Management Agency 

(FEMA) for individual communities. A community establishes its eligibility to 

participate in the NFIP by adopting and enforcing floodplain management 

measures to regulate new construction and by making substantial improvements 

within its SFHAs to eliminate or minimize future flood damage. 

 (2) The 1973 Act amended the NFIP by requiring the regulators of the lenders to 

issue regulations governing the lending institutions they supervise (regulated 

lending institutions or regulated lenders). These regulations directed lenders to 

require flood insurance on improved real estate or mobile homes serving as 

collateral for a loan (security property) if the security property was located, or 

was to be located, in an SFHA in a participating community. To implement 

statutory amendments enacted in 1974, the regulations required lenders to notify 

borrowers that their security property is located in an SFHA and of the 

availability of Federal disaster assistance with respect to the property in the event 

of a flood. 

 (3) The National Flood Insurance Reform Act of 1994 comprehensively revised the 

Federal flood insurance statutes. It is intended to increase compliance with flood 

insurance requirements and participation in the NFIP in order to provide 

additional income to the National Flood Insurance Fund and to decrease the 

financial burden of flooding on the Federal Government, taxpayers, and flood 

victims. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Requirements.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) When any loan secured by improved real estate or a mobile home and any 

personal property is located in a special flood hazard area (SFHA), as determined 

by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), and if the community 

participates in the NFIP, the borrower is required to obtain flood insurance. The 

policy must reflect a loss payee clause covering the lender/CDC/SBA as 

appropriate. 

 (2) After the loan is made, the borrower must maintain such flood insurance for the 

life of the loan. This means that if a lender (for example, a participating lender in 

a 7(a) loan, or the SBA, for a direct/disaster loan) increases, extends or renews the 

loan, it must review the adequacy of flood insurance coverage. The lender must 

use FEMA Form 81-93, Standard Flood Hazard Determination Form, to ascertain 

whether the property is in an SFHA in which flood insurance is available. The 

Form may be used in a printed, computerized, or electronic manner, and the 

lender must retain a completed copy in its files. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Amount of flood insurance.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-29

 The amount of flood insurance must be at least equal to the lesser of the outstanding 

principal balance of the loan or the maximum limit of coverage available for the 

particular type of property. Flood insurance coverage is limited to the overall value of 

the property securing the loan minus the value of the land on which the property is 

located. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Forced placement of flood insurance.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If the lender, or a service provider acting on behalf of the lender, determines at any time 

during the life of a loan, that the building or personal property securing the loan is not 

covered by flood insurance or is covered by an inadequate amount of flood insurance, the 

lender or its service provider must notify the borrower that the borrower must obtain 

flood insurance. If the borrower fails to obtain flood insurance within 45 days, the lender 

or its service provider must purchase the insurance on the borrower's behalf at the 

borrower's expense. The borrower can be charged for the cost of premiums and fees 

incurred in purchasing the insurance. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reduction in coverage.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You may recommend a reduction in flood insurance as you release affected collateral, but 

the amount of the insurance must not go below the required amounts as set forth above. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Events which trigger a review of the adequacy of flood insurance coverage.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The events that trigger a lender's obligation to review the adequacy of flood insurance 

coverage is the making, increasing, extending, or renewing of a loan. This means that a 

loan purchase is not an event that triggers the obligation to make a flood hazard 

determination. Thus, when SBA purchases the guaranteed portion (XGP), it has no 

obligation to ascertain flood insurance coverage. Similarly, the purchaser of a loan in the 

secondary market does not have such obligation. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Unavailability of flood insurance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If a borrower had the requisite flood insurance at the commencement of the loan, and the 

community drops out of the NFIP, it is possible that flood insurance would no longer be 

available for the remaining life of the loan. If such is the case, this information must be 

maintained in the lender's file to explain the subsequent unavailability of flood insurance 

coverage. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General rule to provide notice of flood insurance requirement when 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

ColPur is 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-30 

transferred.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If you/lender transfer collateral [i.e. it is collateral purchased or acquired by SBA or its 

participating lender (ColPur) through SBA liquidation action], you/lender are required 

under the National Flood Insurance Reform Act of 1994 to provide notice to the 

transferee. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

ColPur.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 This requirement applies to commercial, personal, or residential property for 

which: 

 (a) Federal flood disaster assistance has been provided; 

 (b) Such assistance was conditioned upon the owner obtaining flood 

insurance; and 

 (c) The borrower did not obtain or maintain flood insurance. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Notice.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Before you or the lender transfers such property, you must notify the transferee of 

the requirement to obtain and maintain flood insurance. 

 i

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender and CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender and CDC are responsible for monitoring each loan to ensure that the 

borrower is maintaining insurance at the required levels. 

 (2) Lenders and CDCs have no unilateral authority for changes to flood insurance 

requirements. 

23. Proceeds from Insurance Claims for Losses on Collateral. 

 a. You must promptly deliver, to the collateral cashier, all checks and drafts: 

 (1) Issued in settlement of loss or damage to collateral; and 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-31

 (2) Presented to SBA for endorsement, including those presented by "walk-in" 

borrowers. 

 The collateral cashier will notify the responsible loan officer.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b. You must use a 327 action to recommend the release of checks for more than $5,000. 

You must put a photocopy of the check in the loan file. 

 Your 327 action should document that: 

 (1) The loan is current, or you have made satisfactory arrangements to cure any 

defaults; and 

 (2) The property has been repaired, restored, or replaced or was excess to 

borrower/SBA needs, or you have designated a lender/CDC or other party to 

monitor repair or replacement of collateral and to serve as trustee to release funds 

as necessary. 

 c. If the request is for the release of $100,000 or greater to replace or repair property, you 

must require documentation to ensure discharge of materialmen's or workmen's liens 

against the property (except for required ongoing payments during the construction 

period to the appropriate contractors). 

 d. For release of checks for settlement of losses of $5,000 or less: 

 (1) If there is not a good reason for withholding endorsement, you may initial the 

check register and endorse the check, if authorized to perform this function; and 

 (2) The collateral cashier may return the check to the borrower. You must place a 

copy of the letter (if used) and a copy of the check in the loan file. 

 e. When the borrower's loan is paid-in-full, you must promptly release any remaining 

balance of insurance funds. 

24. Borrower Financial Statements: Changes in Form or Frequency. 

 a. The loan authorization generally requires the borrower to periodically submit balance 

sheets and profit and loss statements. The SBA does not require financial statements for 

disaster business loans with balances less than $5,000 or for any disaster home loans. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-32 

 b. There are generally four types of financial statements. Three types of financial 

statements are prepared by an independent accountant. They are audited, reviewed, and 

compiled financial statements. There are also the internally prepared statements that are 

prepared by the business itself. 

 (1) Audited.

 Audited financial statements are prepared by and verified by an independent 

auditor. They include a study and evaluation of internal accounting control. The 

accountant/auditor will provide an opinion of the statements based on an 

examination made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards 

(GAAS) and may include any other tests that the auditor may deem necessary. 

 Opinion statements must be prepared by an independent public accountant who is 

certified, licensed or registered in the State or local jurisdiction. The accountant 

is independent when neither he/she nor an immediate family member has a 

material, managerial, or financial interest, directly or indirectly in borrower's 

business operation other than as an accountant. 

 An accountant's unqualified opinion is his/her statement that the data submitted 

fairly represents the financial condition of the business. 

 (2) Reviewed.

 An accountant performs inquiry and analytical procedures (e.g., limited testing of 

accounts) that provide a reasonable basis for the accountant to express limited 

assurance that there are no material modifications that should be made to the 

statements for them to be in conformity with generally accepted accounting 

principals (GAAP). A review would not include a study and evaluation of 

internal accounting control and other aspects of an opinion audit. Consequently, a 

review may disclose certain important matters but not necessarily all matters that 

would be disclosed in an audit. 

 (3) Compiled.

 A compilation involves the accountant putting together the financial statements of 

a firm without auditing or expressing any opinion on the statements. 

 (4) Internal.

 Internal statements are prepared by the borrower for which there are no minimum 

accounting standards. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-33

 c. Borrower's certification. 

 (1) A borrower's certification is a statement by the owner, a general partner, or an 

authorized officer of a corporate borrower that to the best of his/her knowledge 

the data submitted fairly represents the business financial condition. 

 (2) You should require a Borrower's Certification when the loan balance exceeds 

$100,000, and: 

 (a) The financial statements have a qualified opinion (e.g., the data was not 

verified) or the accountant otherwise disclaims responsibility for the 

fairness of the statements and data. The qualified statements should be 

addressed as notes in the financial statements. When the qualification is 

based on limitations of scope, it should be addressed in the auditors report. 

 (b) The financial statements are a compilation or internally prepared 

statements. 

 (3) If a qualified opinion is provided for a loan over $100,000, the borrower should 

satisfactorily explain the reasons for the qualified statements. 

 d. You should review the financial statements. If no substantially adverse information 

and/or trend is evident, you should place a comment in the Delinquent Loan Collection 

System (DLCS) that the statements have been reviewed. If you see an adverse trend or 

other information, you should determine if a full reconciliation is necessary. You may 

consider referral to one of the resources available to the borrower (e.g., SCORE, SBDC, 

etc.). The following are some problem indicators: 

 (1) Operating losses; 

 (2) Deficit or negative net worth; 

 (3) Excessive salaries, dividends, and owner's equity withdrawals; 

 (4) Excessive increase or decrease in accounts receivable (A/R) or inventory; 

 (5) Excessive increase or decrease in accounts payable (A/P) and notes payable 

(N/P); 

 (6) Slow collection of A/R and slow payments of A/P; and 

 (7) Tax liabilities of any substance. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-34 

 e. Form of statements required. 

 (1) You may require audited year end statements to properly analyze the condition of 

the business due to the size of the loan or the complexity of the business. You 

should use discretion in requiring audited statements because of the high cost to 

the borrower. 

 (2) Interim statements may be accepted as presented with the accountant's or the 

borrower's certification that they are correct and complete. You should analyze 

interim statements submitted with a loan servicing request. 

 (3) A borrower may not have available financial statements to support a requested 

servicing action. In this case, you may accept other financial information such as 

income tax returns, credit reports, etc. 

 f. If audited statements are required and if the loan is seasoned, you may recommend: 

 (1) Waiving audited financial statements, or changing the audit requirement to 

compilation or review where, in your judgement: 

 (a) The business is not of a size and type to warrant such statements; 

 (b) The payment and servicing history is satisfactory; or 

 (c) The cost would be prohibitive to the borrower. 

 (2) Granting waivers for only 1 year at a time and must reserve the right to reinstate 

the requirement in the event of loan default. 

 (3) Recommending approving changes in financial statement frequency and/or due 

date requirements, as necessary. 

25. Loan Agreement Management Compliance Covenants (Salary/Dividend Limits, 

Performance Ratios, etc). 

 a. An authorization may include covenants that: 

 (1) Restrict the borrower's authority to increase salaries, grant bonuses and distribute 

dividends without lender/SBA approval; and 

 (2) Require the borrower to obtain approval for deviations from business 

performance ratios for working capital, debt to equity, etc. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-35

 b. For seasoned SBA-serviced loans, you may recommend waiving theses requirements 

with justification if the action is consistent with prudent lending/credit practices as 

discussed in paragraph 4-12 titled, "What is Unilateral Authority?" 

26. Assignment of Interest in a Loan/Transfer of Loan(s). 

 The assignment of an interest in a loan occurs when a loan is transferred from one lender to 

another. The "Guaranty Agreement" provides that either party may assign its rights or 

obligations in any guaranteed loan within certain constraints as follows. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assignment with consent.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Either party may assign, in whole or in part, its rights or obligations under the guaranty 

agreement in any guaranteed loan with the prior written consent of the other party. This 

includes transfers pursuant to secondary participation agreements. See Chapter 8, "The 

Secondary Market for Guaranteed Loans," for more details. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assignment with notice.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 For the lender (or holder of the note), "Assignor," to be able to make assignment to other 

lending institutions "Assignee," the Assignor lender must: 

 (1) Provide written notice of the assignment to SBA; 

 (2) Retain an unguaranteed interest of not less than 10 percent of the outstanding 

principal amount of the loan; 

 (3) Have no greater rights than the Assignee; and 

 (4) Continue to deal solely with SBA as to the entire loan. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assignment without notice.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender may, without notice to SBA, use any guaranteed loan as security for: 

 (1) Treasury tax and loan accounts; 

 (2) The deposit of public funds; 

 (3) Uninvested trust funds; or 
SOP 50 50 4

5-36 

 (4) Discount borrowing at the Federal Reserve Bank, provided: 

 (a) The lender has not sold or otherwise assigned any part of the guaranteed 

loan; and 

 (b) The lender retains full authority to perform its responsibilities under the 

guaranty agreement. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assignment by lender of its en

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

tire participation. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 With respect to guaranteed loans, you may recommend approval of an assignment by a 

lender of its entire interest in a loan to another qualified lender (loan transfer), provided 

Counsel determines this Agency's legal rights will not be adversely affected by the 

assignment. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Procedure when the assignment does not affect legal rights.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 When an original lender makes an assignment of its entire interest in a loan to 

another qualified lender: 

 (a) The original lender may remain obligated for any deficiencies which may 

result from its closing or servicing the loan; or 

 (b) The purchasing lender may assume that obligation. 

 In either instance, the Age

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

ncy's legal rights will not be affected.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Procedure when the assignment may affect legal rights.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If the original lender refuses to remain liable or the purchasing lender will not 

assume liability for deficiencies in the loan that may have resulted in the closing 

or servicing of the loan up to the time of transfer, transfer of the loan must not be 

approved. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Assignment by lender of a portion of its participa

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

tion in an immediate participation 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

loan.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A lender may assign a portion of its share in a loan to another qualified lender with 

SBA's prior written consent. In such cases, you must receive: 

 (1) An agreement from the original participating institution that it will remain liable 

under the participation agreement as if such assignment(s) had not been made; 

and that SBA may deal solely with it regarding portion(s) assigned. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-37

 (2) An agreement from the assignee that any and all security it holds, or receives to 

further secure the loan, must also secure the interests of the original participant 

and SBA, and that it will not reassign its interest in the loan or any portion thereof 

except to the original lender without written consent of SBA. 

27. Transfer of Loans between Participating Lenders. 

 a. You must use a 327 action (rule of two) to recommend approval of a transfer of an 

individual loan (including more than one loan to the same borrower) from one lender to 

another. If the sale (transfer) of loans is a result of a whole bank or a branch being sold, 

the transfer may be approved under the rule of two. A request to approve a transfer for 

more than one loan (except for loans to the same borrower) must be sent to the AA/FA or 

designee for approval. When processing an action for transfer, you must address the 

following items: 

 

 (1) Did the borrower request the transfer, and will it benefit the borrower? 

 (2) What is the purpose of the transfer? 

 (3) When transferring a loan, the lender must notify the borrower of the details of the 

transfer. 

 (4) Does the lender acquiring the SBA guaranteed loan have an executed SBA Form 

750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement?" (Also, identify the type of lender, e.g., CLP, 

PLP, LowDoc, etc.) 

 (5) Is the transfer in compliance with the paragraph 26, "Assignment of Interest in a 

Loan/Transfer of Loan(s)?" [i.e., Is the loan being transferred without recourse, 

or is the original lender (Assignor/transferor) remaining liable for actions that 

may have occurred on the loan from the closing or servicing of the loan up to the 

time of transfer?] 

 (6) For transfer of a loan sold in the secondary market, both the buying and the 

selling lenders must provide written notification to the fiscal transfer agent (FTA) 

of the transfer and of SBA's approval. 

 b. You must not permit a lender to act as a "clearing house" for any other lender 

(e.g., lender "A" packages a loan under its name and submits it to SBA on behalf of 

lender "B." Then, after the loan is approved, lender "A" transfers the loan to lender "B"). 

 Transfers between branches of the same lender do not require SBA's approval. 

 

 c. With all transfers, you must review the computer database (PMQD screens) to determine 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-38 

whether the loan being transferred has been erroneously marked paid-in-full(PIF). If it 

has been marked PIF, you will need to reinstate the loan. When a transfer is approved, 

advise the lender that on the SBA Form 1502, Guaranty Loan Status & Remittance 

Form, the lender must mark the loan as "Transferred" NOT paid in full, "PIF." 

 d. Only the AA/FA, or designee can approve transfers of multiple loans for multiple 

borrowers from one lender to another lender. Your request for approval must address the 

items identified in this section. 

 NOTE: Transfer of loans being submitted to the AA/FA for approval must have a 

recommendation for approval under the rule of two from the field office.

 e. Counsel review and comment on all loans transferred to another lender. 

 f. The lender transferring (selling) the loan may charge a fee to another participating lender 

assuming the loan which must not be passed on to the borrower. The lender may charge 

the borrower for out of pocket expenses it incurs in connection with the transfer of the 

loan (e.g., for legal documentation, filing fees, etc.). The lender must not charge the 

borrower for costs unrelated to the out of pocket expenses except for a minimal transfer 

fee ($500 - $1,000 depending on loan size and the time the loan was in the lender's 

portfolio) if applicable. 

 g. For FDIC transfers see the Chapter 12, "Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Takeover 

of a Participating Lender," for guidance regarding servicing of loans held by the FDIC. 

28. Surrender of CDC Certification & Transfer of Portfolio. 

 13 CFR 120.981.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Voluntary transfer and surrender of CDC certification.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 A CDC may not transfer its certification or withdraw from the 504 program without SBA's consent. The CDC 

must provide a plan to SBA to transfer its portfolio. The portfolio may only be transferred with SBA's written 

consent. If a CDC desires to withdraw from the 504 program, it must forfeit its portfolio to SBA. SBA may 

conduct an audit of the transferring or withdrawing CDC.

 For guidance on accepting the surrender of a CDC's certificate and transfer of the portfolio, see 

SOP 50 10, Business Loan Program, Loan Processing. 

29. Assistance Provided to Existing Borrowers who Suffer Losses in a Declared Disaster. 

 Obligor(s) who have suffered a total or near total physical loss may require exceptional 

assistance. Accordingly, and notwithstanding any limitations to the contrary in the governing 

SOP, the approving official may, when the physical loss suffered in a disaster is total or near 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-39

 total, approve an obligor(s) or participant's request to take all or a portion of the following 

actions: 

 a. Direct loans.

 (1) Defer payments up to six months without review of obligor(s) financial 

statements. The deferred period may: 

 (a) Retroactively start as of the date of the disaster; and 

 (b) Be extended for up to a total of 12 months. 

 (2) Waive interest on the loan (i.e., reduce it to 0 percent) during the deferred period. 

 (3) After the deferment period, adjust the interest to the lowest rate necessary to 

provide for: 

 (a) The obligor(s) survival; and 

 (b) The Agency's recovery. 

 The adjusted rate may apply whether or not the ob  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ligor(s) obtains a disaster loan.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (4) Extend and/or balloon the loan's maturity consistent with obligor(s) ability to 

repay without regard to the life of the collateral. 

 b. Guaranty loans.

 When requested to do so by the lender, you must initiate immediate action to purchase 

the loan from the lender or the secondary market, as applicable. A post-purchase review 

must be done and the lender should retain servicing. 

 As of the date of purchase, the approving official may: 

 (1) Waive interest which will accrue on SBA's share of the loan, after the date of 

purchase only. The deferral period may be extended for up to a total of 12 

months. 

 (2) After the deferral period, you may adjust the interest on the SBA share to the 

lowest rate necessary to provide for: 

 (a) The obligor(s) survival; and 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-40 

 (b) The Agency's recovery. 

 (3) The adjusted rate may apply whether or not the obligor(s) obtain a disaster loan. 

 For the protection of all parties, the note should be: 

 (a) Amended to reflect the period of no interest; and 

 (b) Amended to reflect the adjusted interest rate. 

 (4) Join the participant in extending or ballooning the loan's maturity consistent with 

obligor(s) ability to repay without regard to the life of the collateral. 

 (5) Sell SBA's portion (the guaranty portion) of the loan back to the participating 

lender. 

 (a) The lender may sell (or resell) SBA's share on the secondary market after 

the payments have been maintained as agreed for 12 consecutive months. 

The payments made by the borrower to the SBA, prior to SBA selling its 

portion back to the lender, can be included as part or all of the required 12 

months of payments. 

 (b) Unless all parties agree otherwise, the interest rate to be charged by the 

lender will continue at the adjusted rate. 

 NOTE: The lender is expected to agree with any relief in interest rates granted to 

the borrower. If they do not agree to reduce the interest rate on their share 

of the loan, then the Agency may reduce SBA's share unilaterally with a 

327 action. The lender must share in any deferment of payments and/or

extension of maturity. The assistance proposed must not be used in 

situations where the primary purpose is to benefit a guaranteed lender that 

is otherwise in a position to sustain a loss.

 c. SBA/FDIC loans with payments going to Colson Services Corp. (Colson).

 (1) When the guaranty is held by the secondary market investors the following must 

be done: 

 (a) Request payment transcript from Colson; 

 (b) Take necessary steps to purchase the guaranteed portion and grant the 

same type of relief as for guaranty loans; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-41

 (c) Conduct a post-purchase review; 

 (d) Enable SBA to service loan; and 

 (e) Advise obligor(s) that payments are to be sent directly to SBA. 

 NOTE: A pre-purchase review must be done if one was not performed at the time 

SBA took over servicing and if the guaranty is not being held by 

the secondary market investors.

 (2) In servicing/liquidation of the loan, SBA must unilaterally take any action 

deemed necessary to protect the Government's interests in the loan. 

 (a) Whose consent is not required when protecting the government's interest? 

 The Agency does NOT need the consent of: 

 i. Colson; 

 ii. FDIC; and 

 iii. Subsequent purchaser of FDIC's interests. 

 (b) What do SBA's actions apply to? 

 The SBA's actions apply to both the unguaranteed and the previously 

guaranteed portions of the loan. The lender's share of any expenses will 

be offset against future recoveries. 

 (3) Can the previously guaranteed portion be reinstated?

 No, under current SBA policy, the previously guaranteed portion cannot be 

reinstated. (This policy applies only if the loan is with FDIC.) 

 d. Development company loans.

 (1) When the borrower and the CDC request that SBA purchase the debenture, you 

must immediately initiate such action. 

 (2) Beginning on the date of the purchase, you may waive interest which will accrue 

on the SBA share of the loan after the date of the purchase, but cannot waive 

interest which has already accrued prior to the purchase. The deferment period 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-42 

may subsequently be extended for up to a total of 12 months. 

 (3) After the deferment period, you may adjust the interest on the SBA share to the 

lowest rate possible to provide for the borrower's survival and the SBA's 

recovery. The rate may be adjusted even if the borrower does not obtain a 

disaster loan. For the protection of all parties, the note should be amended to 

reflect the period of no interest and/or the adjusted interest rate, as applicable. 

 (4) After you purchase the debenture, you must treat the loan as you would any SBA 

serviced loan. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

5-43

SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-1

CHAPTER 6 

SPECIAL LOAN PROGRAMS 

1. General Guidance. 

 This chapter provides specific guidance on those regulations, policies, and procedures for the 

7(a) and 504 Programs. This chapter identifies the areas that are different from what has been 

stated in the other chapters and does not intend to repeat the general guidance already included 

elsewhere in this SOP. 

2. Participation 7(a) Loans. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Re

 ̊ ̊

gulations and policies.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The 7(a) Loan Program is governed by: 

 (1) 13 CFR Part 120. 

 (2) The SBA Form 750 agreement between SBA and the lender, and any 

supplemental guaranty agreement. 

3. Direct 7(a) Loans. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Purpose and authorit

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

y.

 ̊ ̊

 The SBA has statutory authority to make direct loans to certain categories of recipients. 

However, SBA has not received funding for direct loan programs for several years. 

Some examples of the special authorized, but unfunded programs are: 

 (1) Disabled Assistance Loans (DAL), formerly known as Handicapped Assistance 

Loans (HAL). 

 (2) Vietnam Veterans (Non-Disabled) (NVV), Vietnam Veterans (Disabled) (DVV), 

and Other Veterans (Disabled) (DOV). 

 (3) Low Income Individual Loans, formerly Economic Opportunity Loans (EOL). 

 For further information on the various special loan programs, see SOP 50 10.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-2 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servicing.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Servicing direct loans is solely the responsibility of SBA, so these loans will require 

more attention than lender-serviced guaranteed loans. 

4. Certified Lenders Program (CLP) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the CLP Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.440. 

 What is the Certified Lenders Program?  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Under the Certified Lenders Program (CLP), designated Lenders process, close, service, and may 

liquidate, SBA guaranteed loans. SBA gives priority to applications and servicing actions submitted by 

Lenders under this program, and will provide expedited loan processing or servicing. All other rules in 

this part 120 relating to the operations of Lenders apply to CLP Lenders.

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CLP loans 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

 type of lender.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The CLP lenders must service loans approved under the CLP Program in the same 

manner as loans approved under the Guaranteed Loan Program (GP). 

 (2) Preferred Lenders Program (PLP) lenders must service loans approved under the 

CLP program, in accordance with the PLP Program. See paragraph 6-5.b. titled, 

"PLP Lenders - SBA regulations regarding servicing responsibilities." 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA revocation of a Lender's CLP status.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.442. 

 Suspension or revocation of CLP status. 

 The AA/FA may suspend or revoke CLP status upon written notice providing the reasons at least 10 

business days prior to the effective date of the suspension or revocation. Reasons for suspension or 

revocation may include a loan performance record unacceptable to SBA, failure to make the required 

number of loans under the expedited procedures, or violations of applicable statutes, regulations or 

published SBA policies and procedures. A CLP Lender may appeal the suspension or revocation made 

under this section under procedures found in part 134 of this chapter. The action of the AA/FA remains 

in effect pending resolution of the appeal.
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-3

5. Preferred Lenders Program (PLP) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the PLP Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.450. 

 What is the Preferred Lender's Program?  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Under the Preferred Lenders Program (PLP), designated Lenders process, close, service, and liquidate 

SBA guaranteed loans with reduced requirements for documentation to and prior approval by SBA.

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 PLP lenders 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

 SBA regulations regarding servicing responsibilities.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120.453. 

 What are the requirements of a PLP Lender in servi  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊cing and liquidating SBA guaranteed loans?

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 The PLP Lender must service and liquidate its SBA guaranteed loan portfolio (including its non-PLP 

loans) using generally accepted commercial banking standards employed by prudent lenders. The PLP 

Lender must liquidate any defaulted SBA guaranteed loan in its portfolio unless SBA advises in writing 

that SBA will liquidate the loan. The PLP Lender must submit a liquidation plan to SBA prior to 

commencing liquidation action. The PLP Lender may take any necessary servicing action, or liquidation 

action consistent with a plan, for any SBA guaranteed loan in its portfolio, except it may not: 

 (a) Take any action that confers a Preference on the Lender; 

 (b) Accept a compromise settlement without prior written SBA consent; and 

 (c) Sell or pledge more than 90 percent of a PLP loan.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General servicing requirements.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The PLP lenders must service all SBA-guaranteed loans in their portfolio in the 

same manner that they service the non-guaranteed loans in their portfolios. The 

policies and procedures used for loan servicing must be based on prudent and 

responsible lending practices. 

 (2) The PLP lenders must be able to demonstrate, to SBA's satisfaction, that a 

servicing action taken on an SBA loan is consistent with: 

 (a) Actions taken on loans in the lender's non-guaranteed portfolio; and 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-4 

 (b) Generally accepted commercial banking standards. 

 (3) The SBA loans must receive the same level of case control, attention, 

responsibility, and professionalism as the non-guaranteed loans. 

 (4) There are several non-routine actions that a PLP lender must NOT take 

unilaterally, without SBA's prior written approval. 

 They must NOT: 

 (a) Take any action that would create a conflict of interest or confer any 

preference on the lender in collection or lien position with respect to 

SBA's position or the shared SBA/lender position on the guaranteed loan. 

 (b) Compromise with any obligor for less than the full amount due of the 

principal loan balance outstanding. Accrued interest can be adjusted by 

the lender, if justified, without prior SBA approval. 

 NOTE: Guarantors: If a loan is delinquent or liquidation is contemplated 

or underway, prior SBA approval is required to release a guarantor 

for less than the principal balance owed even if actual demand has 

not yet been made on the guarantor.

 (c) Title property in the name of the Agency without SBA's prior written 

approval. The lender must not acquire title (in their name or the Agency's) 

to environmentally impaired property (property which exceeds the 

minimum action levels established by relevant regulatory agencies). 

 (d) Transfer a loan to another lender. 

 (e) Sell or pledge more than 90 percent of a loan. 

 (5) The lender must notify the Agency in writing when unilateral changes are made 

that will require the Agency to make changes to the SBA database (such 

as changes to interest rate, maturity, etc). 

 (6) Adverse situations. 

 Refer to SOP 50 51, Chapter 10, "Special Programs," in paragraph 10-5 titled 

Preferred Lender Program (PLP)" for information on this topic. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-5

 

 (7) The SBA Revocation of a Lender's PLP Status. 

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.455. 

 Suspension or revocation of PLP status. 

 The AA/FA may suspend or revoke PLP status upon written notice providing the reasons at least 

10 business days prior to the effective date of the suspension or revocation. Reasons for 

suspension or revocation may include loan performance unacceptable to SBA, failure to make the 

required number of loans under the expedited procedures, or violations of applicable statutes, 

regulations or published SBA policies and procedures. A PLP lender may appeal the suspension 

or revocation made under this section under procedures found in part 134 of this chapter. The 

action of the AA/FA remains in effect pending resolution of the appeal.

6. Low Documentation Loan Program (LowDoc) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the purpose of the LowDoc Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 LowDoc is: 

 (1) An expedited process under the Agency's 7(a) Guaranty Loan Program, for loans 

in amounts of $150,000 or less; 

 (2) A financing vehicle which relies on the character and credit history of the 

borrower and the experience and judgment of the lender; and 

 (3) A streamlined loan application process, which reduces SBA paperwork. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 LowDoc 

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

 servicing responsibilities.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The lender must service its LowDoc loans using generally accepted commercial 

banking standards of loan servicing employed by prudent lenders. The lender 

must not use lower standards for LowDoc loans compared with other loans in the 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-6 

lender's portfolio of similar size and type. 

 (2) The lender may take all servicing actions without approval from SBA 

(unilaterally) that it deems prudent and necessary on non-liquidation loans except 

for the following non-routine actions. 

 They must not: 

 (a) Take any action that would create a conflict of interest or confer any 

preference on the lender in collection or lien position with respect to 

 SBA's position or the shared SBA/lender position on the guaranteed loan.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (b) Compromise with any obligor for less than the full amount due of the 

principal loan balance outstanding. Accrued interest can be adjusted by 

the lender, if justified, without prior SBA approval. 

 NOTE: Guarantors: If a loan is delinquent or liquidation is contemplated 

or underway, prior SBA approval is required to release a guarantor 

for less than the principal balance owed even if actual demand has 

not yet been made on the guarantor.

 (c) Title property in the name of the Agency without SBA's prior written 

approval. The lender must not acquire title (in their name or the Agency's) 

to environmentally impaired property (property which exceeds the 

minimum action levels established by relevant regulatory agencies). 

 (d) Transfer a loan to another lender. 

 (e) Sell or pledge more than 90 percent of a loan. 

 (3) The SBA expects the lender to perform unilateral servicing actions without 

concurrence by or notification to SBA, although the lender must retain 

documentation regarding the actions in the lender's loan files. 

 (4) As an exception to the rule, the lender must notify the Agency when unilateral 

changes are made that will require the Agency to make changes to the SBA 

database (such as changes to interest rate, maturity, etc). 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 LowDoc loan purchases.

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 How much interest SBA will pay.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-7

 The

 ̊  ̊ ̊

 SBA will pay a maximum of 120 days of accrued interest.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 When SBA will purchase its guaranty.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Generally, except for bankruptcy situations, SBA will not honor its guaranty on a 

LowDoc loan until the lender has: 

 (a) Liquidated all personal property; and 

 (b) Indicated in writing how it will pursue real property assets or other 

sources of recovery, including personal guarantors. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Exceptions to SBA's policy on when to purchase.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 The SBA may approve exceptions to this policy on a case-by-case basis if the 

lender submits to SBA: 

 (a) An adequate explanation for any delay; and 

 (b) A satisfactory recovery plan showing how and when the lender will 

liquidate all remaining assets. 

 NOTE: This exception/deviation from policy must be approved by the DD 

or designee at the field office level.

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Procedures for purchase.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) The SBA will make payment on its guaranty only after SBA has reviewed 

and approved all documentation supporting the making, closing, servicing, 

and liquidation of the loan. 

 (b) For loans sold in the secondary market, SBA strongly urges the lender to 

purchase from the holder and SBA will purchase from the lender as 

indicated above. However, SBA may immediately purchase from the 

secondary market holder if necessary. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Submission of a LowDoc liquidation plan.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Refer to SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation and Acquired Property," Chapter 10, "Special 

Programs." 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-8 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-9

7. FA$TRAK Loan Program - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the purpose of the FA$TRAK Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 (1) The FA$TRAK Program allows lenders to use their own forms and procedures to 

approve, close, service and liquidate loans up to $100,000 in exchange for a 

reduced guaranty of 50 percent. Eliminating the requirements that the lender use 

SBA forms and follow SBA's application procedures, allows lenders to reduce 

their loan administration cost, thus encouraging lenders to make smaller loans. 

FA$TRAK loans are processed in SBA's PLP Processing Center. The Lender 

may take all servicing actions without approval from SBA (unilaterally) 

 that it deems prudent and necessary on non-liquidation loans except for those 

actions noted below. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 FA$TRAK lender's servicing responsibilities.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Servicing authority delegated to FA$TRAK lenders.

 A lender must service all FA$TRAK loans using generally accepted commercial 

banking standards of loan servicing employed by prudent lenders. Lenders must 

use the same standards for servicing FA$TRAK loans as they would use for other 

loans in their portfolios of similar size and type. 

 (2) Authority not delegated to FA$TRAK lenders.

 There are several non-routine actions that a Fa$trak lender must NOT take 

unilaterally, without SBA's prior written approval. 

 They must NOT: 

 (a) Take any action that would create a conflict of interest or confer any 

preference on the lender in collection or lien position with respect to 

SBA's position or the shared SBA/lender position on the guaranteed loan. 

 (b) Compromise with any obligor for less than the full amount due of the 

principal loan balance outstanding. Accrued interest can be adjusted by 

the lender, if justified, without prior SBA approval. 

 NOTE: Guarantors: If a loan is delinquent or liquidation is contemplated 

or underway, prior SBA approval is required to release a guarantor 

for less than the principal balance owed even if actual demand has 

not yet been made on the guarantor.
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-10 

 (c) Title property in the name of the Agency without SBA's prior written 

approval. The lender must not acquire title (in their name or the Agency's) 

to environmentally impaired property (property which exceeds the 

minimum action levels established by relevant regulatory agencies). 

 (d) Transfer a loan to another lender. 

 (e) Sell or pledge more than 90 percent of a loan. 

 (3) The lender must notify the SBA office servicing a loan when it is transferred to 

liquidation status (i.e., the lender determines that enforced collection procedures 

must be pursued to effect repayment). 

 (4) Any action taken during the liquidation of a loan must be fully documented. The 

SBA will review liquidation actions as part of the general review of a lender's use 

of the FA$TRAK Program. It is not necessary to provide a liquidation plan to 

SBA. 

 (5) The SBA reserves the right to purchase its guaranty prior to liquidation and to 

liquidate the loan using SBA personnel, however, it is expected that this right will 

be used only in very unusual circumstances. 

 (6) The SBA expects the lender to perform unilateral servicing actions without 

concurrence by or notification to SBA, although the lender must retain 

documentation regarding the actions in the lender's loan files. 

 (7) As an exception to the rule, the lender must notify the Agency in writing when 

unilateral changes are made that will require the Agency to make changes to the 

SBA database (e.g., changes to interest rate, maturity, etc). 

 (8) The lender, as part of their unilateral action, may release collateral as necessary. 

To avoid the perception of a preference for the FA$TRAK lender, care should be 

taken to fully document and justify any release of collateral for an SBA 

guaranteed loan that will subsequently be pledged for a conventional loan from 

the lender. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How is the p

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

urchase of the guaranty handled under the FA$TRAK Program?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 The guaranty will be purchased after: 

 (1) The lender has fully liquidated all collateral; 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-11

 (2) All obligors have been pursued; 

 (3) SBA has reviewed the documentation that supports the loan; and 

 (4) Lender has submitted a wrap up report (see Appendix 18, "Final Wrap Up Report 

Format"). It is not necessary for the liquidation plan required in the final wrap up 

report to be submitted to SBA for FA$TRAK loans. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How is the amount purchased determined?

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The purchase amount will consist of the SBA guaranteed percentage of the balance 

remaining after liquidation plus up to 120 days of interest (if liquidation proceeds were 

insufficient to cover a full 120 days of interest) based on the balance outstanding at the 

time of the earliest uncured default. 

8. CAPLines Loan Program - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the purpose of the CAPLines Loan Progr

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

am?

 ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) CAPLines is an umbrella program which includes all SBA's short term working 

capital loan or line of credit programs, except those dedicated entirely to 

exporting. (See Appendix 28.) 

 (2) There are five sub-programs under the CAPLines umbrella, each designed to 

address different short-term credit situations: 

 (a) Seasonal CAPLines (CAS).

 This program finances seasonal upswings in a borrower's business, by 

financing the seasonal increases in the trading assets (receivables and 

inventory). 

 (b) Contract CAPLines (CAC).

 This program finances a business' estimated direct short-term working 

capital needs in order to perform on assignable contract(s). 

 (c) Builders CAPLines (CAB).
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-12 

 This program finances the direct costs for construction or renovation of 

residential or commercial buildings that will be offered for sale upon 

completion, by small general contractors. 

 (d) Standard Asset Based CAPLines (SAB).

 This program finances the cash cycle of qualified small businesses.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (e) Small Asset Based CAPLines (SMAB).

 This program also finances the cash cycle of qualified small businesses, 

for a maximum loan amount of $200,000. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Guidelines governing servicing of CAPLines.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) CAPLines Program Servicing Guidelines (See Appendix 28.) 

 (2) CAPLines Program Servicing Guidelines, Exhibit 1, Explanation of Servicing 

Standards in Appendix 28. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CAPLi

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

nes 

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

 servicing responsibilities.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) In addition to SBA's general servicing requirements, each CAPLines sub-program 

has special servicing requirements. See Appendix 28 for further guidance. 

 (2) Loan servicing personnel must be familiar with both the unique and general 

requirements that are applicable to each sub-program when servicing loans made 

under the CAPLines Program. 

 (3) The SBA loan servicing personnel must monitor CAPLines loans for the 

following: 

 (a) To ensure that lender submits all reports and documents, as required by 

the loan authorization and program guide; and 

 (b) To ensure that the documents provided demonstrate that the lender is 

servicing the CAPLines loan in accordance with the loan authorization 

and program guide. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Increases in CAPLines loan amo

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

unts.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-13

 (1) The SBA does not consider a Caplines loan to be fully disbursed until one cash 

cycle before maturity. 

 (2) The SBA may increase a CAPlines loan in the same manner as SBA would for 

any partially disbursed loan, except that: 

 (a) The amount of the increase must be limited to one-third of the original 

loan amount; and 

 (b) SBA may grant an increase only one time. 

 (3) An increase is subject to maximum permissible loan amounts. See SOP 50 10, 

"Business Loan Program, Loan Processing," for further guidance. 

 (4) An increase in a CAPLines loan amount is subject to an additional guaranty fee. 

 (5) Only Financing Division (FD) personnel have the authority to approve an 

increase. 

 (6) The lender must justify any request for an increase in a CAPlines loan amount. 

9. Export Working Capital Program (EWCP) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the purpose of the EWCP Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 The EWCP Program is designed to assist small businesses who need export working 

capital loans in amounts of $750,000 or less. EWCP loans provide short-term working 

capital to finance the acquisition and production of goods and services being exported, 

the accounts receivable of such foreign sales, or standby letters of credit. The loans 

finance either a single transaction or a series of transactions. The EWCP loan can either 

be a term loan or a revolving line of credit. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations governing EWCP loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.344. 

 Unique requirements of the EWCP.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (a) An applicant must submit cash flow projections to support the need for the loan and the ability to 

repay. After the loan is made, the loan recipient must submit continual progress reports. 

 

 (b) SBA does not limit the amount of extraordinary servicing fees, as referenced in  120.221(b), under 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-14 

the EWCP. 

 (c) SBA does not prescribe the interest rates for the EWCP, but will monitor these rates for 

reasonableness.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servicin

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

g responsibilities.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The Lenders must use the same degree of prudence in servicing their SBA 

guaranteed EWCP loans as they do for other loans in their portfolio. 

 (2) Because EWCP loans are short-term and have unique characteristics, the SBA 

loan officer who approved the EWCP loan must oversee lender servicing of the 

loan. Even if the loan officer is housed in a U. S. Export Assistance Center 

(USEAC), servicing will remain with that officer. 

 (3) PLP lender.

 (a) The PLP lenders do not have unilateral authority to take the following 

non-routine actions on EWCP loans: 

 They must NOT: 

 (i) Take any action that would create a conflict of interest or confer 

any preference on the lender in collection or lien position with 

respect to SBA's position or the shared SBA/lender position on the 

guaranteed loan. 

 (ii) Compromise with any obligor for less than the full amount due of 

the principal loan balance outstanding. Accrued interest can be 

adjusted by the lender, if justified, without prior SBA approval. 

 NOTE: Guarantors: If a loan is delinquent or liquidation is 

contemplated or underway, prior SBA approval is required 

to release a guarantor for less than the principal balance 

owed even if actual demand has not yet been made on the 

guarantor.

 (iii) Title property in the name of the Agency without SBA's prior 

written approval. The lender must not acquire title (in their name 

or the Agency's) to environmentally impaired property (property 

which exceeds the minimum action levels established by relevant 

regulatory agencies). 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-15

 (iv) Transfer a loan to another lender. 

 (v) Sell or pledge more than 90 percent of a loan. 

 (b) The PLP lender must notify the Agency in writing when unilateral 

changes are made that will require the Agency to make changes to the 

SBA database (e.g., changes to interest rate, maturity, etc). 

 (c) Adverse situations. 

 Refer to SOP 50 51, Chapter 10, "Special Programs," in paragraph 10-5 

titled "Preferred Lender Program (PLP)" for information on this topic. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reporting requirements.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Lenders must submit SBA Form 1502," Guaranty Loans Status & Lender Remittance 

Form," to FTA monthly for all EWCP loans. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Renewal of line of credit maturity.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) An EWCP loan with a term of more than 1 year must have an annual renewal 

provision. For renewal of the loan, the borrower must provide the following 

information to the lender within 30 days of the anniversary date of the loan: 

current financial statements and projected cash flow statement covering the 

renewal period. 

 (2) The lender must review the information and determine whether an adverse change 

has occurred that will jeopardize the borrower's ability to perform transactions 

funded by the EWCP loan. 

 (3) Where the lender finds no adverse change, the lender may renew the line of 

credit, and notify the borrower and SBA of the renewal. 

 (4) Where the lender determines an adverse change has occurred, the lender must 

notify the borrower that the line of credit will not be renewed and must specify a 

date for termination of the line. The lender must notify SBA of this action. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender request for purchase of SBA's guaranty.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) If there is an uncured default, the loan must be classified as in liquidation. Non-
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-16 

PLP lenders may make demand on SBA to honor their guarantee at this point. 

PLP lenders must follow the guidelines in SOP 50 51, Chapter 10, "Special 

Programs." 

 (2) Lenders may make demand as soon as 30 days after the earliest uncured payment 

default, but must not make demand later than 120 days after the earliest uncured 

payment default. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Insurance Coverage for def

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

aults.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) In post-shipment guarantees, lenders must establish that the cause of loss is not 

covered by the Export-Import Bank of the U. S. (Eximbank) or other insurers' 

applicable post-shipment insurance. 

 (2) In combined guarantees, the post-shipment rules apply if the default occurs after 

shipment. 

10. Disaster Loans - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What are 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

disaster home loans?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA makes loans under its disaster assistance authority to individuals who have 

suffered loss or damage to their residential real or personal property. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What are 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

disaster business loans?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA makes loans under its disaster assistance authority to businesses who have 

suffered loss or damage to their business real or personal property. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servicing.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Disaster home loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Procedures governing the servicing of disaster home loans are contained in SOP 

50 52, "Disaster Home Loan Servicing." Disaster home loans are serviced by the 

disaster home loan centers (DHLSC), unless the borrower also has a companion 

business loan. If there are companion home and business loans, and the borrower 

requests a servicing action, the DHLSC must transfer the loan to the appropriate 

Commercial Loan Servicing Center (CLSC) for action. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Disaster Business Loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-17

 Procedures governing the servicing of disaster business loans are contained in 

SOP 50 50, "Loan Servicing." Disaster business loans are serviced by the 

Commercial Loan Servicing Centers. 

11. Disaster Farm Loans. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What are disaster farm loans?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA makes loans under its disaster assistance authority to small business concerns 

that have suffered loss or damage to their farming enterprise. (See SOP 50 30, "Disaster 

Loans.") 

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Unacceptable subordinations.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must not subordinate SBA's debt to a new loan provided by Farmer's Home 

Administration (FMHA). FMHA's policy allows it to take a senior position on 

unencumbered assets only, and takes a junior position on assets already uncumbered by 

SBA's loan. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Automatic subordinations.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may recommend approving, under the rule of two, a subordination to a new 

operating loan, without credit analysis, where the borrower: 

 (a) Has liquidated all previous senior-position operating loans with no 

substantial change to farming operations; and 

 (b) Is current on all other intermediate or term debt, including the SBA loan. 

 (2) In this situation, you must obtain a commitment to make the SBA loan payment 

from the new senior lender if it falls due during the subordination period. 

 (3) If the loan is in default, you still may approve the subordination if the senior 

lender also will agree to make the past due payments. 

 

12. Certified Development Company Loans (504 Loans) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the purpose of the 504 Loan Program?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 

 The 504 Loan Program fosters economic development, creates or preserves job 

opportunities, and stimulates growth, expansion, and modernization of small businesses. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-18 

The small business receives a 504 loan from a Certified Development Company (CDC). 

The 504 loan funds come from a debenture guaranteed by SBA and sold to investors. 

The 504 loan is made by the CDC, but after closing, the CDC assigns the loan documents 

to SBA while continuing to service the loan on behalf of SBA. Loans made under the 

504 Program (and prior 503 Program) provide long-term financing for fixed assets. 

 (See Chapter 11, Prepayment or Purchase of a Development Company Loan or 

Debenture," for further servicing guidelines for the 503 and 504 Programs.) 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 C.F.R.  120.970. 

 Servicing of 504 loans and Debentures.  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must service the 504 loan in accordance with the Loan Authorization, these regulations, SBA 

policies and procedures, and prudent lending standards until paid in full, including review of the small 

business's financial statements, tax filings, insurance, and security filings. In doing so, CDCs must comply 

with the provisions of  120.513. In addition, CDCs must comply with the servicing requirements set forth 

in SBA's SOP. CDCs must report promptly to SBA any adverse trend, 

 condition or information relevant to a Borrower. Upon request by a CDC, SBA may agree to defer a 

Borrower's monthly payment. SBA may negotiate agreements with CDCs to liquidate loans.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Gen

 ̊  ̊ ̊

eral servicing requirements.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The CDC is responsible for servicing a 503/504 loan in accordance with prudent 

lending practices. The CDC must process servicing actions in conformance with 

this SOP. 

 (2) The CDC must take the following actions in servicing 503/504 loans: 

 (a) Monitor the 503/504 loan to ensure that borrower is making timely 

payment to the CSA. 

 (b) Take all appropriate action to follow up with borrower on past due 

accounts (including telephone contact, letters, site visits, etc.). 

 (c) Obtain and review the borrower's financial statements (at least annually, 

or more frequently as stipulated). 

 (d) Review to determine that the borrower has made timely payment of taxes 

and insurance premiums. 

 (e) Create a tickler system for monitoring the Uniform Commercial Code 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-19

(UCC) filing dates on collateral securing the 503/504 loan. Prepare and 

file re-recorded UCC financing statements before they lapse, in order to 

ensure a continuity of "perfection" of SBA's lien position. 

 (f) Monitor other financing with liens senior to the 503/504 loan to ensure 

that payments are current. 

 (g) Make field visits as necessary or when requested by SBA to review 

business operations and the condition of SBA collateral. 

 (h) Immediately report to SBA any default or any other adverse trend, 

condition, or information. 

 (i) Upon borrower's default or the occurrence of an adverse condition, 

propose intensive/remedial servicing actions as ordinarily performed by a 

prudent lender. (See Chapter 7, "Workout and Intensive Servicing 

Responsibilities...") 

 (j) Refer a borrower to management assistance resources, where appropriate, 

including the CDC's own resources and SBA's management and technical 

assistance resources. 

 (k) Ensure that all servicing actions proposed are in accordance with: 

 (i) The terms and conditions in the loan authorization and related 

instruments executed by the borrower; 

 (ii) The SBA regulations, policy, and SOP; and 

 (iii) The applicable State laws and practices. 

 (3) The CDC must not take any servicing action without the prior written consent of 

SBA. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC's/CSA's reporting requirements.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Reports on past due loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) The CDC is responsible for notifying CSA that an SBA-approved workout 

plan is in place in order to avoid acceleration procedures and debenture 

purchase. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-20 

 (b) The CSA is responsible for submitting a 45 day default report monthly to 

the CDC and to the SBA field office servicing the loan. 

 (c) The CSA is responsible for submitting the "65 Day Default Report" 

monthly to the CDC and to the SBA field office servicing the loan. 

 (d) The CDC must provide monthly reports to SBA identifying loans which 

are 45 or more days past due. The report must include the following 

information: 

 (i) An explanation of the reason(s) for non-payment. 

 (ii) A description of the steps taken or being taken by the CDC or the 

borrower to bring the delinquent account to a current status. 

 (iii) Information about the status of the first mortgage and any 

subordinate financing. 

 (iv) If the CDC anticipates that it will not be able to bring the account 

current prior to the 65 day default report and feels that 

 a workout is viable, a workout plan must be submitted to the SBA 

servicing office for approval. (See Chapter 11, "Prepayment or 

Purchase of a Development Company Loan or Debenture," for 

additional information.) 

 (e) The SBA must receive this report within 15 working days following the 

issuance of the 45 day default report. 

 (f) This report must include all loans reported as past due on the CSA report 

as outlined in Chapter 15, "Loan Collection Monitoring & Reports." 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Special repo

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

rts.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CDC must submit any special report requested by SBA on an individual 

borrower, within the time limits required by SBA. 

13. Accredited Lenders Program (ALP) - Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is an Accredited Lender 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Program (ALP) lender?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 An ALP lender is a CDC which has been designated by SBA as deserving of ALP status 

with respect to its 504 loans. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

6-21

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120.840. 

 Accredited Lenders Program.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 The SBA may designate a CDC as an Accredited Lender. SBA will provide an Accredited Lender with 

expedited loan processing or servicing action.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Unilateral authority to take certain 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

servicing actions.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The SBA has given ALP-CDCs the unilateral authority to take certain servicing 

actions without SBA's prior written approval. See paragraph 4-13, titled "What 

Actions May the Lender/ALP-CDC Approve with Unilateral Authority?" in 

Chapter 4, "General Loan Servicing Requests and Actions," for a list of such 

unilateral actions. 

 (2) Because SBA holds the 504 note and all related collateral documents, the ALPCDC must prepare any necessary legal documents to affect the desired servicing 

action, for SBA review and signature. 

 (3) The ALP-CDC must be aware that SBA counsel will review for legal sufficiency, 

all legal documents prepared for SBA's signature. An ALP-CDC may want to 

consult its own counsel, if appropriate, before submitting such documents to 

SBA, in anticipation of such review by SBA counsel. 

SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-1

CHAPTER 7 

WORKOUT AND INTENSIVE SERVICING 

RESPONSIBILITIES 

OF FIELD OFFICES AND

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ SERVICE CENTERS ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

1. General Guidelines for Intensive Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is intensive servicing?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 It is the last phase of regular servicing before the loan is transferred into liquidation 

status. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 When is intensive servicing appropriate?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Intensive servicing efforts are appropriate when the loan is delinquent or the 

business has suffered an adverse change, and circumstances indicate that the loan 

may still be paid in full through regular payments. 

 The objective of intensive servicing is a loan workout.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (2) A workout is: 

 (a) An attempt by SBA, sometimes in conjunction with other creditors, to 

allow a borrower to restructure its debt(s); and 

 (b) A last effort to allow the borrower who is experiencing cash flow and 

repayment difficulties, to keep its debt current. 

 (3) The purpose of the workout is to allow a borrower to structure a payment plan 

that will ultimately allow the loan to be paid in full. A workout often takes the 

place of pending liquidation action. 

 (4) The consideration SBA gives to the workout is an agreement to postpone on 

declaring the loan in default or taking liquidation action. 

 (5) In a workout effort, you will utilize any appropriate servicing actions, or 

combination of actions, to keep the business viable, at the least expense and cost 

to SBA/lender/CDC. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-2 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

SBA's policy on workouts?

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Workouts help fulfill SBA's mandate to foster the growth and success of small 

business concerns. Workouts usually are preferable to liquidation action for all 

concerned. In any workout, you must keep these two concerns in mind: 

 (a) Creating a practical repayment plan for the borrower which will allow the 

small business concern to keep operating; and 

 (b) Ensuring that the workout adequately protects SBA's interests. 

 (2) The "rule of two" is required for workout strategies outlined in this chapter. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What status may the loan be in while you do a workout?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You can negotiate a workout while the loan is either in servicing status or in liquidation 

status. As a general rule, loans in servicing status will be handled by the service centers. 

 Service centers should transfer the loan to the appropriate field office, if: 

 (1) Closer communication between the borrower, lender/CDC, and SBA is required; 

and 

 (2) The loan is likely to be transferred into "in liquidation" status. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-3

2. What Questions Must You Ask Before You Process a Workout? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is the loan lender

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 If yes, the following g

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

uidance applies:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

STATUS OF 7 (A) LOAN: SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITY TO DEVELOP A 

WORKOUT: 

WHO AT SBA CAN 

PROCESS THE WORKOUT: 

Loan sold on secondary market Lender is bound by the terms of Secondary 

Market Participation Agreement, SBA Form 

1086. 

CLSC or field office 

Loan never sold on the secondary 

market 

Lender is responsible for developing a workout, 

with SBA concurrence, as required (PLP 

lenders--advance concurrence not required; 

notice to SBA is required) 

 - You can encourage lender to negotiate a 

workout 

CLSC or field office 

Lender purchased loan back from the 

secondary market and SBA has not 

purchased its guaranteed share 

Lender is responsible for developing a workout, 

with SBA concurrence, as required (PLP 

lenders--advance concurrence not required, 

notice to SBA is required) 

 - You can encourage lender to negotiate a 

workout 

CLSC or field office

Lender purchased loan back from 

secondary market and SBA0 

purchased its guaranteed share

Lender is responsible for developing a workout, 

with SBA concurrence, as required. 

 - SBA generally has a much higher percentage 

of participation in the loan 

 - You should have a good deal of input into the 

lender's workout actions

field office

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 You should consider taking back servi

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

cing on the loan from the lender if:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) You believe the lender is being unreasonable by not doing a workout 

which is in the borrower's and SBA's best interests; or 

 (b) The lender has an actual or apparent conflict of interest between the SBAguaranteed loan and other unguaranteed loans the lender has made to the 

same borrower. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-4 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is the loan SBA

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

serviced?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If yes, the following guidance applies: 

STATUS OF SBA-SERVICED LOAN: SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITY TO DEVELOP A 

WORKOUT: 

WHO AT SBA CAN PROCESS 

THE WORK-OUT? 

Direct loan (including disaster loans) You are responsible for the workout. 

 - You have maximum responsibility for 

developing and recommending a workout. 

 - You can take any reasonable workout 

actions as described in this chapter. 

CLSC or field office 

XGP loans You are responsible for developing and 

recommending the workout. 

 - You have a great deal of flexibility to 

negotiate a workout. 

 - You must obtain the lender's concurrence 

on a proposed workout

CLSC or field office

GP loans The lender is bound by SBA's rules & 

regulations (as well as the terms of the 

Secondary Market Participation Agreement, 

SBA Form 1086, when executed).

CLSC or field office

 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is the loan a certified development company (CDC) loan?

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If yes, the following guidance applies: 

STATUS OF LOAN: SCOPE OF RESPONSIBILITY TO DEVELOP THE 

WORKOUT: 

WHO AT SBA CAN PROCESS 

THE WORKOUT: 

CDC-serviced development company 

loan; debenture is sold 

CDC is responsible for developing the 

workout. 

 - CDC is bound by the terms of the servicing 

agent agreement. 

 - Any changes to payment structure require 

the debenture to be purchased. 

CLSC or field office 

SBA-serviced development company 

loan; SBA has purchased the 

debenture 

You are responsible for developing the 

workout, consulting with the CDC, and 

recommending the workout. 

 - You have the maximum flexibility to 

negotiate a workout. 

 - You can take any reasonable workout 

actions as described in this chapter. 

CLSC or field office 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-5

3. What are the Limitations on Extensions of Loan Maturity Dates? 

 See paragraph 15, on "Extension to the Maturity of the Borrower's Loan" in Chapter 5, "Specific 

Loan Servicing Actions." 

4. What are the Issues You/Lender/CDC Should Consider Before Agreeing to a Workout? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is a workout a reasonable alternative?

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) A fundamental question you should answer is whether any action or combination 

of actions will be likely to help resolve the borrower's problems. This will require 

you to consider what problems caused the borrower to be unable to pay its debt. 

 (2) If you determine that no actions which you might take will help the borrower 

keep its business viable and restructure its debt at minimum expense to SBA, you 

must transfer the loan to "in liquidation" and begin appropriate liquidation 

activities. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the status of borrower's business?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Before you agree to any workout actions, you must determine: 

 (1) Whether the borrower's cash flow is sufficient to service the debt, after covering 

all operating costs. 

 (a) Ask the borrower to submit current business (and possibly personal) 

financial statements, as appropriate. 

 (b) Ask the borrower to project its debt servicing ability, based on the 

proposed workout. 

 (c) Ask borrower to disclose other debt and workout arrangements that exist. 

 (d) Consider obtaining a current credit report on the borrower to assist in 

developing a complete credit picture. 

 (2) Whether the borrower is current on its taxes, including sales taxes, and Federal 

and State employee withholding taxes. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-6 

 (3) Whether the borrower has any pending or threatened legal action(s) which may 

impact the business operations or SBA's collateral. 

 (a) Ask the borrower to disclose any pending or threatened legal actions. 

 (b) For example, suppliers have put the borrower on a cash only basis, and 

threatened legal action because of borrower's failure to pay outstanding 

bills for supplies. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the status of SBA's collateral?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Before you agree to any workout actions, you must determine the status of the SBA 

collateral including (The lender and CDC should assist in providing this information if 

they are servicing the loan.): 

 (1) Whether SBA's liens have been properly filed and are legally enforceable. 

 (a) Did the borrower sign the security agreement to create a lien against 

personal property at the time of closing? 

 (b) Did the borrower sign the deed of trust/mortgage to create a lien against 

real property at the time of closing? 

 (c) Was the UCC-1 financing statement appropriately filed at the time of loan 

closing? 

 (d) Does the UCC-1 remain in effect? 

 (e) Was the deed of trust/mortgage properly recorded at the time of closing? 

 (2) Whether there are other liens, including junior liens, on SBA's real property and 

personal property collateral, including tax liens. 

 (a) Ask the borrower to make a full disclosure (i.e., status, amount, collateral) 

of all outstanding debts, tax debts, judgements, and liens, whether 

recorded yet or not. 

 (b) Conduct a search of the real property and personal property lien filing 

records. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-7

 (3) Whether hazard and flood insurance is in effect on the real property and personal 

property collateral. 

 Ask the borrower to produce records on hazard and flood insurance policies and 

loss payable endorsements, if required for the loan. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Can you require borrower to correct deficiencies as part of the workout?

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) As a condition of the workout, you must require the borrower to correct any 

deficiencies in the documentation for the loan, to the extent possible. 

 (2) Examples of correcting deficiencies include: 

 (a) Requiring borrower to submit current financial statements and tax returns; 

 (b) Obtaining the debtor's signature on a UCC-1 financing statement which 

you/lender/CDC will need to re-record to prevent a lapse; 

 (c) Obtaining borrower's signature on a deed of trust/mortgage if borrower did 

not sign at closing, and ensuring that the deed of trust/mortgage is 

recorded; and 

 (d) Asking the borrower to verify that required hazard and flood insurance on 

SBA's collateral is in place. 

5. What are Some of the Actions Available for a Workout? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance on alternatives in a workout.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may use a variety of actions to facilitate a workout. Frequently, a 

combination of actions works best for intensive workouts. For example, a 

retroactive deferment, interest rate reduction, and re-amortization will bring the 

loan current, and modify the future payments to a level sustainable by the 

borrower. 

 (2) You should be creative in designing a plan in cooperation with the borrower. 

 (3) You should be very flexible in your approach to a workout. 

 (4) You must consult with counsel when proposing actions that may affect SBA's 

legal rights to collect the debt. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-8 

 NOTE: You must not make any changes to the payment structure of a CDC loan unless 

the debenture has been purchased.

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Defer loan payments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may defer past due or future loan payments to the maturity date. You must 

inform the borrower that this will create a balloon payment due at end of the loan 

term. 

 (2) When loan payments are deferred, interest continues to accrue. You may address 

the accruing interest in several ways: 

 (a) You can require the borrower to pay interest during the deferment period; 

 (b) You can delay collection of the full amount of the accrued interest until 

the end of the deferment period, and collect it in one lump sum at that 

time; 

 (c) You can apply all payments after the deferment, first to accrued interest, 

then to principal; and 

 (d) You can create a separate note receivable in the amount of the accrued 

interest. (In this section, refer to sub-paragraph 5.g., "Create a separate 

note(s) receivable.") 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reduce amount of loan payments on a temporary basis.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may temporarily reduce the amount of the borrower's loan payments to a 

fixed amount. If you do not also extend the maturity date of the loan, there will 

be a balloon payment due at maturity. You must advise the borrower of this 

consequence. 

 (2) You should consider whether the reduced payment amount is enough to cover the 

following: 

 (a) Accruing interest; 

 (b) Depreciation of collateral; and 

 (c) Reduction of principal. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-9

 (3) If a balloon payment will be due at maturity, you may: 

 (a) Require payment in full at maturity (this may cause a hardship to the 

borrower, unless the borrower can refinance the balance at maturity); and 

 (b) Extend the loan maturity and term out the balance at a payment level 

which the borrower can afford. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Re

 ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

amortize loan payments.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may re-amortize the loan for a specified period of time, in order to reduce the 

amount of loan payments. 

 (2) You can re-amortize the loan in conjunction with an extension of the maturity 

date. 

 (a) This will result in the loan being paid over a longer term, with lower 

monthly payments. 

 (b) If you do not also reduce the interest rate as well, this will result in the 

borrower paying more total interest over the life of the loan. You must 

advise the borrower of this consequence. 

 (3) You can re-amortize the loan, but not extend the maturity date. 

 (a) For example, you can re-amortize the loan based on a 20 year term, but 

the loan remains due in 10 years (the original maturity). 

 (b) This will result in lower monthly payments for the term of the loan, and a 

large balloon payment due at maturity. You must advise the borrower of 

this consequence. 

 (4) You can re-amortize the loan for limited periods of time, instead of for the full 

life of the loan. 

 (a) For example, you have a loan with a maturity of 5 years. You can reamortize the loan based on a 10 year term, for a period of 3 years. Then 

you can re-amortize the remaining balance due, over the remaining 2 years 

of the loan so there will be no balloon payment owing at maturity. 

 (b) This will result in substantially higher loan payments during the last 2 

years of the loan. You must advise borrower of this consequence. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-10 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Extend maturity date.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You can extend the maturity date of the note beyond that originally established. 

 (2) For extensions of maturity dates, see paragraph 5-15 titled, "Extension to the 

Maturity of the Borrower's Loan." 

 (3) You must consider the following factors when deciding whether and how long to 

extend the maturity date: 

 (a) Are there any junior liens?

 Under applicable State law, the proposed extension may allow junior 

lienholders to move ahead of SBA. You must consult counsel to 

determine if notice to junior lienholders before extending a maturity date 

is a requirement in the applicable state. 

 (b) Are there any standby agreements?

 A standby agreement may expire during the period of extension. You 

must give notice to the standby creditor to request continuance of the 

standby agreement to the extended maturity date. If not, you must take 

this into consideration in deciding whether to grant the extension. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Adjust the 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

interest rate.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You can change the interest rate from a variable rate to a fixed rate. 

 (2) You can reduce the interest rate to the "cost of money to the Government." 

 The "cost of money to the Government" is defined for the purpose of this SOP as 

the interest yield equivalent to that being paid on Treasury securities for similar 

maturities. These rates are published in the Wall Street Journal, section C, under 

the heading of "Treasury Bonds, Notes, & Bills, 'Ask YLD'" column. 

 (3) You can reduce the interest rate to below the "cost of money to the Government." 

 (4) You can retroactively reduce the interest rate. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

7-11

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Create a separate note(s) receivable.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) As part of a total debt restructure, you can create a separate note receivable for 

items like accrued interest or the unsecured principal balance. 

 (a) You should take this action only where there is an improving trend in the 

business. For example, cash flow will likely improve in the future as a 

result of income from a new contract. 

 (b) If you take this action while the loan is in servicing status, you must have 

a reasonable expectation that the borrower will be able to repay the note 

receivable. 

 

 (2) You must establish the terms of the note receivable, for example: 

 (a) Interest bearing (except a note receivable for accrued interest) or noninterest bearing; and 

 (b) Regular payments required, or payment in one lump sum upon maturity of 

the note receivable or the original loan. 

 (3) The terms of the note receivable must be in writing, and signed by the obligor. 

 (4) The guarantors on the original loan must also guarantee the note receivable. 

 (5) You must complete an SBA Form 515, "Note Receivable Report," for each note 

receivable you create. (See Appendix 9.) If the note does not involve ColPur, the 

district office or service center also must input the note receivable into SBA's 

LAUD computer systems. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Subordinate, release, or take additional collateral.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You may take a variety of actions relating to collateral securing the loan: 

 (a) Subordinate SBA's lien on collateral to a lender that will provide new 

money to the borrower in order to improve borrower's cash flow. 

 You should consider whether there are any junior liens. Under State law 

in your area, the proposed subordination may cause junior lienholders on 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-12 

the same collateral to move ahead of SBA. You should give notice to, and 

obtain the consent of junior lienholders. You also should obtain the 

consent of guarantors and standby creditors. Consult counsel to determine 

the proper course of action. 

 (b) Release collateral securing SBA's loan, so that the borrower can sell that 

collateral and generate cash. 

 (c) Take additional collateral to secure SBA's loan. 

 (d) Take action to gain better control over existing collateral. For example, 

obtain the borrower's absolute assignment of payment rights in its 

accounts receivable. 

 (2) You should be aware of what might occur if the borrower files bankruptcy within 

a specified period of time after the parties reach a workout agreement. If SBA 

takes new collateral, a bankruptcy court could invalidate SBA's lien as a 

"preference." You should consult with counsel for guidance on this issue, before 

finalizing the workout. If this is a risk, you must address this issue in your 327 

action. 

6. How Must you Process a Workout Action? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You must prepare a 327 action.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must include in the 327 action a realistic and reasonable justification for the workout 

action. You should discuss the following: 

 (1) Circumstances of the loan, for example: 

 (a) History of the business; 

 (b) A detailed analysis of the borrower's overall financial condition. (e.g., a 

description of the business' current cash flow and management problems 

and when they began); 

 (c) The amount of time the business estimates is necessary for the workout, 

(e.g., when the business may be able to make regular payments again, or 

when the borrower expects business to improve); 

 (d) What actions you propose that SBA take as part of the workout, and how 

these actions will help solve the borrower's problems; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-13

 (e) What actions the borrower is willing to take as part of the workout; and 

 (f) What actions any other creditors have taken or will take as part of the 

workout. 

 (2) All relevant issues relating to borrower's repayment ability, SBA's collateral 

condition and value, and deficiencies in loan documentation, as discussed in 

paragraph 4, "What are the Issues You/Lender/CDC Should Consider Before 

Agreeing to a Workout?" 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You must obtain legal review of the 327 action.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Counsel must comment on the legal aspects of the proposed workout action with 

respect to the following: 

 (a) Enforceability of guaranties; 

 (b) SBA's lien position on collateral (i.e., effect of intervening junior liens, 

etc.); 

 (c) Impact on any standby agreements; 

 (d) Impact on any legal agreements or contracts of the borrower; 

 (e) Potential litigation actions, for example, bankruptcy filing by an obligor or 

guarantor; and 

 (f) Any other relevant legal issues. 

 (2) On SBA-serviced loans, SBA counsel must oversee the preparation of all legal 

documents to implement the approved workout plan, including: 

 (a) Modification to the note. 

 (_)All material changes to the loan repayment terms or maturity date set 

forth in the note, require a modification to the existing note. The obligor 

must sign this document. The SBA/lender/CDC must not make a 

unilateral change without the borrower's signature indicating its consent. 

 (b) Amendment or modification to the security agreement for personal 

property collateral, or deed of trust/mortgage for real property collateral. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-14 

 (c) Amendment or modification to a guaranty(ies). 

 (d) New notes and loan terms for note receivables. 

 (e) Workout agreement signed by all parties to the transaction, if appropriate. 

 (f) Subordination or assumption agreements, if appropriate. 

 These documents may be prepared by SBA counsel or other SBA/nonSBA personnel. At a minimum counsel must review documents for legal 

sufficiency before you submit them to the borrower for signature. 

 (3) For lender/CDC-serviced loans, lender/CDC must consult with its legal counsel 

for preparation and/or review of such documents, before submission to SBA. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You must give guarantors notice of the workout.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) At a minimum, you must provide notice to the guarantors of the proposed 

workout. You should try also to obtain the consent of any guarantors on the loan 

to the proposed workout. Ideally, you should involve the guarantors in the 

workout negotiations. 

 (2) If you are unable to gain the consent of guarantors, you must state the reasons 

why in your 327 action. Counsel must comment on the consequences to SBA if 

the guarantors' do not consent to the workout. 

7. What Resources are Available from SBA to Help Borrowers, and When Should You Refer 

a Borrower for Assistance? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 The SBA has several resources intended to assist small business concerns with 

management and technical assistance. These include: 

 (1) Small Business Development Centers (SBDC).

 These are SBA-funded centers where borrowers can receive one-on-one business 

counseling, training seminars, and other business management assistance. 

 (2) Service Corps of Retired Executives (SCORE).

 An association of retired individuals with business experience and core executives 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-15

who provide one-on-one business counseling, free of charge. SCORE also 

conducts training seminars, and has various business resources available to small 

businesses. 

 (3) Small Business Institutes (SBI).

 A college university program where business students and faculty conduct case 

studies of business operations and recommend how to improve management, 

accounting systems, financial controls, etc. 

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Referrals.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 These resources may be helpful to a borrower that is experiencing cash flow or 

management problems. This is the type of borrower you will likely see in the context of 

a workout negotiation. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How do yo

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

u make a referral?

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must complete an SBA Form 1061, "Request for Management Assistance," 

(Appendix 17). You must send this form to the appropriate individual in your office who 

is handling business development for the geographic area where the borrower is located. 

8. How Do You Process Advances/Expenses During Loan Workouts? 

 Refer to Chapter 19, "Administrative Costs, Advances, Expenses, and Recoveries," in the 

Liquidation SOP for guidance. 

9. Real Property and Personal Property Appraisals. 

 a. In a loan workout situation, it is critical that you know the value of the assets pledged to 

SBA to assist you in weighing the choices available to help a borrower survive and to 

protect SBA's interests. Incorrect value estimates can result in: 

 (1) Unrealistic expectations of recovery and borrower performance; 

 (2) Failure of workout efforts; 

 (3) Unnecessary foreclosure expenses; 

 (4) Acquisition of ColPur that is not readily disposable; and 

 (5) Reduction of net recovery, caused by high holding costs and other expenses, or by 

unknowingly selling assets (or allowing them to be sold) at depressed prices. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

7-16 

 b. You must obtain a current appraisal(s) in order to accurately determine the value of the 

collateral. Generally, you should not rely on an appraisal older than 1 year. However, 

you must consider the particular workout situation, the nature of the assets, and local 

market trends. 

 c. If you use an appraisal that is more than 1 year old, for servicing actions: 

 (1) You must document your reasons on your 327 action under the rule of two; and 

 (2) For liquidation situations (e.g., for private sales of collateral or ColPur) refer to 

SOP 50 51. 

 

10. Classifying a Loan as "In Liquidation" or "In Litigation." 

 Refer to SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation and Acquired Property," Chapter 4, "General Guidelines 

for Liquidation Activities," for information on this topic. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-1

CHAPTER 8 

 

THE SECONDARY MARKET FOR SBA GUARANTEED 

LOANS 

1. Why Did SBA Establish a Secondary Market Program for SBA Loans? 

 The secondary market was established in the 1970's in order to provide greater liquidity to 

lenders and thereby expand the availability of commercial credit for small business. In a 

secondary market sale, SBA's conditional guaranty to a lender converts into an unconditional 

guaranty to an investor. 

2. What Do the Regulations State About the Secondary Market? 

 The regulations regarding the secondary market appear in 13 CFR  120.600 through  120.660, 

Subpart F - Secondary Market . These sections can be found in Appendix 27 this SOP. 

3. Who at SBA is Responsible for Oversight of the Secondary Market? 

 The Director, Office of Secondary Market and 504 Sales, who reports to the AA/BLS, is 

responsible for oversight of the secondary market and the FTA. The SBA loan servicing 

personnel may contact this office for additional information: 

 Office of Secondary Market and 504 Sales 

 Small Business Administration 

 409 Third St. S.W., 8th Floor 

 Washington, D.C. 20416 

 (202) 205-6493 

 Before contacting this office, be sure to read the SBA Form 1086," Secondary Participation 

Guaranty Agreement" (1086 which can be obtained at your office), as this will probably answer 

most questions. 

4. Why Would a Lender Want to Sell its SBA Loans? 

 Lenders who hold business loans guaranteed by SBA may be able to profit by selling the 

guaranteed portions of those loans in the secondary market. The two main reasons for a lender 

to consider selling a loan are as follows. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Liquidity.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-2 

 (1) The lender can convert SBA guarantee to cash; and 

 (2) The lender can use this cash to provide new loans. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Profit.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The lender may profit from: 

 (1) Selling the loan at a premium; 

 

 (2) Collecting a servicing fee over the life of the loan; or 

 (3) Earning float on the borrower's loan payment. 

 The premium, servicing fee, and float earned on the sale of an SBA loan, effectively 

reduces the lender's investment in the loan, thereby reducing the lender's overall risk of 

loss on the loan. 

5. When Should a Lender NOT Sell an SBA Loan? 

 A lender is discouraged from selling an SBA loan if: 

 a. The loan has an above average potential for default or requirement for payment 

modification; or 

 b. The lender intends to increase the principal after fully disbursing the loan. 

6. What Types of SBA Loans Can a Lender NOT Sell? 

 a. Lines of credit; and 

 b. Revolving loans. 

7. What is the Sale Process for SBA Loans? 

 The lender can complete the sale process in as little as 2 weeks.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 a. The lender and buyer (investor) sign an agreement describing the rights and 

responsibilities of both parties ("Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement," SBA 

Form 1086). 

 Often the lender contacts a few broker/dealers to get selling price quotes. 

Brokers/dealers are familiar with the paperwork and selling process, and make a market 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-3

in the securities. However, lender may sell a loan directly to an investor without the 

services of a broker/dealer. 

 b. The lender, or broker/dealer, sends the agreement (SBA 1086), with the SBA Note (SBA 

147), to the FTA who reviews the documentation for completeness and accuracy. The 

FTA contacts both parties to arrange a settlement (closing date). 

 c. On the settlement date, the buyer wires money to the FTA. The FTA receives the money 

and wires it to the seller. The FTA then issues a guaranteed interest certificate to the 

buyer. The buyer is now the registered holder (investor) of the guaranty loan. 

8. What are the Lender's Responsibilities After the Sale? 

 a. The lender remains responsible for all loan servicing activities. The lender must service 

sold loans according to the regulations, the 750 agreement, the 1086 agreement and this 

SOP. The regulations prevail if there is any inconsistency between the 1086 agreement 

and the regulations. 

 b. The lender must forward the borrower's monthly payment to the FTA with a complete 

accounting of the funds, using SBA 1502. If the lender does not remit payments to FTA 

by the specified due date, there is a severe penalty which can rarely be waived. (See 1086 

agreement, paragraph 6.) 

 c. The lender must request the approval of the investor for any payment modifications to the 

loan. 

 (1) The request must be sent to the FTA which will forward it to the investor for 

response. 

 (a) The investor must respond to the proposal within 30 days. Lack of 

response is construed as non-approval. 

 (b) There is no obligation of the investor to approve any request for 

modification. Payment modifications are only permitted if the investor 

agrees to them. 

 (c) In cases where the viability of the borrower may be at stake if 

modifications are not made, the lender may seek approval from SBA for 

an emergency repurchase of the loan by the lender. (See paragraph 20 of 

the 1086 Agreement.) 

 (d) UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES CAN THE LENDER 

UNILATERALLY REPURCHASE THE LOAN FROM THE 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-4 

SECONDARY MARKET IF THE INVESTOR DOES NOT 

APPROVE THE MODIFICATION.

 (2) If the modification also requires SBA's consent (e.g., it is not within lender's 

unilateral authority to approve), the lender must: 

 (a) First obtain SBA's written consent; then 

 (b) Forward a copy of SBA's consent with the payment modification proposal 

to the FTA. 

 (3) Examples of modifications which require the approval of the investor include, but 

are not limited to: 

 (a) Adjustments to the interest rate in any way (increase, decrease, convert 

from fixed to variable, or variable to fixed); 

 (b) Extension or other modification to the maturity; 

 (c) Change to a seasonal or a periodic payment plan; 

 (d) Modification of the installment amount; 

 (e) Change to interest accrual basis (Actual/365;30/360); or 

 (f) Deferment of payments, EXCEPT: per the 1086 agreement, lender may 

approve one deferral of payment for up to three consecutive monthly 

payments without obtaining prior permission from the investor. 

 d. When the borrower is refinancing or prepaying the loan, the lender servicing the loan 

must be sure that the FTA receives written notice of the intent to prepay at least 10 

business days prior to prepayment date. If the lender fails to notify the FTA within this 

time frame, the lender will pay the investor all interest that would have accrued during 

the 10 days and may incur a penalty. (See 1086 agreement, paragraph 15.) 

9. Are There Any Changes to a Sold Loan Which a Lender Can Make Without the Approval 

of the Investor? 

 Yes. The lender does not need the investor's approval (but may need SBA's approval) to modify 

other terms of the loan, such as, but not limited to: 

 a. Change in guarantor; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-5

 c. Tracks loan payment histories; 

 d. Collects payments from lenders on sold loans (the lenders are permitted to write one 

check each month to cover all loans that have been sold); 

 e. Remits payments to investors (FTA sends one check to the investor that includes an 

accounting of the funds for all loans held by that investor); 

 f. Forwards all servicing requests from a lender to the investor and forwards the response 

back to the lender; 

 g. Notifies SBA of delinquent loans; and 

 h. Handles SBA and lender repurchases from the investor. 

11. When Can the Lender or SBA Repurchase a Loan Sold on the Secondary Market? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Borrower is greater than 60 days in default.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The FTA will provide a monthly list of the loans which are in arrears to each SBA field 

office or servicing center. This list is entitled "Default Report." The SBA loan servicing 

 b. Release or substitution of collateral; 

 c. Permission of payment to standby creditor; 

 d. Assumption of the loan (notify FTA of new name of borrower); 

 e. Transfer of loan to another bank (notify FTA); or 

 f. Subordination of collateral of SBA loan to another loan. 

10. What Are the Responsibilities of the Fiscal Transfer Agent (FTA)? 

 The Secondary Market Improvements Act of 1984 requires the central registration of all 

secondary market transactions. 

 The FTA: 

 a. Facilitates the settlement of the first sale of a loan; 

 b. Records current and all prior registered holders (investors) of a loan; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-6 

personnel must contact the lenders for each loan on the list to determine the status of the 

loan. 

 If the borrower is more than 60 days past due on a regularly scheduled installment of 

principal and interest, or if the interest paid-to-date is more than 60 days in arrears, SBA 

must, in consultation with the lender, decide on an appropriate remedial action or 

determine if SBA or the lender will repurchase the loan from the investor. (See 1086 

agreement, paragraph 10.) 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Unilateral purchase by SBA.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 SBA has the authority under the 750 agreement to purchase the guaranteed interest at any 

time. (See also 1086 agreement, paragraph 11.) 

 For example, if the viability of the small business may be at stake, and the lender will not 

consent to a reasonable workout action deemed necessary by SBA, SBA may purchase 

the guaranteed interest. In this case, SBA may also assume servicing of the loan from the 

lender. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Emergency repurchase by len

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

der.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Ordinarily, the lender may repurchase a non-delinquent loan from the secondary 

market only on a "willing buyer-willing seller" basis. However, in critical 

situations where a borrower's ability to remain in business depends upon a 

modification of the installment payments, SBA may authorize a lender to 

repurchase from the investor. (See 1086 Agreement in Appendix.) 

 (2) In order for a lender to obtain emergency repurchase authority from SBA, the 

lender must submit to the SBA field office or servicing center: 

 (a) Current financial statements of the borrower; 

 (b) A written decline from the investor to a specific request for a change in 

the terms and conditions of the payment, or a written response from the 

FTA that the investor did not respond (which is construed as no consent); 

 (c) A written response from the FTA that the guaranteed interest is part of a 

pool; 

 (d) A statement that the proposed change in terms and conditions of the loan 

is solely for the benefit of the borrower; and 

 (e) A certification by lender that it will make the requested change in the 

 

 

 

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-7

terms and conditions if repurchase is approved by SBA. 

 (3) The SBA field office or servicing center must review the financial statements of 

the borrower and any other appropriate information and conclude that: 

 (a) The borrower's business will probably fail if the lender can not change the 

existing terms; 

 (b) The business will probably survive and resume payment if the lender 

changes the terms (if the lender's request meets all conditions, the SBA 

field office or servicing center may approve the purchase of the 

guaranteed portion by the lender); and 

 (c) The lender must give the FTA ten days notice of intent to repurchase 

under the emergency repurchase authority (see 1086 agreement, paragraph 

15.) 

 (4) The lender may not resell the guaranteed portion of a repurchased loan unless the 

borrower has made all payments as scheduled in the note for a period of 12 

months. 

 (5) You must use this authority only in carefully selected cases, where an emergency 

clearly exists and the business will probably survive if the lender and SBA 

provide relief by changing the existing payment terms. 

 Do not construe this policy as general or wholesale authority for unilateral 

repurchase by lenders. That interpretation is incorrect. 

12. How Do You Know if an SBA Loan is Sold? 

 a. You can determine if an SBA loan is sold by using SBA's loan accounting system. This 

information is updated on a monthly basis by the FTA which transmits the data to SBA 

via computer. 

 (1) You can retrieve this data by loan number under PMQD04. The screen will 

indicate "Secondary Market Sale." 

 (2) PMQD04 will NOT indicate if a sold loan has been repurchased from the 

investor. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-8 

 b. You will know when a sold loan has been repurchased from the investor when you 

receive written notice from the FTA that the certificate has been redeemed under a 

prepayment of the loan or a default on the loan. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

8-9

SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-1

CHAPTER 9 

PURCHASING SBA'S GUARANTY 

1. Time is of the Essence. 

2. Regulations. 

 The regulations regarding when and how SBA honors its guarantee appear in 13 CFR  120.520 

through  120.524. This chapter includes these regulations in the appropriate sections. 

3. When Does SBA Purchase from the Lender? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120.520. 

 When does SBA honor its guarantee?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA purchases the guaranty from the lender when the lender has made demand on 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

SBA, and the

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 following happens.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Loan servicing and liquidation personnel in the field offices and servicing centers must act 

expeditiously on guaranty purchase actions. Delay on the part of SBA may significantly 

increase the amount of accrued interest SBA pays, which increases the cost of the loan program. 

 (a) SBA, in its sole discretion, may purchase a guaranteed portion of a loan at any time. A Lender 

may demand in writing that SBA honor its guarantee if the Borrower is in default on any 

installment for more than 60 calendar days (or less if SBA agrees) and the default has not been 

cured. If a Borrower cures a default before a Lender requests purchase by SBA, the Lender's 

right to request purchase on that default lapses. 

 (b) Purchase by SBA of the guaranteed portion does not waive any of SBA's rights to recover money 

paid on the guarantee, based upon the Lender's negligence, misconduct, or violation of this part, 

including those actions listed in  120.524(a), the Loan Guarantee Agreement or the Loan 

Instruments.

 (1) The loan is not sold on the secondary market, or the lender has purchased the loan 

from the secondary market through the fiscal transfer agent (FTA). 

 (a) The FTA will redeem the certificate of interest from the investor. 

 (b) The SBA must have notification from the FTA that the certificate has been 

redeemed. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-2 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 For information on all special loan programs, see the Chapter 6, "Special 

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Programs."

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

4. Information Required from a Lender. 

 To complete its purchase request the lender must submit the following.

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Written demand letter.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Certified transcript of account.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Copies of all loan closing instrument

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

s.

 ̊ ̊

 (2) If the loan is sold in the secondary market, you should strongly encourage the 

lender to repurchase it from the secondary market before making demand on SBA 

to honor the guarantee. 

 (3) The borrower is in default on any installment of principal or interest for more than 

60 days (or less if SBA agrees) and the default has not been cured prior to the 

lender making demand on SBA to purchase. 

 (4) The SBA may agree to purchase a loan from the lender, or may request that the 

lender make demand on SBA, if the loan is less than 60 days past due when: 

 (a) The loan is classified "in liquidation" or "in liquidation-litigation" status; 

or 

 (b) The SBA invokes its unilateral purchase privilege per paragraph 11 of the 

750 agreement (e.g., if SBA decides to purchase and assume servicing of 

the loan). This decision might arise if the lender has been taken over by 

FDIC or if there is a conflict of interest between the lender and SBA. (See 

paragraph 9-13, "What is SBA's Unilateral Purchase Privilege, and When 

Should SBA Invoke It?") 

 Use SBA Form 1149, Lender's Transcript of Account, or similar display that reflects the 

payment receipt dates, the interest rate(s) in effect, the amounts applied to principal 

and/or interest, and the interest-paid-to date. The transcript must reflect all transactions 

on the borrower's account. The lender must certify that the transcript is "a true and 

correct copy." 

 (1) The lender must provide SBA with the executed authorization, note, 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-3

 standby agreement(s), evidence of equity injection, assignment of life insurance, 

and other documents as may be required in the authorization. (See Appendix 26, 

"Checklist For Purchase Documents," for additional guidance on required 

documentation to support the guaranty purchase process.) 

 (2) If SBA has decided to assume servicing concurrent with the purchase of the 

guaranty the lender must assign to SBA the original documents mentioned in the 

previous paragraph. (For the procedure in taking over servicing from the lender, 

see paragraph 9-17 titled, "Transfer of Loan Servicing from Lender to SBA.") 

5. When Must the Lender Submit the Complete Purchase Request? 

 a. Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.524. 

 When is SBA released from liability on its guarantee? 

 (a) SBA is released from liability on a loan guarantee (in whole or in part, within SBA's exclusive 

discretion), if any of the events below occur:... 

 Note:

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 This does not apply to loans sold in the 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

secondary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

6. Determining the Earliest Uncured Payment Default. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 What is the earliest uncured payment default? 

guaranty(ies), and all collateral documentation with evidence of required lien 

position. As applicable, the lender must also provide copies of 

 ... (8) The Lender has failed to request that SBA purchase a guarantee within 120 days after 

maturity of the loan;...

 b. SBA has no obligation to purchase a loan if the lender has failed to demand purchase 

within 120 days after the maturity of the loan. The regulations, as stated above, override 

the 750 agreement which allows 1 year from the maturity date of the loan. The 

regulations also apply to lines of credit. 

 c. The lender must submit the complete purchase request, including the demand, transcript, 

and closing documentation to SBA within 120 days of the earliest uncured payment 

default (defined in paragraph 9-6 titled "Determining the Earliest Uncured Payment 

Default"), or SBA will pay only 120 days of accrued interest. 

 13 CFR  120.523. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-4 

 The earliest uncured payment default is the date of the earliest failure by a Borrower to pay a regular 

installment of principal and/or interest when due. Payments made by the Borrower before a Lender 

makes its request to SBA to purchase are applied to the earliest uncured payment default. If the 

installment is paid in full, the earliest uncured payment default date will advance to the next unpaid 

installment date. If a Borrower makes any payment after the Lender makes its request to SBA to 

purchase, the earliest uncured payment default date does not change because the Lender has already 

exercised its right to request purchase.

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 However, note the following.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Partial payments do not advance the next installment due until they equal the full 

loan payment amount. 

 (2) Payments submitted by the borrower after the lender has requested that SBA 

purchase the guaranty do not change the earliest uncured payment default. 

 (3) For lines of credit, the date of default is the date of the next installment of interest 

due. 

 (4) Liquidation proceeds do not advance the due date. They are applied to principal 

only until principal is paid in full. The proceeds may be applied to interest first 

(for a maximum of 120 days of interest) when the lender is liquidating the 

collateral prior to purchase of the SBA's guaranty. Refer to paragraph 9-8 titled 

"Payment of Accrued Interest" for additional information. 

 (5) Payments of proceeds from insurance or a claim on the estate of a deceased 

obligor generally do not advance the due date once they are applied to principal 

only. 

 (6) In the case of approved deferment periods, the date of default is the next 

installment due after the deferment. The lender has 120 days from the next 

installment due after the deferment period ends to submit a complete purchase 

request. However, if the borrower was in payment default when the deferment 

was granted and the borrower does not make the first installment payment at the 

end of the deferment period, the lender must submit a complete purchase request 

within 30 days of the payment default (after the deferment) to receive payment for 

accrued interest during the deferment period to the time of payment. 

 Note: The lender MUST exercise prudent lending practices whether a deferment is 

recommended to the SBA for approval, or the lender exercises unilateral 

authority. A lender must exercise this type of action only when it may assist in 

solving the problems of the small business.

 For example, a borrower whose payments are current at the time of the deferment 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-5

has an approved deferment of principal and interest for the installments due for 

January 1, February 1, and March 1. If the borrower fails to make a payment on 

April 1, the date of default is April 1. The lender has 120 days from April 1 to 

submit a complete purchase request. 

 (7) In the case of a seasonal or quarterly payment plan, the date of default is the date 

on which the next seasonal or quarterly installment was due. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 You must determine the earliest 

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

uncured payment default because it sets:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The interest rate that SBA will use at the time of purchase; and 

 (2) The maximum number of days of accrued interest that SBA will pay; and 

 (3) The date that a variable interest rate becomes fixed upon the purchase of the loan. 

7. Determining the Interest Rate for Purchase. 

 

 What interest rate applies after SBA purchases its guaranteed portion?  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 a. Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.521. 

 When SBA purchases the guaranteed portion of a fixed interest rate loan, the rate of interest remains as 

stated in the note. On loans with a fluctuating interest rate, the interest rate that the Borrower owes will 

be at the rate in effect at the time of the earliest uncured payment default, or the rate in effect at the time 

of purchase (where no default has occurred).

 b. When SBA purchases a loan, the interest rate on the guaranteed and unguaranteed 

portions becomes fixed at the rate in effect at the time of the earliest uncured payment 

default. 

 If there is no payment default of interest and/or principal, the interest rate on the 

guaranteed and unguaranteed portions must be fixed at the rate in effect as of the date of 

purchase by SBA. 

 c. If there are different rates in effect for the unguaranteed and guaranteed portions of the 

loan (split rate), the interest rate used for purchase is the rate in effect as of the date of 

default on the guaranteed portion of the loan as of the date of default. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-6 

8. Payment of Accrued Interest. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 13 CFR  120.522. 

 How much accrued interest does SBA pay to the Lender or Registered Holder when SBA purchases the 

guaranteed portion? 

 (a)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Rate of interest.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If SBA purchases the guaranteed portion from a Lender or from a Registered Holder (if sold in 

the Secondary Market), it will pay accrued interest at: 

 (1) The rate in the note if it is a fixed rate loan; or 

 (2) The rate in effect on the date of the earliest uncured payment default, or of SBA's 

purchase (if there has been no default). 

 (b)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Payment to Lender.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ 

 If the Lender submits a complete purchase request to SBA within 120 days of the earliest uncured 

payment default, SBA will pay accrued interest to the Lender from the last interest paid-to-date 

up to the date of payment. If the Lender requests SBA to purchase after 120 days from the date 

of the earliest uncured payment default date, SBA will pay only 120 days of interest. For LowDoc 

loans, the interest paid to the Lender will be governed by the Supplemental Guarantee 

Agreement. 

 (c)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Payment to Registered Holder  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊.

 ̊

 SBA will pay a Registered Holder all accrued intere  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊st up to the date of payment.

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (d)  ̊ ̊ ̊ Extension of the 120 day period  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊.

 ̊

 Before the 120 days expire, the SBA field office may extend the period if the Lender and SBA 

agree that the Borrower can cure the default within a reasonable and definite period of time or 

that the benefits from doing so otherwise will exceed the costs of SBA paying additional interest. 

If the 120 days have passed, only the AA/FA or designee can extend the period.

 

 

 

 

 

 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-7

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Agency will pay interest at a reduce

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

d rate at time of purchase.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Section 7(a)(4) of the Small Business Act was amended on September 28, 1996 (P.L. 

104-208). Under the amended provision, the Agency will pay the lender the rate of 

interest indicated in the CFR quote (13 CFR  120.522) less 1 percent. This includes loans 

sold in the secondary market. (See paragraph 9-8.d. titled, "How much accrued interest 

will SBA pay if the lender submits a timely purchase request?" and paragraph 9-16. 

titled, "How Does SBA Purchase from the Secondary Market?". 

 

 NOTE: The field office will not need to change the purchase process. The 1 

percent will be automatically deducted (by OFO) prior to the lender 

receiving payment.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How much interest will the lender be able to reco

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ver if the guaranty has NOT been 

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

purchased?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 How much accrued interest will SBA pay if the lender submits a timely purchase 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

request?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 When the SBA guaranty has NOT been purchased, the participant will be allowed to 

recover up to 120 days of interest from liquidation proceeds, using the interest rate in 

effect as of the earliest uncured payment default date. All other proceeds received from 

liquidation must be applied by the lender to the principal balance of the loan. The SBA 

will then pay only its portion of the principal balance outstanding with no accrued 

interest at the time of the guaranty purchase. (see SOP 50 51, Chapter 8, "Lender 

Serviced Liquidation.") Because the lender will have already collected 120 days of 

interest prior to purchase and interest will not be paid at time of purchase, an additional 1 

percent interest will not be deducted from the purchase proceeds. 

 (1) If the lender submits a complete purchase request to SBA within 120 days from 

the date of default, SBA will pay all accrued interest from the interest paid-to-date 

to the date of wiring the funds to the lender, including any approved deferment 

periods. 

 Example: 

 (a) The borrower was given a 3 month deferment of principal and interest for 

January 1, February 1, and March 1. 

 (b) The next installment due is April 1. The rate in effect is 10 percent, 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-8 

 (f) The lender supplies a title opinion to SBA on July 20th indicating the 

lender perfected a first security interest on the personal property; 

 (g) On July 23rd, SBA conducts a review of loan documentation and approves 

that SBA purchase the loan and inputs the purchase request; and 

 (h) The lender receives the wire on July 26th. 

therefore, the rate of interest which will be paid is 9 percent (10 

percent less 1.0 percent);

 (c) The interest paid-to-date is December 1; 

 (d) The SBA receives the purchase package on June 1st and the lender failed 

to include appropriate documentation to indicate that the lender has a first 

security interest against personal property as required in the loan 

authorization; 

 (e) SBA notifies the lender on June 3rd to provide a current UCC search or 

title opinion on the personal property; 

 (2) How many days of interest does SBA pay in the above example?

 _________ 

 (a) Lender submitted a complete request within 120 days of the date of 

default (April 1). 

 (b) The SBA pays 120 days from the interest paid-to-date of December 1, plus 

the 3 month deferment period, plus SBA's processing time: 

 December 1 - 31 31 days 

 January 1 - March 31 90 days 

 April 1 - July 26 117 days 

 Total days purchased 238 days at 9 percent 

 (c) Package not submitted in 120 days.

 If the lender had not submitted a complete purchase request within 120 

days from the date of default of April 1, SBA would have paid 120 days 

plus 90 days for the approved deferment period and would not have paid 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-9

any processing time: 

 120 + 90 = 210 days at 9 percent 

 (d) Package submitted in 120 days, no deferment.

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Can SBA extend the 120 day period?

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Yes. As the regulations state in 13 CFR 120  120.522, the SBA field office may approve 

an extension to the 120 day period before that period expires

 If there had been no deferment, the date of default was January 1, and the 

lender submitted the complete request within 120 days, SBA would have 

paid interest from December 1, up through 120 days plus SBA's days of 

processing time, even if it exceeded the 120 days from December 1. 

 if: 

 (1) The SBA and the lender agree that the borrower can cure the default within a 

reasonable and definite time period; or 

 (2) The benefits of extending the 120 day period will exceed the costs of SBA paying 

additional interest. 

 (3) Extension of the 120 day period after the period has expired, must be approved by 

the AA/FA or designee. 

9. What Do You Verify in a Lender's Transcript of Account? 

 a. Verify: 

 (1) That disbursement dates on the transcript were as reported in the SBA Form 1050, 

"Settlement Sheet;" 

 (2) That variable interest rates were adjusted according to the note; 

 (4) The next installment due date; 

 (5) The interest paid-to-date; 

 (3) That payments were applied to interest through the date of receipt, then to 

principal unless otherwise stated in the note or unless payment was applied to 

principal only (such as liquidation proceeds); 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-10 

 (6) That the lender has certified that the transcript is "true and correct;" 

 (7) That, in the case of a variable interest rate note, the base rate used on each 

fluctuation date was correct (e.g., check to make sure that the prime rates used by 

the lender on the specific date of fluctuation were based on the low Wall Street 

Journal prime.); 

 (8) That the interest rate accrual basis that was used was actual/365 days, 30/365, or 

actual/360; and 

 N

 ̊

ote:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Actual/360 is not allowed for loans sold in the secondary market.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (9) That all transactions against the loan were posted (e.g., expenses incurred prior to 

purchase). 

 Note: The lender must advise SBA of the expenses reimbursed prior to purchase. 

 The lender may reflect this in the request to SBA to purchase the 

guaranty, thereby requesting an amount that is net of the expenses.

10. Review of Loan Documentation. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is a purchase review?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Should review be before or after purchase?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b. If your verification shows a discrepancy between the computations of the lender and SBA 

that is more than $100, you must further review the transcript with the lender until you 

reconcile the difference or the lender accepts the SBA transcript. If you need to make 

adjustments after the purchase, you can process a corrected purchase or an additional 

purchase. 

 The review of loan documentation for the purpose of determining SBA's liability on a 

guaranty is called a purchase review. Purchase reviews are classified as "pre-purchase 

reviews" and "post purchase reviews." The responsibility for conducting the purchase 

review lies with loan servicing/liquidation personnel and SBA counsel. (Refer to 

Appendix 26, "Checklist for Purchase Documents.") 

 (1) You must conduct a pre-purchase review with the exception of loans sold in the 

secondary market, or loans made to a borrower who suffer losses in a declared 

disaster. (Refer to paragraph 5-29, titled, "Assistance Provided to Existing 

Borrowers Who Suffer Losses in a Declared Disaster.") 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-11

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Advantages of pre

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

purchase review over post purchase re

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

view.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Responsibility of the loan servicing/liquidation recommending official.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) Reconciles the transcript of account; and 

 (c) Recommends that SBA purchase the full guaranty, reduce the guaranty, or 

deny the guaranty. 

 (2) In most cases, you will conduct a post-purchase review for loans sold in the 

secondary market. 

 You must review the transcript, and purchase loans expeditiously from the 

secondary market. It is important to minimize the interest expense to the Agency. 

 (1) The pre-purchase review process allows you to verify that the lender has 

complied with SBA's rules and regulations, the 750 agreement, and the 

authorization before honoring the guaranty. 

 (2) If you determine there is a deficiency with the documents or with how the lenderserviced the loan that is likely to cause a loss to the Agency, then you have the 

ability to: 

 (a) Work with the lender to correct any deficiencies; or 

 (b) Determine whether you should recommend reducing the amount of the 

guaranty purchased (repairing) or denying the guaranty. 

 (1) The loan servicing/liquidation recommending official must complete a 327 action 

which: 

 (a) Comments on whether the lender closed and serviced the loan in 

substantial accordance with the authorization and with SBA's rules and 

regulations; 

 (d) States whether the guaranty fee has been paid. If it has not been paid, a 

determination as to the existence of an SBA Guaranty must be made by 

the approving official and counsel's opinion must be obtained. 

 (e) States whether the guaranty fee is correct (and properly adjusted if the 

loan amount was increased or decreased). 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-12 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Responsibility of SBA legal counsel.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) The actual loan documentation. 

 (2) Counsel must render opinions on the 327 action regarding: 

 (a) Any deficiencies in the loan documentation or in the lender's actions 

which are likely to cause a loss to SBA; and 

 (b) Any liability SBA has to honor the guaranty. 

 (3) Counsel must forward the loan file and the 327 action with legal opinion to the 

loan servicing/liquidation approving official for final action. (See the chapter 

titled "Denial of Liability -- Suit Against the Participant" in SOP 50 51. 

 NOTE: If the district counsel determines that SBA is not legally obligated to purchase the 

 (f) States whether the 50 basis point fee is reasonably current. It may be 

reasonable to assume that if the loan has a recent "paid to date," the 

50 basis point fee is reasonably current. However, if the loan is seriously 

delinquent, the lender must state in writing the date to which the fee has 

been paid. At the time of purchase, outstanding delinquent 50 basis point 

fees will be deducted automatically _)from the proceeds submitted to the 

lender. 

 (2) The recommending officials must submit the 327 action and the complete loan 

file to counsel for review. 

 (1) Counsel must review: 

 (a) The 327 action forwarded by the loan servicing/liquidation recommending 

official; and 

loan, in whole or in part, this decision cannot be overruled at the field level. The 

issue and the case file must be referred to the AA/FA for action with input and 

concurrence of the Office of General Counsel.

11. When a 327 Action is Approved, How Does the Lender Receive the Funds from the SBA? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Computer processing of purchase.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The guaranty purchase process is automated. 

 (2) You will input the purchase data into the SBA Data Communications System 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-13

(SBA-DCS). The instructions for purchase input are located in the SBA-DCS 

User Manual which is located on the SBA's Intranet. 

 (3) The lender will receive the purchase funds by wire transfer. The wire will 

indicate the breakdown between principal and interest. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Manual processing of purchase.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 On occasion, you will need to process a purchase manually. For example, there may be 

an accounting matter which has caused SBA's OFO in Denver to place a "freeze" on the 

loan account. If there is a freeze on an account, the DCS will reject your input of 

purchase data until OFO lifts the freeze. 

 (1) What must you submit to OFO for a manual purchase from the lender? 

 You must submit the following: 

 (a) A cover memo indicating the reason for manual purchase and the 

documents enclosed; 

 (b) An SBA Form 1128, "Guaranty Loan Purchased;" 

 (c) A 327 action approving the purchase; and 

 (d) An SBA Form 1149, "Lender's Transcript of Account," or similar lender's 

certified transcript of account, reconciled by SBA. 

 (2) What must you submit to OFO for a manual purchase from the secondary market? 

 You must submit the same items as for manual purchase from the lender above, 

except you should reconcile the transcript of account with the FTA and the lender. 

 If there is a discrepancy you can not resolve, use FTA's transcript for purchase. 

12. If the Lender Acquires the Collateral Before Purchase, How is SBA's Purchase of the 

Guaranty Affected? 

 a. SBA's policy is to share, in accordance with its Guaranty Agreement, in any gain or loss 

experienced by a participating lender in the disposition of loan collateral. If the net 

proceeds from the sale of loan collateral are less than the amount credited by the lender to 

the loan account, SBA will share in the loss so long as the sale was commercially 

reasonable and all procedures used by the lender were consistent with the lender's 

practices on non-SBA collateral and in accord with generally accepted commercial 

banking practices used by prudent lenders. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-14 

 b. Under local procedures, acquisition of collateral by a lender prior to guaranty purchase 

may require a credit to the loan account for the amount bid at a foreclosure sale (a "credit 

bid" at a foreclosure initiated by the lender) or the agreed-upon value of property 

transferred by voluntary conveyance. If the net proceeds from the subsequent sale of the 

property are greater than the prior credit to the loan account, these proceeds must be 

credited to the loan. If the property is sold after SBA has purchased its guaranteed 

percentage of the loan, the lender must apply to the loan balance any net proceeds 

received from the sale in excess of the amount credited to the loan prior to purchase and 

remit SBA's portion to the SBA Denver Finance Center along with SBA Form 172. 

Lenders are encouraged to coordinate "credit bids" with the servicing office handling the 

loan to avoid any problems or misunderstandings with a subsequent loan purchase. 

 

 e. If the lender bids the full loan balance at a foreclosure sale, SBA will share ratably in any 

gain or loss on the subsequent sale of the property (the amount will be treated as a gain or 

loss on the colpur account). There is no guaranty purchase in this situation since the loan 

balance has been reduced to zero with the acquisition in full satisfaction. If the lender, by 

its bid, prevented recovery from any obligors or collateral on the loan, SBA will not 

share in any loss unless the bid was pre-approved in writing by SBA. Lenders are 

encouraged to follow bidding procedures outlined in SOP 50 51 2, paragraph 7-8 through 

7-14. 

 

13. What is SBA's Unilateral Purchase Privilege, and When Should You Invoke It? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA's unilateral right to purchase.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

SBA Purchase Privilege.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 c. If the net proceeds from the lender's sale of the acquired property are less than the 

amount credited to the loan prior to guaranty purchase, SBA will pay its proportionate 

share of the difference at the time of purchase. Any loss on the sale of property acquired 

through a credit bid must be reported separately since the borrower is not liable for this 

loss and it is not reflected on the loan transcript. If guaranty purchase took place prior to 

sale of the property, SBA will pay its share of the loss through the CPC system. 

 d. When a lender makes an advance to protect worthwhile collateral at a senior lienholder's 

foreclosure sale (a "protective bid"), the amount of the advance is added to the loan 

balance. The net proceeds from the subsequent sale of the property, including both cash 

and the amount of any note receivable financing, are applied to the loan as a credit. 

SBA's guaranty does not extend to the note receivable, nor will SBA share in any loss 

incurred by the lender on the note. 

 

 (
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-15

 

 Notwithstanding any provision of any agreement between SBA and the lender, 

SBA has the absolute right at anytime to purchase its guaranteed percentage of 

any loan in the interest of the Government or the borrower. Within 15 days

 The SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation)," gives 

SBA the absolute right to purchase the guaranteed portion of any loan: 

 of 

the lender's receipt of SBA's written demand to purchase the guaranteed 

percentage, the lender shall deliver to SBA a certified transcript of the loan 

account showing the date and amount of each advance or disbursement and 

repayment, and shall assign and deliver to SBA the loan instruments as noted in 

this chapter and in paragraph 7 of SBA 750. Upon receipt of these documents, 

SBA shall pay the lender the guaranteed portion of the amount then owing on the 

loan as noted in this chapter. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Option to Purchase by SBA.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 When should SBA consider invoking the unilateral purchase priv

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ilege?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You should consider a unilateral purchase when the following occurs.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA Form 1086, "Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement," paragraph 16, 

is consistent with the 750 agreement in providing for SBA's unilateral purchase 

privilege: 

 Pursuant to the 750 agreement, SBA shall at anytime have the option to purchase 

from the registered holder the outstanding balance of the guaranteed interest at the 

note rate less the lender's servicing fee. Failure of the registered holder to submit 

the certificate to the FTA for redemption on the date of prepayment specified by 

SBA to the FTA will not entitle the registered holder to accrued interest beyond 

such date." 

 (1) A conflict of interest exists between SBA and the lender which will adversely 

affect the interests of SBA. 

 (2) Unsatisfactory or ineffective loan administration by the lender is adversely 

affecting the interests of SBA. 

 Some examples are: 

 (a) The lender is inattentive to the borrower's requests for servicing or is 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-16 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Procedure for invoking the unilateral purchase privi

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

lege.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

14. Notice to Lender of Purchase. 

 For both requested and unilateral purchases, after you (or OFO in the case of a manual purchase) 

input purchase data, you must advise the lender by letter that SBA is purchasing the guaranty. 

 a. If the lender is retaining loan servicing, you must enclose an SBA Form 152, 

"Participation Certificate," and must ask the lender to execute the form and return it to 

SBA. You must also indicate what the purchase rate of interest is and inform the lender 

that it must fix the interest rate on the SBA and lender shares of the loan at the time of 

purchase. 

otherwise negligent in monitoring and reporting on the status the loan; or 

 (b) The lender and borrower communication has irretrievably broken down. 

 (3) The lender and SBA substantially disagree on the method of resolving a 

delinquency. 

 For example, SBA is willing to enter into a workout with rate reductions, reduced 

payments, deferments, and extension of maturity. The lender is unwilling to 

provide such relief. In this situation, you should make every effort to resolve the 

differences of the lender and SBA. The lender may be more willing to pursue the 

workout once SBA has purchased the guaranty. 

 (4) An alternative to the unilateral purchase option is for SBA to seek the agreement 

of the lender to voluntarily cancel the SBA guaranty, thus releasing SBA from 

liability on the guaranty and any further involvement in the SBA loan. 

 (1) Notify the lender in writing that SBA is invoking the unilateral purchase privilege 

under the 750 agreement, paragraph 11. 

 (2) Request that the lender send a certified transcript of the account to SBA within 15 

days of receipt of SBA's letter. 

 (3) Request that the lender assign and deliver to SBA the loan documents. 

 (4) Proceed with the purchase procedure as outlined in this chapter. 

 b. If SBA intends to take over loan servicing, SBA must execute and enclose 

SBA Form 156,"Certificate of Interest," and the following instructions in paragraph 9-17, 

titled, "Transfer of Loan Servicing." 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-17
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-18 

15. When Must a Loan be Purchased from the Secondary Market (by Lender or SBA)? 

 

16. How Does SBA Purchase from the Secondary Market? 

 The FTA will provide each SBA field office or service center with a monthly list of loans that 

are in default ("Default Report"). 

 a. For each loan on the default report, you must, within 5 business days of receipt of this 

default list, verify with the lender the status of the loan. 

 b. If the lender indicates that the interest paid-to-date is more than 60 days in arrears, or 

there is a default by the borrower in payment of any installment of principal or interest, 

and this default has continued uncured for more than 60 days; SBA must consult with the 

lender to decide on an appropriate action. The SBA must do this within 10 business days 

of the first contact with the lender. 

 (1) You must determine if: 

 (a) The lender will exercise its authority to grant a one-time unilateral 

deferment (only if it will assist the borrower in solving the problem 

exercising prudent lending practices); or 

 (b) The lender will seek the investor's consent to a payment modification for a 

workout. 

 (2) If the lender is not able to take remedial action (e.g., registered holder in the 

secondary market has denied the request), or will not take it, SBA must notify 

FTA within 5 business days of the decision. 

 (3) You should recommend that the lender repurchase the loan in accordance with 

SBA Form 1086, "Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement," paragraph 10. 

 a. You must notify the lender and the FTA in writing that SBA will purchase the guaranteed 

portion. At this point, it is a good idea for SBA to advise the lender to forward directly to 

SBA all future payments from the borrower to avoid the incidence of payments in transit 

to the FTA during the purchase process. 

 b. Within 5 business days of receiving SBA's notice, the lender and the FTA must provide a 

transcript and final statement of account of the guaranteed portion of the loan to SBA. 

The SBA may fine the lender $100 if the lender does not provide a transcript to SBA on a 

timely basis. 

 c. You must reconcile the transcripts provided by the FTA and the lender. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-19

 (a) Fixed rate note

 (1) If you cannot reconcile the lender's transcript with the FTA's transcript, you must 

use the FTA transcript for the purchase from the FTA. 

 (2) If the lender fails to furnish a current transcript statement within 10 business days 

after SBA's request, you must rely on the certified statement of account and 

supporting documentation from the FTA (e.g., in the event of a bank failure). 

 d. In reconciling the transcripts, you must do the following. 

 (1) Verify the transcript. 

 (2) Determine the earliest uncured payment default. 

 (3) Determine the interest rate for purchase. 

: 

 (b) Variable rate note

 The SBA's payment of accrued interest to the payment date on a fixed 

interest rate note must be at the note rate less the lender's servicing fee. 

: 

 NOTE: The servicing fee held back from the secondary market will be 

 i. If the loan is in default, SBA's payment of accrued interest must be 

at the rate in effect on the date of the earliest uncured borrower 

default. 

 ii. If the loan is not in default, SBA's payment of accrued interest 

must be at the rate in effect at the time of purchase, less the 

lender's servicing fee. 

submitted to the lender, less 1 percent which will be retained by the 

Agency. An example would be if the interest rate was 11 percent with 

a servicing fee of 2 percent - the secondary market would receive 9 

percent with lender receiving 1 percent (2 percent less 1 percent to be 

retained by SBA). For further information regarding the 1% 

retained by the Agency, refer to the paragraph titled, "Payment of 

Accrued Interest."

 (4) Purchase all accrued interest up to the date of payment of the purchase. This does 

not include interest on the day of purchase. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-20 

 e. Within 10 business days of final reconciliation of the account, SBA must do the 

following. 

 (1) Provide written notice to the FTA of the date of purchase by SBA at least 10 days 

prior to the purchase date. 

 (2) Input the purchase into SBA-DCS. Where the 1128 (Guaranty Loan Purchase 

System) screen asks if there is a "secondary bank," you state "Y" for yes. This 

will provide two screens: 

 (a) One screen for the "primary bank" which represents the combined SBA 

and lender shares of the loan (the gross loan amounts), and 

 (b) One screen for the "secondary bank" which represents the secondary 

market balances and interest rate net of the lender's servicing fee. 

 (3) Perform a pre-purchase/post purchase review of loan documents. 

 (4) If you are reducing the guaranty, reducing the principal amount purchased, or 

curtailing the days of interest paid, you must immediately notify the lender in 

writing that the lender must reimburse SBA for the amount of the overpayment by 

SBA. This means that the lender will reimburse SBA for SBA's share of the 

overpayment. Give the lender a deadline, usually no more than 2 weeks. 

 (a) Example: 

 On a loan with an outstanding gross principal balance of $100,000 

(interest rate 11 percent with servicing fee of 2 percent) and 150 days of 

accrued interest, SBA paid the secondary market 75 percent of the 

outstanding SBA share of principal and interest as follows: 

 75 percent x 100,000 = $75,000 

 75 percent x 150 days of interest at 9 percent (note rate less 2 percent 

servicing fee) = $2,773.97 

 (.75 x 100,000 x .09)/365 x 150 days 

 On review, SBA determined that the lender failed to obtain the required 

security interest in collateral with a liquidation value of $10,000. 

Additionally, upon review of the lender's transcript and the FTA 

transcript, SBA determined that the principal amount of the FTA's 

transcript (SBA share) was $3,000 more than the lender's transcript for 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-21

 Repair:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

SBA's share, and SBA had to purchase this higher balance. Finally, the 

lender failed to submit a complete purchase package to SBA within 120 

days of the earliest uncured payment default. 

 (b) In the above example, SBA must seek reimbursement for: 

 .75 x $10,000 = $7,500

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Discrepancy on transcript: $3,000 (SBA share) 

 Excessive interest days

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

:

 ̊

 =

 ̊

 (.75 x 100,000 x .09)/365 x 30 = $554.79 

 Payments in transit to the FTA:

 150 - 120 = 30 days overpaid 

 One payment of $2500 (SBA share is 

$1,875, principal only for this example) 

 

 Total amount o

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

f reimbursement

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

:

 ̊

 $12,929.79

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (7,500 + 3,000 + 554.79 + 1,875 =) 

 The 1086 agreement permits SBA to charge interest during the 

reimbursement period (days between the purchase date and the date of 

reimbursement by lender), calculated on outstanding guaranteed portion at 

the note rate. Assume that it took the lender 30 days to reimburse SBA. 

The calculation for the total interest charged the lender for the 

reimbursement period would be: 

 (.10 x $75,000)/365 x 30 = $616.44 

 Total reimbursement due from lender is: 

17. Transfer of Loan Servicing from Lender to SBA. 

 To transfer loan servicing from the

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 lender to SBA, the loan must be purchased by SBA. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 The procedure for transferring is as follows.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 

 $12,929.79 + $616.44 = $13,546.23. 

 Refer to the "NOTE" contained in paragraph 9-16, titled, "How Does SBA Purchase from the 

Secondary Market?". 

 a. Request a current transcript of account from the lender. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-22 

 (1) Consult with counsel as to which documents the lender must assign

 b. Request that the lender assign the original loan documents to SBA. 

 to SBA. 

Usually the list will include: 

 (a) Promissory note; 

 (b) Security agreements; 

 (c) UCCs; 

 (d) Guaranties; 

 (e) Mortgage/deeds of trust; 

 (f) Assignment of life insurance policies; 

 (g) Assignment and pledge of stock of corporation; and 

 (h) Assignment of lease and lessor's waiver of claim. 

 (2) Consult with counsel on the assignment language required and instruct the lender 

to use this language on all documents assigned. For UCC filings and other 

recorded loan documents, ask counsel for specific instruction on appropriate 

method of assignment and requirement for filing. You may wish to supply the 

new UCC filings required or the separate assignment forms required by counsel. 

 (3) Consult with counsel on which original documents the lender should forward to 

SBA. 

 c. Prepare a 327 action recommending that SBA take over loan servicing and route it to the 

approving official for approval under the rule of two. (This action may be included in the 

327 action completed for the purchase of the loan.) 

 (1) Submit a copy of the approved 327 action to OFO, Denver, for input into the loan 

accounting system. Once entered into the system by OFO, the loan will show 

"XGP SBA SERV." 

 (2) Instruct the borrower that all future payments are to be remitted directly to SBA's 

Office of Financial Operations (OFO) in Denver, CO. The only exception to this 

policy is where a legal or technical reason dictates that the collection must be sent 

to the field office. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-23

18. SBA's Purchase of the Unguaranteed Portion/Lender's Share of the Loan. 

 You should always attempt to negotiate a discount.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The amount paid for the unguaranteed portion of the loan held by FDIC cannot exceed 

the lesser

 a. The purchase by SBA of the lender's share of a loan is an Exception to Policy. Only the 

AA/FA, or designee, can approve such exceptions to policy. 

 b. For SBA loans acquired by FDIC, a field office can approve, under the Rule of Two, with 

comments of Counsel. 

 The approving official may authorize the purchase of the entire SBA guaranty loan or the 

lender's share of an XGP loan from FDIC when such action is in the best interest of the 

SBA. 

 An example when it may be in the best interests of SBA would be when FDIC has taken 

over a bank with a large portfolio of SBA loans which are not quickly sold to a successor 

bank. In this circumstance, the field office might face the burdensome administrative 

task of responding to FDIC on a large number of loans, perhaps while also taking over 

servicing of the loans and responding directly to the borrowers. 

 (See paragraph 12-4, titled, "SBA's responsibilities after an FDIC Take-Over," for 

additional information.) 

 of: 

 (1) The agreed upon present value (discounted value) of the lender's share (Refer to 

SOP 50 51, appendix on present value calculations); or 

 (2) The par (face) value of the lender's share. 

 You must state in your 327 action for purchase from FDIC the comparison of the present 

and face values of the lender's share of the loan. 

19. Purchase Log. 

 a. Each field office or service center must maintain a purchase log to control the purchase 

process. 

 b. The log should be in a format similar to the guaranty purchase control log format. The 

log may be maintained manually or computerized, but must contain the following 

information: 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-24 

 (1) Fiscal year of log; 

 (2) Name of borrower and SBA loan number; 

 (3) Name of lender; 

 (4) Loan balance; 

 (5) Interest paid-to-date; 

 (6) Date SBA received demand from lender; 

 (7) Date SBA advised lender of discrepancy or missing documents (if any); 

 (8) Date SBA received complete material from lender (discrepancy resolved); 

 (9) Days of interest SBA purchased; 

 (10) Date SBA input the purchase into DCS system; 

 (11) Date file submitted to Headquarters for denial of liability; and 

 (12) Date denial of liability was approved/declined. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

9-25

 

SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-1

CHAPTER 10 

MISCELLANEOUS ISSUES REGARDING 

PARTICIPATION LOANS 

1. 13 CFR  120.524. 

 

 (6) SBA has received a written request from the Lender to terminate the guarantee; 

 (7) The Lender has not paid the guarantee fee within the period required under SBA rules and 

regulations; 

 (8) The Lender has failed to request that SBA purchase a guarantee within 120 days after maturity 

of the loan; 

 (9) The Lender has failed to use required SBA forms or exact electronic copies; or 

 (10) The Borrower has paid the loan in full. 

 (b) If SBA determines, after purchasing its guaranteed portion of a loan, that any of the events set forth in 

paragraph (a) of this section occurred in connection with that loan, SBA is entitled to recover any money 

paid on the guarantee plus interest from the lender responsible for those events. 

 (c) If the Lender's loan documentation indicates that one or more of the events in paragraph (a) of this section 

may have occurred, SBA may undertake such investigation as it deems necessary to determine whether to 

honor or deny the guarantee, and may withhold a decision on whether to honor the guarantee until the 

completion of such investigation. 

 When is SBA released from liability on its guarantee? 

 (a) SBA is released from liability on a loan guarantee (in whole or in part, within SBA's exclusive discretion), 

if any of the events below occur: 

 (1) The Lender has failed to comply materially with any of the provisions of these regulations, the 

Loan Guarantee Agreement, or the Authorization; 

 (2) The Lender has failed to make, close, service, or liquidate a loan in a prudent manner; 

 (3) The Lender's improper action or inaction has placed SBA at risk; 

 (4) The Lender has failed to disclose a material fact to SBA regarding a guaranteed loan in a timely 

manner; 

 (5) The Lender has misrepresented a material fact to SBA regarding a guaranteed loan; 

 (d) Any information provided to SBA prior to Lender's request for SBA to honor its guarantee shall not 

prejudice SBA's right to deny liability for a guarantee if one or more of the events listed in paragraph (a) 

of this section occur. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-2 

2. Cancellation, Termination, and Expiration of an SBA Guaranty. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Voluntary cancellation by lender.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Upon written notice to SBA, a lender may request that SBA terminate or cancel 

the guaranty on any of its SBA loans provided

 (e) Unless SBA provides written notice to the contrary, the Lender remains responsible for all loan servicing 

and liquidation actions until SBA honors its guarantee in full.

: 

 (b) The loan is not paid in full; and 

 (a) The SBA has not purchased the loan. 

 (c) The lender has not assigned or transferred the loan to another party (e.g., a 

lender can not cancel a guaranty for a loan sold in the secondary market 

since the loan is assigned to a registered holder). 

 (2) A lender may request that SBA cancel a guaranty in circumstances where SBA 

intends to seek a denial of liability on the guaranty, or where the lender has a 

conflict of interest between the SBA loan and other non-SBA loans to the same 

borrower. 

 (3) If you receive a request for cancellation or termination of the guaranty from a 

lender, you must: 

 (a) Execute an 327 action recommending approval of the cancellation. Route 

the action to the approving official under the rule of two. 

 (b) Send a copy of the approved 327 action to SBA's OFO, Denver, for input 

into the SBA-DCS. 

 (c) Use the date of receipt of the letter from the lender as the effective date of 

cancellation. 

 (d) Advise the lender in writing that SBA has canceled the guaranty. In the 

letter, you must state: 

 "SBA does not waive any preexisting causes of action against the 

participant or borrower nor does SBA waive any defenses against 

preexisting causes of actions." 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-3

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Involuntary cancellation or termination by SBA.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 In certain circumstances, SBA can terminate its guaranty on a loan without the 

lender's concurrence. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Nonpayment of guaranty fee.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 See SOP 50 10 for guidance on nonpayment of the SBA guaranty fee.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Maturity of loan.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 (a) The regulations state SBA's obligation to purchase a guaranty on a 

specific loan expires 120 days after the maturity date of the loan. 

 (b) The lender may request in writing that SBA extend the purchase deadline 

prior to 120 days after the maturity date. The SBA may, at its sole 

discretion, approve an extension of maturity under the Rule of Two. 

 (c) When a guaranty is terminated because 120 days have passed since the 

date of maturity, you must notify the lender in writing that SBA has 

canceled the guaranty. This notification is for administrative purposes 

only, since termination will be effective in any event.

 In your letter you must state: 

 "SBA does not waive any preexisting causes of action against the 

participant or borrower nor does SBA waive any defenses against preexisting causes of actions." 

 (d) The SBA may, as an exception to policy, and at its sole discretion, 

approve a reinstatement of a guaranty after the 120 days has elapsed since 

the maturity of the loan. Such action requires the approval of AA/FA or 

designee. 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Improper Transfer by FDIC of an SBA

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

 Guaranteed Loan to a Non

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

-

 ̊
EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

10-4 

participating Lender.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Pursuant to the memorandum of understanding executed between SBA 

and FDIC on October 15, 1991, regarding servicing SBA guaranty loans 

originated by failed banks, FDIC may sell an SBA guaranteed 

 loan ONLY to a participating lender (a lender which has executed a 

3. Reinstating an SBA Guaranty. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Erroneously reported "paid in full" loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Occasionally, a lender will erroneously report that a guaranty loan is "paid in full" 

(For example, once a lender sells a loan, its records reflect a zero balance. As a 

result, the lender reports the loan to SBA as paid in full.) 

 (2) If the lender wants to have the SBA guaranty reinstated, it must advise SBA in 

writing: 

 (a) Explaining what caused the mistake; 

 (b) Providing the current balance of the loan; and 

 (c) Certifying that no default or substantial adverse change has occurred. 

 (3) Except in unusual situations justified in a request for an exception to policy, the 

SBA must not reinstate the guaranty if your review indicates: 

 (a) A substantial adverse situation has occurred since the date of termination; 

 (b) The guaranty fee remains unpaid; or 

 (c) The borrower has an uncured default in payment of principal or interest. 

 (4) You must prepare a 327 action for approval of a reinstatement using the rule of 

two. You must send/FAX a copy of the 327 action to OFO Denver. 

 750 agreement with SBA). 

 (b) Improper transfer of an SBA guaranteed loan to a non-participating lender 

is grounds for denial of liability on the guaranty. (For more information on 

this subject, refer to Chapter 12, "Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 

(FDIC) Takeover of a Participating Lender." 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: APRIL XX,1998

10-5

 (5) You must continue to monitor the account until the loan has been reinstated. This 

process could take up to 30 days. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Canceled or terminated guaranty for unpurchased loans.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The SBA may, at its sole discretion and on a case-by-case basis, consider 

reinstatement of a canceled or terminated guaranty on a loan not purchased, 

provided that the cancellation was not intentional. 

 An example would be a lender inadvertently marks the SBA Form 1502, 

"Guaranty Loan Status and Lender Remittance." as "PAID IN FULL." 

 (2) For SBA to consider a request for reinstatement of a guaranty, the lender must 

request the reinstatement in writing and certify: 

 (a) That the loan is current; 

 (b) That there has been no adverse change and the lender has no knowledge 

that an adverse change is imminent; 

 (c) That the lender has paid the guaranty fee; 

 (d) The current loan balance; and 

 (e) The explanation for the cancellation and reinstatement of the guaranty. 

 (3) In order to process a request for reinstatement, you must: 

 (a) Execute a 327 action reflecting the above details of the loan; 

 (b) Forward your 327 action to the approving official for approval under the 

rule of two; 

 (c) Send a copy of the approved action to the OFO, Denver, for input into the 

SBA-DCS; and 

 (d) Notify the lender in writing that SBA has reinstated the guaranty. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Purchased loans (XGP) (reverse purchase).

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-6 

 (1) A lender may request that SBA convert a purchased loan (XGP) to a guaranty 

loan. The SBA, at its sole discretion, may approve such request under the rule of 

two. 

 (a) A lender may sell converted XGP loans provided the borrower has made 

all scheduled payments as agreed in the previous 12 consecutive months. 

 (b) The terms of the original 750 agreement will apply to the reinstated XGP. 

 No additional guaranty fee is required since the transaction reinstates the 

original guaranty for which a fee has been paid. 

 (2) In preparing the 327 action, you must indicate: 

 (a) Loan status.

 The loan must be current, both principal and interest, and there must be no 

adverse changes in the financial condition of the borrower. 

 (b) Interest rate.

 If the lender wants to convert the loan to a variable rate, that rate must be 

in the best interest of the borrower at the time of conversion to guaranty 

status. If in doubt, require the borrower's consent. 

 (c) Guaranty percentage.

 The percentage of guaranty must be the original percentage or the adjusted 

percentage if SBA repaired the purchase. 

 (d) Conversion price.

 The conversion price must be SBA's share of the current outstanding loan 

balance (including advances for expenses) plus accrued interest through 

the date of sale to lender (date SBA receives reinstatement funds from 

lender). 

 NOTE: Be sure to compare SBA records with the lender's records, 

accounting for any payments in transit, and reconciling the 

balance for principal and accrued interest, and the interest

paid-to-date.

 (3) Route your 327 action to your approving official for approval under the rule of 

two. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-7

 You must forward a copy of the approved 327 action to: 

4. Can SBA Approve a Reduction in the SBA Guaranty (an Increase in the Lender's Share) of 

the Loan? 

 Yes, a lender may request and SBA may approve 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

a reduction in SBA's share of the loan.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reduction in SBA's guaranty before purchase.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Collateral cashier in the field office. 

 The collateral cashier must remit the funds received from the lender to the 

OFO, Denver, using transaction code 380. 

 (b) Office of Financial Operations in Denver 

 The Office of Financial Operations, Programmatic Accounting Group 

must input the accounting for the reverse purchase and reinstate the 

guaranty. 

 (4) Upon approval of the 327 action, notify the lender in writing that SBA will 

reinstate the guaranty provided the lender remits to SBA the funds required. Use 

the following language exactly in the commitment letter to the lender: 

 "SBA must receive from ___________(name of lender) $___________, which 

is the purchase price at par (principal balance, including advances, plus 

accrued interest due from the borrower at date of sale to SBA) in cash for the 

guaranteed portion under the terms of the original guaranty agreement and 

at the SBA purchased percentage rate (_______%) with respect to the 

guaranteed portion. In consideration for this payment, SBA will reinstate its 

guaranty on the loan. SBA requires no additional guaranty fee since this is 

not a new guaranty but rather is a reinstatement of a guaranty. Lender must 

charge borrower the same rate of interest stated in the Note, unless SBA has 

agreed otherwise."

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Prior to full disbursement.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 SBA's Finance Division is responsible for processing a lender's request to 

increase the lender's share of a loan prior to full disbursement. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

10-8 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

After disbursement.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Guaranty loans 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

 partially or fully disbursed.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Approve with a 327 action under the Rule of Two and advise the lender in 

writing of a change in the guaranty. 

 NOTE:

 Loan servicing personnel are responsible for processing a lender's request to 

increase the lender's share of a loan after the loan is fully disbursed. 

 A lender may want to increase its share of a guaranty loan after disbursement to 

allow an increase in the loan or for a new loan to a borrower that is near its 

maximum limit of $750,000. To process a lender's request to increase the lender's 

share of the loan after disbursement, but prior to purchase, you must: 

With an increase in the lender's share of the guaranty, there will be 

an additional guaranty fee. (Refer to SOP 50 10 for additional 

information.)

 (b) Send a copy of the 327 action approval to DFC, Denver, Programmatic 

Accounting Group to input the reduction in SBA's guaranty percentage. 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Immediate participation loans.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Processing a lender's request to increase the lender's share of an immediate 

participation loan after disbursement, is similar to sub-paragraph 3.c., "Purchased 

Loan (XGP) (reverse purchase)." 

 You must: 

 (a) Approve with a 327 action under the rule of two. 

 (b) Notify the lender of the amount due SBA for the additional principal and 

interest through the sale date which represents the increase in the lender's 

share; 

 (c) Via collateral cashier, remit the lender's check to DFC, Denver, 

transaction code 380. 

 (d) Send a copy of the 327 action approval to DFC, Denver, Programmatic 

Accounting Group to input the reduction in SBA's percentage of 

participation; and 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

10-9

 (e) Exchange the new SBA Form 152, "Participation Certificate," if it is a 

lender-serviced loan, or the new SBA Form 156, "Certificate of Interest'" 

if it is a SBA-serviced loan for the respective old certificate held by the 

lender. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Reduction in SBA's guaranty after purchase.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 To approve a decrease in SBA's share of a purchased loan (XGP) upon request of the 

lender, you must: 

 (1) Approve with a 327 action under the rule of two; 

 (2) Notify the lender of the amount due SBA for the additional principal and interest 

through the sale date which represents the increase in the lender's share; 

 (3) Via collateral cashier, remit lender's check to DFC, transaction code 380; 

 (4) Send a copy of SBA Form 327 approval to DFC, Programmatic Accounting 

Group to input the reduction in SBA's percentage of participation; and 

 (5) Exchange the new SBA Form 152,"Participation Certificate," if it is a lenderserviced loan, or new SBA Form 156,"Certificate of Interest," if it is an SBAserviced loan for the respective old certificate held by the lender. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-10 
EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

10-1 

CHAPTER 11 

PREPAYMENT OR PURCHASE OF A DEVELOPMENT 

COMPANY LOAN OR DEBENTURE 

1. Factors Unique to Development Company Loan Servicing. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the difference between 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

prepayments and purchases?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 This chapter provides guidance for both borrower's voluntary prepayments of loans and 

SBA's purchase of debentures. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Prepayments

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 This chapter provides the procedures for prepaying development company loans or 

purchasing development company debentures. 

 (1) The CDCs make loans to eligible small businesses that are funded by the sale of 

debentures with repayment guaranteed by SBA. 

 (2) There are two types of loans which are funded in this way. 

 (a) The SBA 503 ("503") loans were funded by debentures sold to the Federal 

Finance Bank (FFB) of the U.S. Department of Treasury. The SBA "503" 

loans were approved between 1980 and June 1986. 

 (b) The SBA 504 ("504") loans are funded by debentures sold to private 

investors through underwriters. The SBA "504" loan approvals began 

June 1986. 

 (c) The major servicing differences between "503" and "504" loans relate to 

prepayments and purchases. These differences are highlighted in this 

chapter. 

.

 ̊

 (a) When a borrower pays its loan in full prior to its maturity date, the CDC 

must also prepay the debenture. Therefore, the prepayment amount for the 

loan is the same amount required to prepay the debenture. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-2 

 Prepayment of the 504 loan or Debenture.  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The Borrower may prepay its 504 loan, if it pays the entire principal balance, unpaid 

interest, any unpaid fees, and any prepayment premium established in the note. If the 

Borrower prepays, the CDC must prepay the corresponding Debenture with interest and 

premium. If one of the Debentures in a Debenture Pool is prepaid, the Investors in that 

Debenture Pool must be paid pro rata, and SBA's guarantee on the entire Debenture 

Pool must be proportionately reduced. If the entire Debenture Pool is paid off, SBA may 

call all Certificates backed by the Pool for redemption."

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Purchases

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.940.  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 (a) When a borrower is unable to make the loan payments as agreed (amortize 

the loan and debenture), the SBA will purchase the debenture. The loan 

will then be reviewed for further workout, and either classified into 

liquidation or charge-off. 

 (b) Regulations: 

 13 CFR 120.938. 

 Default.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 What is the difference between 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

503 and 504 debentures?

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Upon occurrence of an event of default specified in the 504 note which requires 

automatic acceleration, the note becomes due and payable. Upon occurrence of 

an event of default which does not require automatic acceleration, SBA may 

forbear acceleration of the note and attempt to resolve the default. If the 

default is not cured subsequently, the note shall be accelerated. In either case, 

upon acceleration of the note, the Debenture which funded it is also due 

immediately, and SBA must honor its guarantee of the Debenture. SBA shall 

not reimburse the investor for any premium paid. 

 (b) If a CDC defaults on a Debenture, SBA generally shall limit its recovery to the 

payments made by the small business to the CDC on the loan made from the 

Debenture proceeds, and the collateral securing the defaulted loan. However, 

SBA will look to the CDC for the entire amount of the Debenture in the case of 

fraud, negligence, or misrepresentation by the CDC.

 One of the few substantive differences between the 503 and 504 debentures is the 

prepayment provision. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-3

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

503 debenture backed loans

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 504 debenture backed loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) A borrower can pay off its 504 loan prior to scheduled maturity by 

prepaying the debenture based on a formula agreed to by the investors. 

The CDC or SBA can only prepay or purchase the debenture as of 

 (a) A borrower can pay off its 503 loan prior to scheduled maturity by 

prepaying the debenture at a price approximately equivalent to the market 

value of the debenture at the time of prepayment. The FFB prepares the 

actual prepayment price. They base the price on a computation of the 

present value of the semi-annual payment stream of the debenture. 

 (b) As interest rates for U.S. Treasury financing fluctuate, the prepayment 

price will also fluctuate. If the current rate for comparable remaining term 

is less than the debenture rate, the prepayment price will likely exceed the 

balance of the note if paid according to the amortization schedule. The 

difference is the "premium," often identified as a prepayment penalty. A 

larger difference in the rates will result in a greater premium. Similarly, if 

the current rate is greater than the debenture rate, it is possible that the 

prepayment price on the debenture will be less than the amortized loan 

balance. In that case, the borrower will receive credit for a "discount." 

 (c) The FFB allows the SBA to prepay 503 debentures twice during each 

month. (See paragraph 2, "Documentation Required for the Prepayment") 

debenture's semi-annual payment date. The prepayment amount is the 

sum of the following: 

 i. Outstanding note balance at the semi-annual date; 

 ii. Monthly payments (minus CDC fees) due up to and including the 

semi-annual month; and 

 iii. Scheduled premium (if any). 

 (b) Each debenture certificate contains the prepayment premium information. 

 The 504 prepayment premium is a declining amount over the first half of 

the term of the debenture. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-4 

2. Documentation Required for the Prepayment. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC's 15 day 

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

notice for prepayment.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 The 

 ̊  ̊ ̊

request letter.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (2) Prepayment date

 (c) The borrower may prepay at any time, but calculations will include all 

monthly payments scheduled up to and including the one due on the semiannual payment date. 

 The CDC must submit a letter request and a resolution for prepayment to CSA at least 15 

days prior to the requested prepayment date. 

 The CDC letter must include: 

 (1) Identification of the debenture. 

 This includes the type (503 or 504), date of issue, face amount, debenture interest 

rate, and maturity date. 

. 

 (a) A borrower may prepay a 503 debenture only on the 2nd or 4th Thursday

 The CDC must identify the date by which the borrower plans to make the 

prepayment. 

of the month, except, during November and December, when the 

prepayment is on the 1st or 3rd Thursday. 

 (b) A borrower may prepay a 504 loan at any time. However, the debenture 

can only be prepaid on the 3rd Thursday of the month before its semiannual payment date. 

 (3) Statement whether there is an outstanding deferment or delinquency. 

 (4) Contact person

 If SBA advanced (paid) part or all of a semi-annual installment on behalf of the 

borrower, the amount shown as due on the debenture will be less than the amount 

that the borrower owes on the note. 

. 

 Name and telephone numbers (fax and voice) of the person handling the 

transaction for the CDC. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-5

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Corporate resolution.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Full compliance necessary.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

3. Prepayment Procedural Steps. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Prepayment estimate

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

s.

 ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Notice to CSA.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (1) The CDC must include a corporate resolution for prepayment with the request for 

prepayment of the loan and the debenture. The resolution submitted must contain 

wording approved by the SBA. No changes are allowed. 

 (2) The resolution is not required for SBA-serviced loans. 

 The CDC must obtain all required documentation before submitting the letter request to 

the CSA. The CSA has the authority to waive the 15 day notice requirement, provided 

the CDC can comply with the requirements of the prepayment procedural steps, in 

paragraph 3, "Prepayment Procedural Steps." 

 The CDC must ensure compliance with the requirements of the preceding paragraph. The 

references to CDC for this paragraph also refers to SBA if the loan is SBA serviced. 

 (1) The CDC must send by facsimile transmission, SBA Form 1614, "Loan 

Information Request," (see Appendix 24) to the CSA for receipt of the 

prepayment estimate. 

 (2) The CSA will send the estimate to the CDC. 

 (1) The CDC must submit a memo to the CSA, stating that it has completed the 

prepayment requirements. 

 (2) The CDC must provide a copy of the corporate resolution (original must be 

retained in the CDC's loan file). 

 (3) The CDC may submit this notification by facsimile transmission. 

 (4) The CDC must submit this notification to the CSA for their receipt at least 15 

days prior to the prospective prepayment date. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-6 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Prepayment deposit.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) For most debentures. 

 (2) 503 debentures

 A non-refundable prepayment deposit is required. The note between the CDC 

and the borrower states this requirement. 

. 

 (3) 504 debentures

 Borrowers must provide a $1,000 good faith deposit for debentures funded on or 

after July 1985. 

. 

 (5) Failure to submit the deposit will result in the cancellation of the prepayment

 Borrowers must provide a $1,000 good faith deposit for debentures funded on or 

after January 1992. 

 (4) The borrower must wire the $1,000 deposit to the CSA 7 business days prior to 

the prospective 503 prepayment date or 10 business days prior to the 504 

prepayment date. The $1,000 deposit will be deducted from the prepayment 

price. 

request. 

 (6) If the borrower fails to complete the prepayment, the deposit will be forfeited. 

The CSA will send the deposit to OFO, Denver. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Prepayment cancellation.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Prepayment price determination and notification.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The CDC must provide written notice to the CSA for any loan that will not prepay 

as scheduled. 

 (2) If the prepayment is to be rescheduled, the CDC must notify the CSA, in writing, 

of the new date and advise the CSA that it is to re-utilize the prepayment 

resolution. Otherwise a new resolution will be required. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-7

 (1) For 503 debentures, on the day before the scheduled prepayment date, CSA will 

notify the CDC by facsimile transmission of the official prepayment amount. 

 (2) For 504 debentures, at least 1 week before the prepayment date, CSA will notify 

the CDC by facsimile transmission of the prepayment amount. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Escrow account funds.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Prepayment funds transfer.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (2) The amount will reflect the reduction of the $1,000 deposit, if any, and 

application of any escrow/reserve account funds. The CSA will not accept 

checks. The borrower must not send funds to the SBA

 (3) The CDC must notify the borrower or the borrower's designated agent. 

 For 503 debentures, the CSA automatically applies the reserve/escrow funds to the 

prepayment. 

 (1) The borrower must wire to the CSA funds equal to the quoted prepayment 

amount. 

. 

 (3) For 503 debentures, the borrower must wire the funds by noon (Eastern Time) on 

the prepayment date. 

 (4) For 504 debentures, the borrower must wire the funds by noon (Eastern Time) no later 

than the third Thursday of the month. 

 (5) Timeliness is Critical. 

 (b) For 503 debentures

 (a) The CSA must receive the correct payment by the date and time specified 

above. If the payment is not timely, the CSA will terminate the 

transaction, the CDC must reschedule, and the borrower will forfeit any 

prepayment deposit. 

, it will be necessary to obtain a new prepayment amount from 

the FFB. 

 (c) For 504 debentures, it may be necessary to revise the quote based on the next 

semi-annual debenture payment. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-8 

4. Release of Debenture and Note. 

 Do not wait for the PMQD screen to show "PIF.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (d) In either case, additional funds may be required to close the transaction 

and complete the prepayment at a later date. 

 a. You may release the note and collateral, after the CDC completes the prepayment and 

you receive from the CSA confirmation of the receipt of funds. 

"

 ̊

 

 b. For 503 debentures, the SBA will return the canceled debenture to the CDC. 

 c. For 504 debentures, the debenture trustee will return the debenture after the next semiannual date. 

5. Alternatives to Prepayment of Debentures. 

 (1) Sale and assumption

 a. In the normal course of operations, businesses and properties are bought and sold. A 

borrower who sells his/her business or property may have sufficient funds to prepay the 

debenture but may not wish to endure the economic hardship or financial disadvantage of 

the prepayment premium. 

 The CDC and SBA, in an effort to assist the borrower, may consider alternatives to 

prepayment. 

. 

 See chapter 5.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 (2) Substitution of collateral. 

 See chapter 5.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 (3) Cash escrow account

 

. 

 (a) For 503 debentures, SBA may permit the borrower to sell the facility and 

place sufficient cash in escrow to ensure that the 503 loan will be paid in a 

timely manner or to prepay the loan. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-9

 (4) Prepayment of a third-party loan

 (b) If a cash escrow account is established from the sale of assets, you should 

transfer loan servicing to SBA, unless the CDC continues to service the 

loan for sale of other assets. 

 (c) The cash escrow account must be established at the CSA. 

. 

6. Purchase of Debentures. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The 

 ̊  ̊ ̊

workout alternatives include:

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 In the event of a business scale-back or death of a principal, proceeds from a 

partial sale of assets or an insurance recovery may be applied to reduce or pay off 

the participating third-party loan. This could reduce overall debt payments 

improving loan repayment-ability, and would reduce prior liens improving SBA's 

collateral position. 

 b. In evaluating the alternatives, you should maintain SBA's collateral position. The value 

of the collateral should be maintained at the same level as available to SBA prior to a 

prepayment. 

 (1) The purchase of a debenture and the liquidation of the loan are two separate and 

distinct events. A debenture purchase must be initiated prior to normal 

liquidation activities and may be made as a step in loan workout activities. It is 

initiated by submitting an approved 327 action to the CLSC-LR (Attn. "Debenture 

Purchase Clerk") placing the loan into liquidation (or advising that workout is 

required) and requesting purchase of the debenture. 

 (2) You should work with the CDC and encourage the CDC to maintain its 

relationship with the borrower. When the CDC reports borrower problems, you 

and the CDC should consider available workout alternatives that can be taken 

without purchase of the debenture. 

 (a) Short term deferment. 

 (b) Subordination of the SBA lien to a working capital loan, if it appears that 

the workout will overcome a short term problem; and 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

11-10 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 504 guidance.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Monitoring and collection requirements

 (c) Agreement with other creditors for similar concessions. 

 (3) Due to the terms of the debenture, some loan workout tools are NOT available 

until SBA purchases the debenture. 

 Alternative tools NOT available until after purchase: 

 (a) Extension of maturity; 

 (b) Deferment of payments to maturity; 

 (c) Reduction of interest rates; and 

 (d) Other payment modifications such as seasonal payments. 

. 

 (a) When a 504 borrower becomes two payments past due, the CDC and SBA 

must take the necessary steps to bring the loan current, or when 

appropriate, implement a formal written deferment that includes a workout 

plan. Keep in mind that a deferment on a 504 loan is allowable only if the 

borrower can reasonably project that the deferred amount will be brought 

current within 5 years after the deferment period. 

 (b) In the absence of an approved workout plan, the CDC and the SBA must 

begin acceleration procedures, when the loan becomes three payments 

past due. 

 (c) Monthly, SBA's CSA, will prepare a report on 504 loans that are 45 days 

past due and send it to the CDC and to the appropriate SBA field office 

servicing the loan. 

 (d) The CDC will have approximately 15 business days to analyze and 

document an action plan to bring the payments current and/or prepare a 

workout plan or determine other appropriate action. 

 i. If the CDC is not able to either bring the loan current or have an 

SBA-approved action plan in place when the loan is three 

payments past due, SBA and the CDC must begin acceleration 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

11-11

procedures. 

 ii. If a workout plan is developed before purchase, SBA should delay 

debenture acceleration procedures. 

 (e) The CDC is responsible for notifying the CSA that an SBA-approved plan 

is in place in order to avoid acceleration procedures and debenture 

purchase. 

 (f) Example of how this will affect the borrower: 

 A 504 loan payment is due on June 15 (due date of June 1 plus grace 

period). If the June payment is missed and is not received by July 30, the 

June payment becomes 45 days delinquent on that date. The next CSA 45 

day report will show that the borrower is two payments past due. When 

the CDC receives the report from the CSA, the CDC must initiate contact 

with the borrower and develop a plan to bring the loan current or to 

establish a workout plan which must be approved by the SBA field office. 

 (Note: The delinquency period starts at the completion of the grace 

period in order to provide the necessary time for the borrower to bring the 

loan current.) 

 If the CDC is not able to either bring the loan current or have an SBAapproved action plan in place by August 19, the loan will be listed on the 

August 65 day delinquent report, since as of August 20, the borrower 

would be three payments past due. Once the loan is three payments past 

due, SBA and the CDC must begin acceleration procedures. If a workout 

plan is developed before purchase, SBA could delay debenture 

acceleration procedures. The CDC is responsible for notifying the CSA 

that an SBA-approved plan is in place in order to avoid acceleration 

procedures and debenture purchase. 

 NOTE: SBA and the CDCs should be mindful that an in-depth analysis of the viability of 

the small business concern is essential in deciding whether or not to 

liquidate. A prompt analysis and decision are necessary in order to carry 

out the legislative mandate . Decisions not to purchase the debenture and 

liquidate a business on the 65-day delinquency list must be supported by a 

well-analyzed, written workout plan prepared by the CDC and approved 

by the SBA. Once the workout plan is determined not to be successful in 

bringing the loan current and the loan returns to or remains on the 65-day 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

11-12 

delinquent list, SBA and the CDC must begin acceleration procedures.

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Purchase decision by SBA.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (3) The decision regarding when

 (1) The field office/servicing center must submit its approved 327 action for 

debenture purchased to the Little Rock Commercial Loan Servicing Center 

(CLSC-LR), attention "Debenture Purchase Clerk." Further guidance for the 327 

action for recommending purchase is provided in this chapter. 

 (2) For guidance on determining if the debenture has been purchased, see paragraph 

11-8 titled, "Loan Accounting after Debenture Purchase." 

 to purchase the debenture is critical to protecting the 

interests of the Agency, borrower, and the participating third party lender. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Purchase for intensive servicing workouts.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Due to the limitations imposed on loan workout by the debenture structure, you 

should consider recommending debenture purchase if: 

 (a) The CDC and/or borrower indicate that the borrower will not be able to 

make the loan payments as required in the loan agreement; and 

 (b) The borrower has had 12 months or more of deferment and is not able to 

make payments under an approved catch-up plan for return to regular 

payments within 5 years of the end of the deferment. 

 (2) Failure to purchase the debenture and initiate a workout in a timely manner may 

result in a dissipation of collateral or further deterioration of the borrower's 

financial condition. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Bankruptcy actions.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Your 327 action must clearly identify that there is a bankruptcy and the type, and 

 Example reasons for debenture purchase are: 

 (a) Intensive servicing workouts; 

 (b) Bankruptcy; 

 (c) Liquidation; and 

 (d) Litigation. 

 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

11-13

must also identify whether there is a probable or actual workout, assumption, 

compromise, or charge-off. 

 (2) For 504 debentures, you must submit the 327 action requesting purchase for 

debentures sold before or during August 1993, if the borrower or a guarantor files 

for bankruptcy. 

 (3) For 504 debentures sold after August 1993, a chapter 11 bankruptcy does not 

automatically require that SBA purchase the debenture. If the bankruptcy does 

not appear to adversely affect loan repayment ability the field office may 

recommend that SBA not purchase the debenture. 

 (4) For 503 debentures, SBA agreements do not require SBA to purchase the 503 

debenture under specified circumstances. When the borrower has filed a petition 

in bankruptcy, it may be important for SBA to purchase the debenture quickly so 

that SBA's "proof of claim" can include the premium or discount amount. In 

cases of chapter 11 bankruptcy, you should not submit an approved 327 action 

recommending that CLCS-LR purchase the 503 debenture until: 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Dollar amount for demand o

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

r proof of claim.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 (a) The bankruptcy has been dismissed; 

 (b) The bankruptcy has been converted; or 

 (c) It is clearly evident from the plan that there will not be a full recovery for 

SBA. 

 In the event of default where SBA has to make a claim for all amounts due, SBA will 

normally establish a proof of claim based on the actual amount of debt remaining. In the 

case of 503/504 loans, the actual amount of total debt is not known until the debenture 

has been purchased at which time the amount of any premium is disclosed. 

 (1) Demand.

 (a) In some cases you may need to make a demand or file a claim prior to 

purchase of the debenture. 

 (b) You can make demand with an estimate from the CSA in response to SBA 

1614. 

 (c) Your request to the CSA must clearly identify the purpose of the request 

and note any deferments or missed payments. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-14 

 NOTE: You can not use the PMQD09 to get a payoff amount prior to 

purchase of the debenture. 

 (2) For a proof of claim.

 (a) In order to establish the actual amount of the borrower's debenture 

premium or discount, SBA must first purchase the debenture.

 i. Prepayment premium.

 (b) For 504 debentures, there is no prepayment penalty if the debenture is 

purchased by SBA. However, the purchase will include the amount of 

 monthly principal and interest payments to and including the month of the 

semi-annual debenture payment. 

 (c) For 503 debentures, the FFB's present value of the debenture determines if 

the prepayment will result in a premium, a discount, or a simple "at par" 

transaction: 

 The prepayment premium is the charge 

assessed by the FFB to offset their loss of investment income. If 

SBA's election to prepay the debenture for any reason, including 

liquidation, necessitates SBA's payment of a premium to the FFB, 

you must consider such payment a recoverable expense and add 

that amount to the note balance. 

 ii. Prepayment discount. A prepayment discount is a rebate paid by 

the FFB upon the prepayment of a debenture yielding less than 

existing market rate. The SBA will pass on any discounts we 

receive to borrowers in liquidation only after any loan deficiencies 

are paid in full. 

7. Processing of 327 Actions For Debenture Purchases. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Statement of reason.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must send to CLSC-LR the approved 327 action recommending purchase of the 

debenture. Your 327 action must include a statement explaining the reason for the 

purchase (see prior paragraph): 

 (1) Placing loan in a workout; 

 (2) Bankruptcy; or 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-15

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Termination of CSA and CDC servicing.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

8. Loan Accounting after Debenture Purchase. 

9. Placing Loans in Liquidation. 

 Development company loans are treated in the same manner as 7(a) loa

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ns.

 ̊ ̊ ̊

10. Termination of CDC Servicing. 

 (3) Placing loan in liquidation and/or litigation. 

 (1) The CLSC-LR will terminate the CSA and CDC servicing functions at the time 

the debenture is purchased. 

 (2) The CLSC-LR will notify the CSA to close out its accounts, transfer monies, and 

provide loan balance information necessary for filing legal claims, etc. The CSA 

will send a copy of the loan balance information to BLS, who will provide copies 

to SBA's Accounting Operations Division for record keeping purposes. 

 (3) The CLRS-LR will notify the field office or servicing center when the transfer of 

servicing is completed. 

 a. Once the debenture is purchased, SBA's accounting division will set up a new note 

record. For the new note loan number, SBA's Accounting Division will change the 

eighth digit of the loan number from a "0" to a "5." It sometimes takes up to eight weeks 

from the time SBA purchases the debenture until the field office/servicing center can pull 

up the computer record for the new loan number. If you need a loan balance or daily 

interest amount in the interim, contact Denver, OFO, Programmatic Accounting Group. 

 b. Once the accounting is set up with the new loan number, the PMQD05 screen for the 

original number ("0" in the eighth digit) should show "PIF" or "PURCHASED" next to 

the "SBA-STATUS" and there should be no dollar amounts under "GROSS." If the 

original loan status is not "PIF" or "PURCHASED" or there are dollar amounts shown, 

you must contact OFO, Denver, to make the adjustments. 

 c. Once the new record is available on the computer, you will be able to access loan 

information, including transcripts, as you would for any SBA-serviced loan. 

 a. CDCs should remain involved with a loan whenever possible. For problem loans, CDCs 

can actively assist in: 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-16 

 c. Communication between the CDC and the field office is essential to the expeditious 

handling of problem loans. When you make a decision to terminate CDC servicing, you 

must forward a 327 action accomplishing this to the CSA with a copy to the CDC. You 

should discuss this action with the CDC. 

 d. When SBA terminates CDC servicing and assumes responsibility for the account, you 

must insert "SBA/

 (1) Doing the "leg work" in cooperation with SBA; and 

 (2) Finding assumptors for the business or the loan through sale of assets or new 

financing. 

 b. You should terminate the CDC's servicing functions only if: 

 (1) The CDC is unable or unwilling to continue its servicing function; 

 (2) An assumption, workout or continued payment activity is not possible without 

purchase of the debenture; or 

 (3) There is no reasonable probability of full recovery from a potential workout, 

compromise, or liquidation. 

" in front of the "Borrower" name in SBA's computer and other files. 

This will be helpful in determining where the servicing function resides, while continuing 

to identify the source of the loan. 

11. Termination of CSA Servicing. 

 a. The CSA servicing must continue until SBA purchases the debenture. You must route all 

funds collected through the CSA to ensure that the borrower (and CDC) receive proper 

credit. If funds are sent to OFO, Denver, they may be held in suspense resulting in a 

misrepresentation of the borrower's debt. When requesting payoff information utilize 

SBA 1614 (see Appendix 24). 

 b. In cases where SBA terminates CDC servicing, but the loan is still viable, you must 

maintain CSA servicing. In such cases, CSA will treat the field office as a substitute 

CDC. 

 If SBA terminates CDC servicing due to unsatisfactory CDC performance pursuant to 13 

CFR  120.980-120.984 (see paragraph 3-4.e. titled, "Regulations for CDCs"), it is 

preferable to transfer servicing to another CDC without a break in CSA servicing. 

12. Servicing Fees. 

 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-17

 a. Servicing fees are part of the borrower's indebtedness and they continue as long as the 

note is in place. Either the CDC or SBA must collect these fees until the obligation is 

satisfied. 

13. CDC Liquidating Functions. 

 b. If loan servicing has been transferred to SBA, but SBA has not purchased the debenture, 

the CSA must collect the CDC servicing fees. The CSA transfers the fees to OFO, 

Denver. 

 c. If SBA has purchased the debenture and you have established a new note or modification 

to the note, you should discontinue the CDC and CSA fees, providing a savings to the 

borrower. 

 a. The SBA may allow a CDC to assist with the liquidation of loans under SBA regular 

liquidation regulations and procedures. 

 (1) When CDCs participate in liquidation activities, the liquidation report/plan will 

specify the CDC's duties, compensation, and fees. 

 (2) You must coordinate with the CDC activities with the third-party lender. 

 (3) The SBA is responsible for developing and implementing a liquidation plan. 

 (4) Where possible, the CDC should actively participate through final disposition of 

the loan as authorized by SBA. 

 b. You must NOT give the CDC any responsibility for the conduct of litigation which 

occurs as a part of the liquidation of indebtedness. 

 c. SBA must NOT reassign documents to the CDC. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

11-18 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-1

CHAPTER 12

FEDERAL DEPOSIT INSURANCE CORPORATION 

(FDIC) TAKE OVER OF A PARTICIPATING LENDER 

1. The FDIC Takeover of a Participating Bank. 

 The FDIC has the statutory authority to determine when a bank has failed and when it will take 

over a bank. When the FDIC takes over a bank: 

 a. The FDIC becomes the receiver for the bank's operations. The FDIC steps into the shoes 

of the original bank; and 

 b. FDIC assumes the duties and responsibilities, as well as the liabilities of the bank for 

servicing and liquidating the bank's loan portfolio. This includes the SBA-guaranteed 

loans in the failed bank's portfolio. 

2. What are the Rules Governing How SBA Interacts with FDIC After a Takeover? 

 On October 15, 1991, SBA and FDIC entered into a memorandum of understanding (MOU) 

which clarified the relationship between SBA and FDIC on SBA-guaranteed loans. (See 

Appendix 25.) 

3. What Must You Do When a Bank Fails? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Notice of a bank failure.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 

 The FDIC is responsible for notifying SBA of a bank failure. However, if you become 

aware of a participating lender's failure, you should immediately contact FDIC. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Obtain a list of borrower names and addresses.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Obtain a list of all outstanding SBA guaranteed loans at the failed bank. This 

information can be obtained from one of the following sources. 

 (1) From the loan status report submitted by the bank. 

 (2) From the failed or successor bank, or from FDIC while it is the receiver for the 

failed bank. 

 (3) From the field office(s) working with that bank. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-2 

 (4) From the Office of Borrower and Lender Servicing (BLS) in Headquarters, if you 

provide the following information. 

 (a) The failed bank's financial institution reporting system (FIRS) number; 

and 

 (b) The location of the bank and all of its branch offices. 

 (5) From the computer, on the Guaranty Loan Reporting System screen (PMGI01). 

This provides a list of loans by lender, by FIRS number. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Send a letter to all borrowers immediately.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Procedure

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 You must notify all borrowers in writing, sending a copy to FDIC and to Colson 

Services Corp. (Colson), advising them of the following: 

 

 (a) That FDIC has taken over their bank; 

 (b) That SBA has taken over servicing of their loan; 

 (c) That they must make their loan payments directly to Colson, as SBA's 

collection agent; and 

 (d) That they must refer all servicing and liquidation questions to the 

responsible SBA office, not FDIC. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Purpose

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 Colson is responsible for processing borrowers' loan payments for all loans, as 

soon as possible after FDIC takes over the bank. It is important for borrowers to 

know that SBA is monitoring their loan payments. Loan payments for some loans 

may be re-directed at a future date. At the outset, however, all loans are treated 

the same and borrowers must direct their payments to Colson. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Review all SBA guaranteed loan files.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Timing

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 (a) The SBA has promised FDIC that it will review all SBA guaranteed loan 

files within 30 days of receiving notification from FDIC of the takeover. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-3

 (b) You should coordinate with the FDIC contact person to establish a date 

for this review. 

 (c) The FDIC has agreed to make the loan files available for SBA's review, 

usually on site, at the original bank's offices. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Purpose.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 The purpose of the review is to determine whether SBA is liable under its 

guaranty, based on the original bank's loan processing, approval, closing, 

disbursement, and servicing of the loan. It is in SBA's sole discretion to 

determine what constitutes a deficiency which affects SBA's guaranty. However, 

SBA has agreed with FDIC that SBA will honor its guaranty unless: 

 (a) The SBA finds fraud, negligence, or misrepresentation on the part of the 

failed bank; or 

 (b) The SBA finds that an action taken by the failed bank substantially affects 

SBA's interests in the loan or in the underlying collateral. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Divide the loan files into two groups.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The first group is those files which SBA finds acceptable (i.e., SBA is liable 

under its guaranty). 

 

 The SBA should transfer this group of files to the appropriate SBA field office or 

servicing center within 30 days after the FDIC takeover. You must modify the 

SBA computer database records for each of these loans by adding "FDIC/" at the 

beginning of the lender name. The SBA will service these loans until pay-off or 

purchase of the loan by an approved SBA lender. 

 (2) The second group is those files which have deficiencies serious enough to affect 

SBA's guaranty. 

 

 You should identify the problems with these loans for FDIC. The FDIC has 90 

days to correct any deficiencies. The SBA must make a decision whether to take 

back servicing of these loans, within 90 days after the FDIC takeover. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA 

 ̊ ̊ ̊

servicing of guaranteed loans in the failed bank's portfolio.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) In many cases, with the takeover of the failed bank, FDIC will immediately 

transfer to another lender (with an executed SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-4 

Agreement") a large portion of the SBA guaranteed loan portfolio. Those loans 

will not need to be transferred to SBA servicing. But, if there is a delay in FDIC's 

transfer of loans to another participating lender, you must process those loans for 

transfer to SBA servicing. 

 (2) SBA and FDIC intend that SBA will take back servicing of virtually all of the 

failed bank's SBA loan portfolio, upon FDIC takeover. 

 (3) You may make a few exceptions to this basic approach, on a case-by-case basis, 

if: 

 (a) Litigation is already underway with respect to the loan; 

 (b) There is a high potential that SBA will deny liability for the loan; 

 (c) There are unresolvable conflicts of interest with other loans to the same 

borrower by either agency; and/or 

 

 (d) For some other significant reason, it is to the overall benefit of the 

Government for servicing to remain with FDIC. 

 (4) When FDIC retains servicing, you should monitor their progress as you would 

any lender-serviced loan. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Resolve with FDIC all loans with deficiencies affecting 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

SBA's guaranty.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) After the 90 day period allowed for FDIC to correct deficiencies has passed, you 

should work with FDIC to resolve those loans where FDIC is unable to cure or 

resolve the deficiencies. 

 (2) The FDIC can release SBA's guaranty. 

 (a) If SBA's guaranty is released, FDIC can transfer the loan to a third party 

without SBA's permission. 

 (b) The SBA must notify the borrower and Colson that SBA's guaranty is 

canceled. 

 (c) The FDIC or the transferee is responsible for notifying the borrower that 

the loan has been transferred and for providing the new address for loan 

payments. 

 (d) The FDIC may submit a claim to Colson for any payments made prior to 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-5

the transfer. 

 (3) SBA can process a denial of liability, if FDIC will not release SBA's guaranty. 

 (a) You must follow the guidelines and procedures in chapter 10 regarding 

denial of liability. 

 (b) If SBA has denied liability, FDIC is free to sell the loan to third parties 

without SBA's permission. 

 (4) The SBA can process a repair of its guaranty (an adjustment to the percentage of 

SBA's guaranty), if FDIC will not release SBA's guaranty. 

 (a) You must follow the guidelines and procedures in SOP 50 51, in the 

chapter titled "Denial of Liability -- Suit Against Participant," regarding 

repair of SBA's guaranty. 

 (b) The FDIC may sell a repaired loan only to an SBA participating lender. 

 (c) The SBA will take back servicing on such loans if FDIC does not sell 

them to an SBA participating lender. 

 (d) The SBA must notify Colson of the change to the guaranty percentage. 

 (5) For those loans sold on the secondary market where FDIC cannot cure 

deficiencies: 

 (a) The SBA will grant FDIC permission to purchase the loan at par from the 

secondary market; 

 (b) After purchase, FDIC must release SBA's guaranty; 

 (c) The FDIC can then sell the loan to any third party without SBA's consent; 

and 

 (d) The FDIC and Colson will decide on a case-by-case basis, which entity 

will process payments on such loans. 

 (6) The SBA must transfer to the appropriate field office or servicing center, all loans 

where FDIC has resolved the deficiencies. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-6 

4. SBA's Responsibilities after an FDIC Takeover. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA must service all loans wher

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

e it has taken back servicing.

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) You will make all decisions affecting the borrower, and will act in the best 

interests of the Government. 

 (2) The FDIC and any future owner of the unguaranteed portion of the loan will have 

no input in the servicing of the loan. 

 (3) You should consider all servicing expenses, for example, UCC refiling fees, as 

non-recoverable program expenses. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA m

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

ust work with FDIC to sell loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must coordinate with FDIC in the sale of the entire portfolio of SBA-guaranteed 

loans to ensure that FDIC sells the loans to another SBA participating lender. Also be 

aware that FDIC is required to give SBA notice, when FDIC sells the unguaranteed 

portion of any SBA-guaranteed loan, to any party. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA may purchase both unguaranteed and guaranteed portions of loan(s) in some 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

cases.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 There may be situations where it is appropriate for SBA to purchase the entire loan 

(both its guaranteed portion as well as the unguaranteed portion) from FDIC. The 

approving official may authorize the purchase of the entire SBA guaranty loan or the 

lender's share of an XGP loan from FDIC when such action is in the best interest of the 

SBA. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-7

5. FDIC's Responsibilities for SBA's Loan Portfolio After FDIC Takeover. 

 The following table describes the actions FDIC can take with respect to SBA-guaranteed loans: 

STATUS OF LOAN: ACTIONS FDIC CAN TAKE: WHAT SBA/FDIC MUST DO: 

FDIC releases SBA from its guaranty 

(loan was not sold on the secondary 

market) 

FDIC may sell the loan to any 

investor without SBA's permission 

FDIC released SBA from its guaranty 

(loan was sold on the secondary 

market) 

--FDIC first must purchase the loan 

from the secondary market, at par, 

then release SBA's guaranty 

--FDIC may then sell the loan to any 

investor without SBA's permission 

--SBA notifies Borrower and Colson 

that SBA's guaranty is canceled 

--FDIC notifies Borrower of new 

loan payment mailing address 

--FDIC may submit a claim to Colson 

to recover loan payments made 

during the transfer process. 

SBA denied liability for the loan FDIC may sell the loan to any 

investor without SBA's permission 

SBA repaired the guaranty on the 

loan 

FDIC may sell the loan ONLY to an 

SBA participating lender, with SBA's 

prior written permission 

SBA notifies Colson of any changes 

in the guaranty percentage 

FDIC sold the entire loan (both 

guaranteed and unguaranteed 

portions) 

FDIC may sell the loan ONLY to an 

SBA participating lender, with 

written notice to SBA 

SBA usually will transfer servicing 

and loan payment collection 

responsibilities to the new lender 

FDIC sold the unguaranteed portion 

of the loan 

FDIC may sell this portion of the 

loan to any investor without SBA's 

consent after SBA takes over 

servicing. FDIC must give SBA 

written notice. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

12-8 

6. Who Collects Loan Payments and Maintains Loan Data? 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Before SBA takes over servicing.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) The FDIC is responsible for collecting loan payments in the place of the failed 

bank until loan servicing is transferred to SBA. 

 (2) The FDIC is responsible for sending statements to borrowers about interest paid 

at year-end on the loan. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 After SBA takes over servicing of the loan(s) and notifies Colson.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Colson is responsible for collecting loan payments. 

 (2) Colson will maintain, at a minimum, a record of date of receipt and amount of 

each loan payment it receives. 

 (3) Colson also maintains records on loan balance and interest paid-to-date. The 

FDIC or SBA must provide sufficient information to Colson. The information 

Colson needs is: 

 (a) Loan balance prior to transfer of servicing to SBA; 

 (b) Interest paid-to-date date; and 

 (c) Borrower's taxpayer identification number. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-1

CHAPTER 13 

DISCLOSURE OF LOAN INFORMATION 

1. What is SBA's Policy Governing Disclosure of Information about Loans? 

 This chapter provides a very general overview as it relates to "Disclosure of Information" 

(Freedom of Information Act, (FOIA)); and Privacy Act Procedures. 

 If a request for information is pursuant to subpoena, litigation discovery, or otherwise related to 

litigation matters, you must consult with the SBA attorney handling the case. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General guidance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA has very specific policies and guidelines about disclosing information about our 

loans and loan programs to the public. 

 (1) You should review those policies before you disclose any information. 

 (2) You also must consult with the FOIA officer in your office or SBA counsel in any 

situation where you have a question about whether you should disclose 

information. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

and policies.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 (1) The SBA's regulations at 13 CFR Part 102; and 

 (2) The SBA's policies at SOP 40 03, "Disclosure of Information" (Freedom of 

Information Act); and SOP 40 04, "Privacy Act Procedures;" 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General policy.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 The SBA's policy generally is to disclose as much information as possible to the public, 

under the "openness in Government" policy in the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). 

However, there are laws that prohibit you from disclosing certain types of information. 

2. Types of Information that are Generally Available to any Requester Under the Freedom of 

Information Act (FOIA). 

 You may disclose some types of information about SBA's loan programs, or from a specific loan 

file, to any requestor. Examples of this information include the following. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-2 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Official SBA policies, decisions, and forms, including:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Regulations and standard operating procedures (SOP); 

 (2) Opinion Digest; 

 (3) Size decisions; 

 (4) SBA's annual reports; 

 (5) SBA Forms and publications; and 

 (6) Addresses and telephone numbers of SBA offices. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Some information about individual loans, including:

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Names of all SBA borrowers; 

 (2) Original amount of the loan; 

 (3) Type of loan (e.g., FA$TRAK, CAPLines, etc.); and 

 (4) Mailing address of a borrower. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Information that is a matter of public record, for example:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Recorded mortgages, deed of trusts, fixture filings, and financing statements 

(UCC-1); and 

 (2) Pleadings and documents already filed with a court. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Aggregate statistical information about SBA's loan portfolio, as long as you do 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

not 

 ̊ ̊ ̊

identify specific loan names, for example:

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Number of SBA loans made to a particular racial/ethnic group; 

 (2) Number of SBA loans made to women; 

 (3) Number of loans in default status; and 

 (4) Number of loans made in a particular city, county, or State. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-3

3. Types of Information that are "NOT" Available to any Requestor. 

 You must NOT disclose the following types of information, to any requestor. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA'

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

s internal records which show SBA's decision

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

making process, for example:

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Certain information contained in the 327 actions; 

 (2) SBA legal opinions and comments; 

 (3) Letters between SBA personnel and personnel from other Federal agencies unless 

approval is given by the other Federal agency; and 

 (4) Certain information contained in the SBA loan officer's reports. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Some information about individual loans, for example:

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Status of the loan; 

 (2) Racial/ethnic background of the borrower; 

 (3) Gender of the borrower; and 

 (4) Confidential business or financial information protected by exemption provided 

by FOIA or Trade Secrets Act, 18 U.S.C.  1905. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Information about a civil or criminal law enforcement investigation or prosecution, 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

for example:

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Information which formed the basis for a referral to the Inspector General (IG); 

 (2) Written reports made by an SBA employee to the IG; 

 (3) Any information prepared by an SBA employee in support of an IG investigation; 

and 

 (4) See the Chapter 14, "Referrals to the Office of the Inspector General," for 

additional information on OIG referrals. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-4 

What Must You Determine if You Receive a Request for Information Contained in a Loan 

File?

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Who is the requestor?

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Where either the borrower or SBA's lending partner (bank or CDC) for the loan is 

the requestor, go to Chapter 5, "Specific Loan Servicing Actions." 

 (a) You may give out any of the information discussed in "Specific Loan 

Servicing Actions." 

 (b) Federal and State agencies; 

 (c) Law enforcement personnel; and 

 (d) SCORE volunteers. 

 For these types of requests, you must consult with SBA counsel or the appropriate 

FOIA officer for assistance in responding to the request. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Does the request have to be in writing?

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) If the request is subject to FOIA: 

 (a) The request must be in writing; AND 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Information SBA has received from another Federal agency.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You should direct the requester to that other agency

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Information protected by FOIA or Trade Secrets Act, 18 U.S.C.  1905.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

4. 

 (b) If the requestor wants other information, use the guidelines in this chapter. 

 (2) Where an entity other than the borrower or lender/CDC, is the requestor, you 

should, generally, (if the request is NOT pursuant to subpoena or related to 

litigation) consider the request to be subject to FOIA. However, SBA handles 

requests from the following entities in special ways: 

 (a) Congress; 

 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-5

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Does the requestor have the borrower's written authorization to have access to the 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

borrower's loan file?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (c) Business credit reports. 

 (3) Business information is classified as a trade secret or as commercial or financial 

information which may be protected from disclosure under "Exemption 4" of 

FOIA or the Trade Secrets Act (18 USC  1905). 

 (4) Where the requestor wants personal information about a borrower, you must NOT 

disclose this information unless you have the borrower's written permission. 

 Examples of personal information are: 

 (b) The requestor must be reasonably specific in describing the records he/she 

wants. 

 

 (2) You should advise the requestor of these requirements, if the requestor asks for 

information over the telephone. 

 (1) The FOIA requires that SBA give advance "Predisclosure Notification" 

(Executive Order 12600) to a borrower before disclosing any business 

information contained in the loan file in response to a FOIA request. 

 (2) Where the requestor wants business information about a borrower, it is very 

helpful (but not required) if the requestor has the borrower's written permission. 

This will expedite processing of the FOIA request. 

 Examples of business information are: 

 (a) Business tax returns and financial statements; 

 (b) Loan applications; and 

 (a) Personal tax returns and financial statements; 

 (b) Home addresses; and 

 (c) SBA Form 912, "Statement of Personal History." 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-6 

 (5) If the requestor is the borrower's attorney or other agent, borrower must provide 

written authorization to SBA allowing a direct response. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is the loan file covered by the 

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

Privacy Act?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) What files are covered by the Privacy Act? 

 (a) Generally, files covered or cross referenced by the Privacy Act are files 

which are filed under an individual's name or social security number. 

 (b) From time to time SBA designates specific categories of its files as 

covered by the Privacy Act. Examples of files which SBA currently has 

designated as covered are: 

 i. Disaster home loan files; 

 ii. Official personnel files (OPFs); and 

 iii. Litigation Files. 

 (c) If you have any doubt about whether a certain file is covered, check with 

SBA counsel and SBA's Privacy Act System of Records. (Any records 

that the Government keeps which can be identified by name, social 

security number, or other identifier.) 

 (2) Penalties for disclosure of information in a file covered by the Privacy Act. 

 (a) Only disaster home loans are covered by the Privacy Act. They are subject 

to a misdemeanor criminal conviction and/or up to a $5,000 fine if an 

individual knowingly discloses information from that file without proper 

authorization. 

 (b) In order to avoid these potential penalties, you must be sure whether the 

loan file the requester wants is covered by the Privacy Act. Check the 

Privacy Act Systems of Records. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Is the loan "in litigation" status?

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-7

 If a loan is "in litigation" status, you must consult with the SBA attorney assigned to the 

case before you disclose any information about the loan to any party. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Should you consult with SBA counsel?

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

5. What Must You Do if You Receive a Subpoena for Your Testimony or for SBA Records? 

 a. Consult with SBA counsel before you accept delivery of any subpoena directed to you 

personally or to the Agency. 

 b. Advise SBA counsel immediately after you receive a subpoena. 

 (b) If you do not deliver the subpoena to counsel immediately, SBA might 

miss a court deadline. You could harm SBA's interests in some court 

proceedings. 

 (2) SBA policy requires SBA counsel to review every subpoena where SBA is not a 

named party in the lawsuit. (See 13 CFR  102.12.) In all cases, SBA counsel 

must determine if SBA will comply, or may refuse to comply, with the subpoena. 

 

 If you have any doubt about whether it is permissible for you to disclose any information 

to any party you must consult with SBA counsel. 

 (1) If you receive any subpoena that asks for records or for your testimony, you must 

advise SBA counsel immediately. 

 (a) In some situations, the time period for court filing deadlines starts from 

the date you received the subpoena. 

 c. You must cooperate in complying with a subpoena in accordance with counsel's 

advice.

 Your cooperation may include: 

 (1) Assisting counsel in gathering SBA records to respond to the subpoena; and 

 (2) Testifying in a State or Federal court proceeding. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

13-8 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

14-1

CHAPTER 14

REFERRALS TO THE OFFICE OF THE INSPECTOR GENERAL 

Referrals to the Inspector General (IG)

 a. Except when otherwise instructed in writing

1. . 

 by the Department of Justice (DOJ), or other 

Federal law enforcement agency) during a pending criminal investigation, SBA 

employees must immediately report to the Office of Inspector General (OIG) any known 

or suspected misconduct or irregularities involving SBA programs, program participants, 

or personnel; 

 b. The purpose of the OIG referral process is to protect and maintain the integrity of SBA's 

programs; 

What Matters Must You Refer to the IG?

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Improper conduct by SBA employees.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Solicitation or acceptance of a bribe or gift; 

 (2) Violations of any local, State, or Federal law in connection with SBA's activities; 

or 

 (3) Violations of any rule or regulation which provides for protecting or maintaining 

the integrity of SBA's programs and operations. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Irregularities committed by any non

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

SBA party in connection with an SBA 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

program.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 You must immediately advise the IG of actual or suspected irregularities committed by 

 c. Under the IG statute, employees have the right and authority to report matters directly to 

the OIG, without prior supervisory approval; and 

 d. You may discuss the matter with your supervisor and/or SBA counsel prior to or as part 

of your referral. Often, this will be a good idea, especially when the suspected 

impropriety involves an outside party and may affect more than one program or loan. 

However, you are not required to do so. 

2. 

 You must immediately advise the IG of actual or suspected improper conduct by an SBA 

employee, for example: 

 

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

14-2 

persons other than SBA employees, for example: 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Requests for the IG to conduct audits.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

How do you make an IG Referral?

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Telephone report.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) Misrepresentations, fraud, and false statements committed by an applicant, 

borrower, guarantor, or participating lender, or by any of their agents, attorneys, 

or representatives; 

 (2) Irregularities involving the collateral for SBA transactions, or the proceeds from 

the collateral (Refer to paragraph 14-7, titled, "What Are Areas That Commonly 

Generate IG Referrals?" for additional information/exceptions on this subject); 

 (3) Misuse of loan funds or any other funds in which SBA has an interest; and 

 (4) Any conduct which is the subject of an investigation by another Federal, State, or 

local agency, for example, the Federal Bureau of Investigations (FBI) or the local 

police department. 

 You may refer to the IG for audit, any suspected violations committed by participating 

lenders or other parties participating in SBA's programs, for example: 

 (1) Violations of SBA's regulatory requirements regarding loan servicing; or 

 (2) Violations by an SBA office or program division of SBA's regulations regarding 

loan servicing. 

3. 

 (1) The IG prefers that SBA employees report improprieties first by telephone. 

 (2) You must report the suspected impropriety by telephone to the special agent in 

charge (SAC) of investigations with responsibility for your geographical area; or, 

to the Inspector General Hotline. (See your SBA Telephone Book.) 

 (3) The IG representative will listen to your description of the facts of the situation, 

and will advise you as soon as possible whether the IG will pursue an 

investigation. The IG may need to make preliminary inquiries or records search 

in order to make this decision. 

 (4) If the IG decides to pursue an investigation or needs further information, the IG 

may ask you to prepare a written referral. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

14-3

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Written referral.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If the IG requests that you submit a formal referral, you must prepare a written referral 

for submission to the SAC or regional IG for investigations with responsibility for your 

geographic area. 

What is the Format and Content of a Written IG Referral?

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Written referral forma

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

t.

 ̊ ̊

 Your written referral should consist of the following elements when applicable: 

 (3) The social security number, tax identification number, and date of birth (or 

approximate age) of the borrower or subject of the report, if known. 

 (4) The loan, grant, contract, or transaction number if any. 

 (5) A brief statement of the factual

4. 

 (1) A brief heading to identify the matter you are reporting, for example, 

misrepresentation, missing collateral, or possible conversion of collateral. 

 (2) The complete name and address of the borrower or subject of the report. 

 basis for the report. 

 (6) A brief statement of the nature of the suspected irregularity, including the 

approximate date the incident occurred. 

 (7) A brief statement of significant actions taken to date and the current status. 

 (8) The estimated dollar value involved, if known, and the basis for the estimate. 

 (9) If the irregularity concerns a loan application, indicate whether the loan was 

approved or declined, and the date of this action. 

 (10) If the irregularity or misconduct concerns an approved loan: 

 (a) The name, address, and tax identification number of the borrower and 

guarantor(s); 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

14-4 

 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Supervisory review.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) The loan number; 

 (c) The amount and date of the loan approved and dates of disbursements; if 

any; 

 (d) The balance due; 

 (e) If the loan is delinquent, for how long; 

 (f) The participating lender's name, address, and percentage of participation; 

and 

 (g) Attach a copy of the loan officer's report. 

 (11) If the borrower is not directly involved in the suspected irregularity, state the 

subject's personal or business relationship with the borrower, participating lender, 

contractor, or surety. 

 (12) A brief statement as to whether the matters reported adversely affect SBA, any of 

SBA's employees, the loan applicant, the borrower, the participant, the contractor, 

or other claimant. 

 (13) If the irregularity or misconduct concerns collateral: 

 (a) Last known location of the collateral; 

 (b) Best available description of the collateral, including identification/serial 

numbers; 

 (c) Estimated value of the collateral at date of loan application, and at date of 

sale or other disposition (cite these dates specifically); 

 (d) Any known details about the disposition of the property and/or the 

proceeds from the property; 

 (e) Any explanation given by the borrower or other parties involved in the 

disposition of the property; and 

 (f) Any actions taken by SBA personnel to locate and recover the property 

and the results of these actions. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

14-5

 You are NOT required to obtain supervisory review and clearance of the written referral 

(especially in a situation involving suspected misconduct by another SBA employee). 

You may obtain supervisory review and counsel comments, if you choose. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Supplemental reports.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

What Happens After You Refer a Matter to the IG?

 If you discover new or additional information about a matter which you already have 

referred to the IG, you must prepare a supplemental report about this information. Send 

this report to the IG representative identified as handling the matter already referred. 

5. 

 a. IG investigation.

 The IG may choose to conduct an investigation into the particular matter you referred. 

The IG may also investigate the effect that the matter referred may have on a wider scale, 

for example, in other SBA offices, in other SBA loans made by the same participating 

lender, etc. The purpose of the investigation is to discover any violations of regulations 

or laws. If the IG discovers any such violations, the IG may refer the matter to the U.S. 

Attorney's Office for criminal or civil prosecution, or may use the information to help 

SBA maximize recovery on a loan. 

 b. IG audit.

 (1) The IG may choose to conduct an audit of, for example, a participating lender, an 

SBA office or division, or an SBA program. In this context, the IG will be 

looking for regulatory and policy violations or problems. 

 (2) The IG uses audit information to suggest to the appropriate SBA program 

management officials how to improve administration of the program, or to decide 

whether the situation warrants an IG investigation. 

 c. IG referral to the U.S. Attorney's Office, Criminal Division.

 The Criminal Division of the U.S. Attorney's Office is responsible for enforcing Federal 

criminal laws, through criminal law enforcement prosecutions. Parties prosecuted under 

criminal laws would be subject to incarceration and/or monetary fines. Criminal 

prosecutions can occur simultaneously with civil enforcement proceedings. 

 d. IG Referral to the U.S. Attorney's Office, Civil Division, as Affirmative Civil 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

14-6 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Protect SBA's interests and maximize recovery on the loan.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 Consult with the IG representative before you advise "ANY" non-SBA 

party of the existence/referral

Enforcement (ACE) Division.

 (1) The Civil Division of the U.S. Attorney's Office is responsible for enforcing 

Federal statutes and regulations through civil law enforcement proceedings. 

 (2) The Government can obtain monetary damages through such proceedings. This 

sometimes includes treble damages (the amount of the loss to the Government is 

tripled). 

 (3) Civil enforcement proceedings can occur simultaneously with criminal 

prosecutions. 

6. What are Your Ongoing Responsibilities After You Have Referred a Matter to the IG? 

 (1) After you have made a referral to the IG on a particular loan, you remain 

responsible for taking appropriate and timely action on that loan. You still must 

protect SBA's interests and maximize recovery on the loan. 

 (2) However, some actions you want to take on the loan or regarding a participating 

lender may interfere with an IG investigation in progress, or prejudice a criminal 

proceeding. 

 In order to avoid any harm to SBA's interests in these matters, you must do the 

following. 

 (a) Consult with your IG representative before taking any action on the loan, 

for example, before conducting a bank review on a participating lender or 

before deferring loan payments on a loan. 

 of an IG investigation into a particular 

matter. Giving this information to the subject of an investigation could 

interfere with or jeopardize the investigation. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Coordinate with SBA counsel where U.S. Attorney's Office is involved.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (b) Maintain close contact with the IG representative so that you will be 

aware of the status of the investigation or litigation proceeding. You can 

use this information to make informed decisions about the actions you 

should take on the loan or loan program. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

14-7

What are Areas That Commonly Generate IG Referrals?

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Missing or converted collateral.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Missing borrowers or guarantors ("skips").

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (1) When SBA has previously referred a loan to the U.S. Attorney's Office, for debt 

collection or otherwise the following must occur. 

 (a) You must submit your written referral to SBA counsel, instead of directly 

to the IG representative. 

 (b) The SBA counsel is responsible for sending the report to the U.S. 

Attorney's Office, and sending a copy of the report to the IG 

representative. 

 (c) These procedures also apply to any supplemental reports you prepare. 

 (2) When you become aware of a referral of a matter to the U.S. Attorney's Office for 

criminal or civil law enforcement, you must do the following. 

 (a) Advise local SBA counsel. Counsel will act as liaison with the U.S. 

Attorney's Office, and will monitor the litigation proceeding on the loan. 

You should give local counsel copies of all reports you already have given 

to the IG. 

 (b) Give local SBA counsel a copy of any supplemental reports you give to 

the IG representative on the matter. 

7. 

 (1) The Small Business Act prohibits converting, disposing of, concealing, or 

removing collateral securing an SBA loan. The U. S. Attorney's Office can 

prosecute any violation of this law. The penalty is up to a $5,000 fine and up to a 

5 year jail term for the violator. 

 (2) You must refer to the IG, any missing or converted collateral valued at more than 

$5,000. You may refer missing or converted collateral valued at $5,000 or less if 

you have any facts indicating that the collateral was stolen, converted, vandalized, 

or otherwise wrongfully disposed of. You should make a referral even where you 

think that the circumstances do not show that any party had the motive to convert 

the collateral. The IG has the final authority to determine whether the 

circumstances warrant an investigation. 

 You may refer to the IG, any situation involving missing obligors or guarantors, after 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

14-8 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Felony arrests and convict

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ions of a borrower or guarantor.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

local efforts to locate the individual have failed. The IG can run various information 

searches to assist you in locating the person. An example of this situation is where the 

borrower or guarantor is missing, and the loan funds are missing. 

 You must refer to the IG, any situation in which you discover that a party to the loan 

transaction has been arrested or convicted for a felony. The IG can obtain a criminal 

records check. 

 (1) If the criminal records check reveals a past criminal history for the borrower, and 

the borrower did not report this information on his or her loan application forms, 

this omission may constitute a misrepresentation to the Government and 

fraudulent inducement of SBA to approve the loan. 

 (2) The IG also might discover criminal activity which is under the purview of other 

agencies, for example, the Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS), the 

Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA), or the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). The 

IG may refer such matters to other Federal agencies, where appropriate. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

15-1

CHAPTER 15

LOAN COLLECTION MONITORING & REPORTS 

General Guidelines for Loan Collections

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

1. . 

 You are responsible for the collection of SBA-serviced loans. You must inform 

borrowers that they must submit their loan payments to OFO, Denver. You should 

encourage borrowers to agree to have their payments automatically debited from their 

bank accounts through Pre-Authorized Debits (PAD). The OFO will advise you if the 

borrower's payment by check is rejected in which case you must contact the borrower for 

replacement payment. (The instructions for PADs are located in the SBA-DCS User 

Manual which is located on the SBA's Intranet.) 

 The borrower will make payments directly to the lender. The lender is responsible for 

monitoring loan collections and reporting the loan status to SBA as described later in this 

chapter. 

 For loans sold on the secondary market, the lender must submit the guaranty portion of 

the borrower's payment less servicing fees to the FTA, who will distribute payments to 

the investors. The lender must follow the instructions in the SBA Form 1086, 

"Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement." 

 For development company loans, borrowers make their payments to the CSA. The CDC 

must request that the borrower agree to have their payments debited from their bank 

accounts through PAD (form provided by the CSA). For the exception to this procedure, 

refer to SOP 50 10, "Business Loan Program, Loan Processing." 

2. Computer Databases for Loan Collection Status. 

 To assist you in the monitoring of borrower loan approval, disbursement, payment activity and 

status, SBA maintains two databases accessible from your computer terminal. The principal loan 

database is available through the portfolio management query display (PMQD) screens. The 

index of these screens is displayed by entering "PMQD00." The second database is for lenderserviced loans and is identified as the SBA guaranty loan reporting menu screen. The menu of 

available screens is displayed by entering "PMGI01," Portfolio Management Guaranty Input 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

15-2 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (3) "PMGI13" displays the next payment due date, amount applied to principal and 

interest from the last reported payment and other loan information that may be 

helpful in collecting loan payments. 

 (4) For lender-serviced XGP loans, you may also refer to the "PMQD04" screen for 

loan status. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The CSA provides to all CDCs and SBA offices an on-line computer screen that lists by 

date received, each 503/504 borrower's last eight loan payments. For instructions and 

assignment of code to access this information, contact the CSA. 

3. Reporting of Delinquent Loans. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

(PMGI). 

 The following is a description of the loan collection status screens most commonly used in loan 

servicing. 

 You can retrieve the current loan payment status for an SBA-serviced loan from your 

computer terminal through the PMQD screens. 

 (1) "PMQD09" displays the date of last payment, amount of principal and interest to 

be paid, next payment due date, and other loan information that may be helpful in 

collecting loan payments. 

 (2) "PMQD11" displays the history of loan payments made and the application of the 

payments to principal and interest. 

 (1) The lender submits loan payment status monthly to the FTA as described later in 

this chapter. The FTA will report the loan status to SBA. 

 (2) "PMGI11" displays a detailed history of loan payments made and the application 

of the payments to principal and interest. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

15-3

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Collector reports

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Each Monday morning, a designated individual in your office should print out the 

following reports from the "Reports Menu" covering all delinquent loans. 

.

 ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Supervisor reports

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 These reports list each loan in descending order of delinquency and provide the 

number of days since the last collection call was made to the borrower: 

 (a) LCAW40XX* Lender-serviced XGP loans. 

 (b) LCAW50XX* SBA-serviced business loans. 

 (c) LCAW60XX* Disaster farm loans. 

 (d) LCAW70XX* Disaster home loans. 

 (e) LCAW55XX* All SBA-serviced loans at both the district and the 

servicing center 

. 

 ̊

 (b) LCAW51XX* SBA-serviced business loans, 

 (c) LCAW61XX* Disaster farm loans. 

 (d) LCAW71XX* Delinquent disaster home loans 

 (e) LCAW31XX DLCS weekly que statistics 

 (f) PMCW05XX* AMS weekly statistic report. 

 XX* = To be replaced by the last two digits of the Office Code number. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans (current and delinquent).

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 These reports provide the supervisor with summary information regarding the 

status of his or her office's portfolio and the level of collection activity by the 

office's collectors: 

 (a) LCAW41XX* Lender-serviced XGP loans 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

15-4 

 (1) Each month, lenders must report to the FTA using SBA Form 1502, "Guaranty 

Loan Status & Lender Remittance Form," on the status of all their SBA 

guaranteed loans, showing loan collections and other information specified in 

reporting instructions for this program. Loans are not reported on SBA Form 1502 

after guaranty loan purchase. The SBA Form 1502 has replaced SBA Form 

1175," Quarterly Report." 

 (2) The FTA will review the reports for completeness and submit an electronic report 

to SBA Headquarters with all data received. Those reports will be reflected in 

their entirety in the PMGI screens described earlier. 

 (3) The FTA will correct some errors. The field office and servicing center will 

correct those that the FTA can not resolve. 

 (4) With exception of the PMGI11 screen, all reports will be available as they are 

updated by the FTA. They will be available until a monthly cutoff date at which 

time the screen will be cleared pending the next month's report from the lender 

through the FTA. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 CSA status of port

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

folio reports.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

 CDC reports on servicing follow

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

up.

 ̊ ̊ ̊

Basic Steps in the Loan Collection Procedure

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

.

 ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Assigning past due accounts for follow

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

-

 ̊

up.

 ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 Each month the CSA mails the Status of Portfolio Reports to CDCs, SBA field 

offices and servicing centers. The report lists all CDC loans in your office and 

identifies loans which are past due, deferred or under a deferment catch-up plan. 

 Each CDC must submit to the appropriate field office(s) and the appropriate 

servicing center a report at least quarterly summarizing their contact with and 

status of problem resolution for delinquent borrowers. This is described in 

Chapter 6, "Special Loan Programs" in paragraph 12, "Certified Development 

Company (504) - Servicing." 

4. . 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

15-5

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

The delinquent loan collection system (DLCS).

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 (a) Collectors can be designated to be in specific groups and delinquent 

accounts can be assigned according to the group code. Under this system, 

you would be responsible for collecting all loans in a particular group 

code. 

 (b) Delinquent loans can also be assigned to a collector by "Days 

Delinquent". Examples are "10 to 30," "31 to 60," "61 to 90," and "90 and 

over." Under this system, more experienced collectors work the more 

seriously delinquent loans. 

 (

 (a) The DLSC is an on-line system that provides access to loan collection 

information contained in SBA's central mainframe. The loan servicing 

supervisor may automatically set priorities, group, and distribute the 

office's portfolio of delinquent accounts. 

 (b) Using the DLCS screen, you may bring up delinquent loans by loan 

number or use a function key to bring up "next in Queue." It is more 

efficient to use the "next in Queue," because the most seriously delinquent 

loans are brought up first. 

 (c) There are auxiliary displays to help you. These screens provide 

information relating to prior collection methods, payment history and 

loans worked/not worked during the collection cycle. 

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Calling the borrower.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (d) Complete instructions on operating the DLCS is available on the SBA 

Intranet. If you need assistance accessing or downloading portions of the 

manual contact your information resource manager (IRM) for assistance. 

 (

 (a) You are responsible for the collection of delinquent loans. You will be the 

first point of contact with a borrower and it will be up to you to determine 

why the borrower is not making the required payment. Do not be afraid to 

ask questions. The problem may be temporary or it could be a problem 

necessitating a loan modification (e.g., deferment, temporary payment 

reduction, due date change, or modification of the repayment schedule.) 

For such modifications, refer to Chapter 5, "Specific Loan Servicing 

Actions." 

 (b) When calling a delinquent borrower, remain polite and courteous at all 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

15-6 

times. Do NOT be afraid to ask questions (e.g., "According to our 

records your loan is past due... When will you be able to send the past due 

payment(s)?;" or "Are there some particular problems that are preventing 

your from making your monthly payments?;" "Is there some way that 

SBA might help you?") 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

 Sending 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

automated collection letters to borrowers.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Once you have logged into the DLCS for a specific loan account, enter the 

"Action/Update Screen" by pressing the "F-2 key." Once in the menu, tab down 

to "ACTION CD" and enter "AR." Then tab to the automated message 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Lender

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 CDC

 ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

serviced loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 system (AMS), "AMS MENU?(Y/N)" and enter "Y." This will enter you into the 

AMS letter directory. Each letter is identified by a number code (010, 020, 030, 

etc). Select the appropriate letter by its number code. The letter will appear on 

the screen. Enter the required information and then tab to the "XMIT section." 

Transmit. You then will be returned to the main screen. Under "Collection 

Comments" the letter code will appear (010, 020, 030, etc.) 

 (1) For lender-serviced XGP loans, identify the lenders to be called from the weekly 

LCAW40XX report. Watch for lapse in actual activity between updated lender 

reports. Corrections must be sent to the Denver, OFO Action Desk. 

 (2) For regular 7(a) lender-serviced loans, identify the lenders to be called from the 

monthly report received from the FTA available through PMGI01. 

 (3) For loans that are 60 or more days past due, contact the lender to determine 

whether the lender: 

 (a) Is adequately servicing the account; 

 (b) Needs assistance from the SBA; or 

 (c) Needs to request that SBA purchase the guaranty and transfer servicing to 

SBA. 

 (1) Identify the CDCs to be contacted from the loans reported as past due on the CSA 

"Status of Portfolio Report" and the CSA's "Late Payment Report." 

 (2) For loans that are 45 or more days past due, contact the CDC to determine 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

15-7

Recording a call in the DLCS

whether the CDC: 

 (a) Is adequately servicing the account; 

 (b) Needs assistance from the SBA; or 

 (c) Needs to request that SBA purchase the debenture and transfer servicing 

to SBA. 

 (See Chapter 11, "Prepayment or Purchase of a Development Company Loan or 

Debenture" for additional information.) 

5. . 

 a. Recording, in the DLCS all calls and other contact with borrowers, lenders, and CDCs, is 

critical to effective loan servicing. This is especially critical because files are transferred 

between field offices and servicing centers. 

 b. Before you make any calls on delinquent loans, log into the DLCS. To make a record of 

your conversation with a borrower, lender or CDC, press "F-2 key" and this will bring 

you to the ACTION/UPDATE screen. Tab the "Action CD" (code). Enter "Action 

Code." Tab to "Result CD" (code). Enter correct "Result Code." Tab to "Comment." 

Enter brief record of conversation, (e.g., "Called bwr prom to mail 1 pmt on 4/21 and will 

mail April pmt on 5/5." When information is complete, transmit. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

15-8 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-1

SERVICING PROCEDURES 

Introduction

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Authority.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Regulations and related SOPs.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Since no loans are currently being made under that program, there are no CFR  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

provisi

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ons. ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 History. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Structure. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

CHAPTER 16 

 POLLUTION CONTROL FINANCING GUARANTEES

1. . 

 Authority to provide pollution control financing guarantees (PCFG) to small business 

concerns was originally codified at Section 404 of the Small Business Investment Act. In 

1988, funding for this program was eliminated and a new statutorily-recognized program 

was established pursuant to 7(a)(12) of the Small Business Act. This chapter covers only 

servicing of pollution control financing made under the Small Business Investment Act. 

The new 7(a)(12) pollution control loans should be serviced according to general 

provisions of this SOP. 

 Between 1978 and 1987, 263 pollution control bonds were guaranteed by SBA, most 

between 1979-1983. Most of the businesses benefitting from this program are located in 

the Great Lakes Area (Region V) or in California (Region IX). Principal guaranteed was 

up to $5 million (average of $1.2 million), with maturity up to 25 years (average of 20 

years). Common businesses that received pollution control guarantees were metal 

platers, waste haulers, waste storage firms, cheese manufacturing, and dry cleaners. 

Collateral was not required early in the program, but collateral requirements were 

stringent in the later issues. Pollution control equipment held as collateral is often 

outdated and of little value now, and property held as collateral may be polluted. 

 Under this program, bonds were issued by a State development authority, a municipality, 

or a company (debenture). Bonds are handled by various trustees (banks) for a fee paid 

by the borrower. The SBA has guaranteed 100 percent of the base loan payments 

(principal and interest) that the borrower has agreed to pay the trustee monthly under the 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-2 

 documents, and SBA's rights and responsibilities are not clearly defined, and vary in each 

issue (loan). 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Servicing. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Headquarters. 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must provide annual reports to Headquarters on all cases. This is the only reporting 

system for this manual portfolio. Headquarters maintains the most recent reports as a 

portfolio database and contact list. Headquarters has a skeleton file on all active cases. 

Compromises are usually handled at the Headquarters level because of the high dollar 

amount. Headquarters should also follow up on the defaulted cases as well as for those 

borrowers on repayment plans. Headquarters also handles the SBA guarantee. This 

includes all guarantee purchases (acceleration and redemption). Payments are made 

through OFO, Denver, directly to the Trustee. Headquarters also handles any refunding 

or re-issue of bonds. This may be done to lower interest rates for the borrower. Any 

problems or concerns on the guarantee, or the trustee are to be referred by the field 

offices to Headquarters. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Accounting. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

qualified contract (loan agreement). From these loan 

 payments, the trustee then makes bond payments to various bond holders. The bond 

 Servicing is now done by the district offices. Often the trustee handles direct contact 

with the borrower. However, all normal servicing requests (assumption, collateral 

release, etc.) are referred by the Trustee to the district office. All problems with servicing 

and liquidation are handled by the district office. The trustee may complete tasks at the 

request of SBA, but most trustees will require additional compensation for these 

activities. (SBA's guarantee does not include trustee fees. However, in order to 

accomplish efficient servicing the Trustee's services are usually required, so a fee is 

generally negotiated.) The district office keeps a complete case file and has a collateral 

file, but often trustees hold some collateral in their name. The district office may seek 

guidance on servicing actions from the Office of Borrower and Lender Servicing (BLS). 

 The Office of the Chief Financial Officer, Accounting and Auditor Support Group, must 

review the portfolio on a yearly basis. The Chief Financial Officer, Financial Reporting 

& Analysis Group, provides a yearly status report on the funds in the separate pollution 

control revolving fund (73x4147). All payments made or received need to be marked as 

belonging to the 73X4147 revolving fund so that they are properly applied by OFO, 

Denver. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-3

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Definitions.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Issuer.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Truste

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

e.

 ̊ ̊

 Usually an issuing (State) authority who actually issued (sold) the industrial 

revenue bonds on the market to lend money to loan to a company (borrower). 

 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Bondholders.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A bondholder's trustee was assigned the bonds from the issuer, and loaned the 

money to the obligor (borrowing company). The obligor pays the trustee monthly 

loan payments. The trustee holds the loan payments and pays the bondholders the 

semi-annual bond payments. 

 

 (

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Obligor.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Purchased the bonds issued by the authority. Receive semi-annual payments on 

these bonds from the trustee. 

 

 The borrower or debtor (small busine

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ss company).

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 ̊

5

 ̊

)

 ̊

Obligee.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 The issuer (usually a State development authority).

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 ̊

6

 ̊

)

 ̊

Base loan payments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 (

 Monthly loan payments that the borrower must pay the trustee. The SBA's 

guarantee is for 100 percent of the principal and interest of these monthly 

payments. 

 (

 ̊

7

 ̊

)

 ̊

Qualified contract.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 Often a loan agreement assigned by the issuer to the trustee, for the repayment of 

the loan by the obligor, or small business borrower. Collateral is held to secure 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-4 

 (

 ̊

8

 ̊

)

 ̊

Indenture.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

the qualified contract. 

 

 (

 ̊

9

 ̊

)

 ̊

Bond documents.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The authorizing, or binding document for the bond issue, assigning the qualified 

contract to the trustee. 

 

 (

 ̊

10

 ̊ ̊

)

 ̊

Redemption.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Numerous documents, including the indenture and qualified contract, held 

together in a 'bible'. The trustee and issuer should keep a copy of the bond 

documents. (The SBA does not usually have a complete copy of the bond 

documents.) 

 

 Bonds are redeemed when they are prematurely bought out. This can be done 

voluntarily by the borrower or it can be done by the SBA in order to accelerate 

the note, or loan agreement - in effect purchase our guarantee. 

 (

 ̊

11

 ̊ ̊

)

 ̊

Defeasance.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 Where the borrower prepays the base loan payments, but due to bond document 

restrictions, or other reasons, is not able to or elects not to pay off the bonds until 

sometime in the future. The trustee holds these funds until such time. 

 (

 ̊

12

 ̊ ̊

)

 ̊

 Pollution Control Finance Guarantee (PCFG).

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 

 The SBA's 100 percent guarantee in this program, often used to refer to the 

program, itself. 

 (

 ̊

13

 ̊ ̊

)

 ̊

 73X4147. 

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The PCFG program rev  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊olving fund maintained by SBA's Chief Financial Officer.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

2. Summary Review of the PCFG Program. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 General. 

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The statutory purpose of the PCFG Program was to provide pollution control funds at 

feasible cost to financially disadvantaged small businesses by having SBA 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-5

unconditionally guarantee the periodic payments by the small business as they came due 

on the bonds. The cost of funds to the small business is generally moderated because the 

source of financing is typically revenue bonds and in most cases the interest received by 

the bondholders is exempt from Federal income taxes. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Financing structure. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The industrial revenue bonds are issued by a city, country, State, or similar entity. The 

issuer used the funds from the bonds to purchase the pollution control facilities and then 

leases them to the small business; or it lends the funds to the small business for the 

purpose of acquiring the pollution control facilities. The bonds are sold to investors. The 

loan (or lease) and the payments thereon are assigned to a trustee, or "Bondholder's 

Trustee" as the source of repayment of the bonds. Example. A county development 

authority (Obligee) issues $2 million in industrial revenue bonds at 8 percent tax free 

interest redeemable over a period of 15 years. The development authority lends the $2 

million to an eligible small business to install pollution control equipment in its factory. 

The small business signs a 15 year note calling for regular amortization payments 

(usually monthly) which are unconditionally guaranteed by SBA. The small business 

also executes UCC and mortgage documents to secure the note and the SBA guaranty. If 

the security is for the note, there must usually be an agreement permitting SBA to 

liquidate the security upon borrower default and payment by SBA under the guaranty. 

After the closing, the trustee under the bond indenture holds the note and collateral 

instruments, collects the monthly payments from the small business, and makes the 

payments required under the bond indenture (normally semiannual payments of interest 

and annual payments of principal). The development authority (Issuer) is merely the 

vehicle for the transaction, it assumes no risk or no obligations. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 SBA's role. 

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The SBA guarantees prompt periodic payment of the base loan payments of the 

"Qualified Contract" between the issuer of the bond and the small business (not a lump 

sum guarantee of the outstanding balance). This "Qualified Contract" may be a lease, 

sublease, installment purchase agreement, note, loan agreement, or similar instrument. 

The qualified contract is assigned, under the indenture, to the trustee to support the bond 

payments. The SBA requires the small business and often the principals of the small 

business to indemnify SBA for any payments made by SBA in connection with the 

guaranty. The typical indemnification agreement requires the indemnitor to reimburse 

SBA for payments actually made by SBA to the bondholder's trustee. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-6 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Defa

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

ult. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A default by the small business in making payments under the qualified contract is also a 

default under the bond indenture. The trustee must utilize funds in an escrow and reserve 

account to meet required payments to the bond holders before calling on SBA for 

payment. The trustee must make a claim on SBA for each subsequent payment to bond 

holders. The handing of such claims and payments is the responsibility of Headquarters. 

 Note that Headquarters often makes arrangements 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Responsibilities. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Coordination of Servicing Activity

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Headquarters.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 with the trustee to pay on our guarantee semi-annually in order for the trustee to meet the 

bond payments; or Headquarters, with field office concurrence, may decide to accelerate 

and redeem the bonds. 

 (1) Reserve account. 

 The reserve account held by the trustee is set up at loan origination and usually 

consists of three monthly payments, plus accumulated interest. It is interest 

bearing and may be augmented during the life of the loan by any funds received 

by the trustee in excess of the payments due. 

 (2) Escrow account. 

 The escrow account is where the trustee keeps the monthly loan payments from 

the obligor. The escrow account is drawn upon to meet the semi-annual bond 

payments. 

 The trustee is responsible for coordination between the parties (receipt and disbursement 

of funds). See bond documents for specifics of each case. The field office is responsible 

for the servicing and liquidation of pollution control loans. Headquarters is responsible 

for program overview and direction, handling of claims and payments on defaulted 

accounts and refunding or re-issuing any bonds. 

3. . 

 Headquarters retains authority and responsibility for handling claims from trustees under 

the guaranty and for determining, with field office concurrence, when defaulted issues 

are to be redeemed (purchase of the SBA guarantee). Headquarters is also responsible 

for any re-issuing or refunding of the bonds by obligors that are current on their loan 

payments. Such refunding or re-issue is done solely for interest relief, and not to defer 

payments for troubled borrowers. Headquarters must also coordinate all program 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-7

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Field office.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Headquarters clearance before any funds can be advanced for servicing expenses. Also, 

since Headquarters handles the payment of any claims on the guarantee, any monetary 

default by a borrower must be immediately reported to Headquarters by the field office. 

Because of the special nature of the PCFG program and the retention of centralized 

handling of claims under the guaranty, the following requirements must be met. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Specialized assignment.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

monitoring and review. Headquarters is also available to handle any questions or 

problems the field has concerning the servicing of these issues, since each case is often 

unique. 

 Field offices should routinely perform the normal servicing tasks involved in the 

administration of pollution control financing guarantees. The scope of this delegation as 

it applies to PCFGs, is, however, restricted by this SOP in that it requires 

 Pollution control accounts are typically large and have special characteristics 

which add to their complexity. Accordingly, all such accounts should be assigned 

to a senior loan officer designated to service all PCFG cases within the assigned 

territory. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Coordination.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Headquarters and the field offices must keep each other informed of 

developments concerning the various accounts. Field offices must send copies of 

servicing actions under this SOP, (e.g., major actions, field visit reports, SBA 327 

actions, etc.) to the Office of Borrower & Lender Servicing. Where there is a 

question as to the effect of a servicing action on the position of SBA, the field 

office must consult with Headquarters before the action is taken. Within 30 days 

of the end of a fiscal year, you must complete and send to Headquarters a "Yearly 

Pollution Control Report" on each account. Interim indications of serious default 

under the qualified contract should be communicated promptly to Headquarters 

whenever noted. 

4. Bondholder's Trustee. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Trustee. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A trustee (usually a bank) whose major duty is to receive the scheduled (monthly) loan 

payments from the borrower and to distribute scheduled (semi-annual) bond payments to 

the bondholders, is named in each bond issue. Borrower payments are usually calculated 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-8 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Additional duties of the trustee.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Changes by the trustee.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Responses to trustees. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

to cover the amounts due to the bondholders, pay the fees of the trustee, and possibly, 

allow incremental increases in the reserve account. 

 The trustee holds the qualified contract and all related documentation. Under the trust 

indenture, the trustee assumes the responsibility to take action on behalf of the 

bondholders in the event of default by the business. This action can be taken only with 

the written consent of SBA. The indenture does not require the trustee to monitor the 

qualified contract nor to do any normal servicing; therefore, the field 

 office should maintain a closer follow-up schedule than is the case with loans being 

serviced by regular participating lenders. However, the trustee should be able to monitor 

the account and advise the loan office of adverse activity. Therefore, it is important that 

the loan officer maintain contact with the trustee. 

 The qualified contract and the indenture require the prior written consent of SBA for 

actions affecting the interest of SBA. The SBA's consent for the following actions may 

be given only with the concurrence of the Office of Borrower and Lender Servicing in 

Headquarters. 

 (1) Substantial alteration of terms in any loan instrument (i.e., in excess of monies 

available in the reserve fund). 

 (2) Release or waiver of any claim against the borrower, indemnitor, or other party to 

the qualified contract. 

 (3) Acceleration of the maturity of the qualified contract or the initiation of suit under 

any PCFG loan instrument. 

 (4) Acceptance of a compromise settlement of the indebtedness for a sum less than 

the total amount due. 

 (5) Advancing funds for any purpose if such advance is chargeable to SBA. 

 (6) Taking or consenting to any action that benefits or confers a preference on the 

trustee or the trustee's institution. 

 You must respond to trustee requests for information, clarification, assistance, or changes 

within (10 working days of receipt. On actions which require the concurrence of 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-9

Servicing Pollution Control Financing Guarantees

 can be relieved through modification of loan terms, except that when such remedial 

action must require SBA making payments under the guarantee, the prior consent or 

Headquarters must be required. Field portfolio management (pm) personnel should also 

serve as advisors on borrower's problems which may affect business success and 

repayment ability. 

 b. A reasonable balance must be maintained between the interests of the borrower and the 

effect on SBA. Servicing of a PCFG should reflect a positive outlook of continuing 

effort to meet the problems of the small business involved while early recognition that a 

problem or potential problem or potential problem exists. The loan officer should 

identify the basic underlying cause of the problem, determine possible solutions, and with 

their supervisor's approval, take action designated to resolve the borrower's problem and 

ensure eventual payment of the loan. 

 c. Scope.

 The assigned loan officer must review the files and establish the case in the tickler 

systems of the office to ensure timely notice of servicing actions to be taken, typically 

following the pattern for direct or SBA-serviced loans. However, since these cases 

usually carry high dollar liability, above average repayment risk, and long term SBA 

obligations, some special added requirements have been established. The above average 

repayment risk results from the expenditures by the small business for assets which are 

not revenue producing, and the fact that the primary collateral often consists only of 

pollution control equipment. The assigned loan officer must maintain close interest, 

active involvement, and an objective attitude toward assistance throughout the loan life. 

 d. Early warning indicators.

 Problem identification can be accomplished by continuous monitoring of PCFG for 

warning signals, including: 

 (1) Requests for relief in loan terms and conditions; 

Headquarters, the trustee should, as a minimum, be advised by telephone within the 10 

working days of the anticipated time of final action. 

5. . 

 a. Because of the nature of the indenture and qualified contract, the trustee's lack of 

responsibility of any servicing activities, and the passive nature of the obligee or issuer, 

SBA should treat the PCFG as if it were an SBA-serviced obligation. This includes 

direct monitoring of the progress of business operations, responsible control over 

collateral items securing the loan, and maintenance of loan repayment terms. Remedial 

action should be employed by the field office in response to problems which 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-10 

 (2) Adverse changes or declining financial or economic trends in the industry; 

 (3) Cancellation of hazard insurance policies; 

 (4) Death or illness of the principal(s); 

 (5) Tax problems, especially failure to pay Federal withholding deposits; 

 (6) Substantive changes in officers, managers, ownership, control, or method of 

operations; 

 (7) Fire, legal action, or loss of contracts; or 

 (8) Cash flow problems. 

 e. Special involvement. 

 Any of the above signals requires involvement. When you learn that a borrower has 

failed to make two consecutive monthly payments to the trustee you must consider the 

case as requiring intensive servicing activity. Typically such information will come from 

the trustee during the recommended contacts or as a result of the relationship you build 

with the trustee. 

 f. Non-standard documentation.

 The documents and instruments of each PCFG are sometimes prepared by bond counsel 

or outside counsel and, therefore, the documentation of a particular PCFG may be unique 

and the terms and conditions may vary substantially from the usual SBA documentation 

requirements. The documents in each case must, therefore, be examined independently. 

You must pay particular attention to the following: 

 (1) The application for the PCFG and related documents; 

 (2) The loan processor's report; 

 (3) The qualified contract and the indenture; 

 (4) The settlement documentation; and 

 (5) All supporting documentation. 

 g. Field visit to obligor.

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-11

 A field visit to the small business is optional. Field visits can be used to meet the obligor, 

check on the business activities, obtain relevant documents, monitor potential problems, 

and inspect SBA's collateral. Field visits are recommended for those cases in default. 

 h. Financial statements.

 Usually for PCFGs the borrower is required to submit financial statements to the trustee 

on an annual basis. You should make arrangements with the trustee and the borrower to 

receive a copy of the financial statements as they become available. The loan officer 

must review the financial statements and compare them against the prior year(s). This 

may take the form of a trend analysis of major items, or direct year to 

 (7) The type (compilation, review, audited) of financial statement should be noted. 

6. Controls. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Account files. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Establishment of controls. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Controls should also have been established to ensure the followin

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

g.

 ̊ ̊

 year comparisons of the financial statements on SBA Form 360, "Comparative 

Statements." Some selected ratio analysis should also be performed. You should address 

any potential problem indicators such as: 

 (1) Operating losses; 

 (2) Deficit or negative net worth; 

 (3) Excessive salaries (increases in the face of losses, etc.); 

 (4) Excessive increase or decrease in accounts receivable, inventory, accounts 

payable, or notes payable; 

 (5) Substantial tax liabilities; 

 (6) Deterioration of fixed assets; and 

 The loan (case) file must be filed in the file room and the document (collateral) file must 

be placed under the control of the collateral cashier. The closing (document or bond file) 

may either be placed with district counsel or merged with the loan file. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-12 

7. Yearly Pollution Control and Report. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Contact with trustee.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 You must maintain at least annual contact with the trustee. However, since the trustee 

can provide valuable monitoring and early warning on the account, you may want to 

contact the trustee by telephone several times a year in order to maintain a close 

relationship. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Yearly contact and report.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 At a minimum, status information on each PCFG case held by the trustee must be 

obtained at the end of each fiscal year. A status report on each contact must be made and 

a copy must be furnished to Headquarters by October 31st. This yearly "Trustee Report" 

is a one page form. The report requires you to contact the borrower and issuer, as well as 

answer a few relevant questions on the loan balances, collateral, and status of the bond 

issue. Note that these annual reports by the loan officer to Headquarters are the only 

reporting mechanism in place to monitor the portfolio - as this is an old and small 

program it was never put on the mainframe. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Defaulted loans.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 A yearly memo to the file must be made regarding the collection activities for each 

delinquent or defaulted loan. A copy of the report should be attached to the quarterly 

report to Headquarters. 

8. General Administrative Activities. 

 (1) Incorporate any equipment liens in the office's UCC tickler system. Where 

available, private services which provide notice of changes in UCC and other 

filings should be employed. 

 (2) Establish and maintain a special chron sheet for each account. 

 (3) Provide for any insurance follow-up deemed necessary. 

 (4) Establish a tickler to ensure yearly contact with the trustees regarding status, and 

reporting to Headquarters. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-13

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Monitoring PCFG accounts.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 In most instances, the normal procedures for monitoring and managing SBA-serviced 

loans are applicable to PCFG accounts. However, in some instances, an adjustment in 

the process or additional reporting requirements are necessary. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Computer support.

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The PCFG portfolio is not on the Agency's computer mainframe, and, accordingly, no 

information is yet available on PCFG accounts over computer terminals within field 

offices. All controls and reporting are, therefore, manual procedures. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Copies to headquarters.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Copies of all important servicing actions (327s, reports, etc) or notifications of default or 

payment in full, should be sent to the Office of Borrower and Lender Servicing, at 

Headquarters. Headquarters should also be notified of any change in the name or address 

of a borrower. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Modification of limitations in the qualified contract.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Generally, the qualified contract must not contain special limitations on salaries, bonuses 

and other compensation, payments of dividends, working capital requirements, or fixed 

assets. Where such limitations exist and a request for change is received, it should be 

considered only if the borrower is current in payments under the qualified contract. The 

trustee should participate in any major modification and his/her concurrence should be 

obtained if at all possible. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Advances and expenses.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 It becomes necessary at times for a creditor to make "Advances" (CPC, taxes, prior liens, 

etc.) or incur "expenses" (appraisals, abstracts, recording fees, etc.) to protect its position 

or to assist in administration of the account. These expenditures are typically liquidationrelated and are sometimes recoverable from the borrower. All expenditures made on 

account of a PCFG for advances or expenses must be authorized through a 327 action and 

cleared in advance with Headquarters. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Hazard insurance.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The qualified contract usually requires the borrower to maintain hazard insurance 

coverage on the collateral and to provide evidence of such coverage to the trustee. You 

should determine the existence of any required hazard insurance in contacts with the 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-14 

trustee. 

 g

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Real and personal property taxes.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The qualified contract requires the borrower to pay all real and personal property taxes on 

pledged collateral. Payment of delinquent taxes or tax liens are authorized only when 

necessary to protect the Agency's interest in the collateral. If the borrower does not make 

reasonable arrangements for prompt payment of delinquent taxes of any substantial 

amount, steps should be taken to assure maintenance of the Agency's position in the 

collateral. In cases where the Agency's collateral is a small part of a facility, excess 

involvement should be avoided. 

 h

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Purchase of prior liens.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 In general, SBA must not purchase prior liens unless faced with an in-process foreclosure 

action by the prior lienholder(s). Any proposed purchase of a prior lien on a PCFG case 

must be approved by Headquarters. If purchase of a prior lien is to be recommended, you 

must prepare an 327 action detailing the circumstances and the 

9. Servicing Actions Requiring Payment Relief. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Payment relief.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Relief, within the limits of the monies available in the reserve fund, may be allowed 

locally in coordination with the trustee. To the extent that any payment relief exceeds 

the reserve funds and, therefore, result in claims upon SBA under the guaranty, the 

recommendations of the loan officer for payment relief must be approved by 

Headquarters in the circumstances described below. 

 (

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Defaults or delin

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

quency.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 justification for the purchase and forward the 327 action to Headquarters for concurrence 

and assurance of adequate funds available in the pollution control revolving fund. 

Because of the nature of this program, the property involved frequently will be polluted. 

You must specifically address this issue when recommending SBA's purchase of a prior 

lien. 

 Immediately upon default by the small business under the qualified contract, you 

should immediately hold a conference with the principals to determine the nature 

of the problem(s) and the appropriate action to be taken. The various remedial 

action permitted under this SOP may be used with coordination as indicated 

above. A field visit is recommended if the delinquency exceeds two monthly 

payments. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-15

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Deferments.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Deferment of delinquent installments under the qualified contract may be allowed 

for the entire period of delinquency provided an acceptable new payment plan has 

been worked out. Deferment of future installments up to the amount available in 

the reserve fund may be authorized by the field office. Since deferments in 

excess of the amount in the reserve fund require SBA to assume responsibility for 

matching payments to the bondholder's trustee, deferments which have a value 

greater than the amount in the reserve fund must be approved by Headquarters. 

You must prepare a 327 action giving full details of the efforts made to remedy 

the situation and justifications for the recommended action. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Changes in repayment.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Reduced loan payment amounts may be allowed if it is determined that the 

borrower's cash flow cannot sustain the regular payments prescribed in the 

qualified contract and the reduction must provide a basis for eventual resumption 

of full repayment. Since a prolonged reduction in loan payment 

Collateral

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Types of collateral.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Release of collateral/subordination of liens.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 amounts must result in claims by the trustee on SBA for the difference in amount 

required to meet the payments to the bondholders, reduced loan payment plans 

that are not covered by the reserve account must be approved by Headquarters. 

You must prepare a 327 action giving full details of the efforts made to remedy 

the situation and justification for the recommendation for reduction in loan 

payment amount. 

10. . 

 Collateral for PCFG, usually consists of all items pledged to secure the financing, as 

specified in the qualified contract. This usually includes the pollution control equipment 

or facilities, and may include real estate, equipment, and other fixed assets. Accounts 

receivable, inventory, contracts, special rights, or licenses were rarely taken as collateral. 

 The interest of SBA is maintained and protected through responsible control over 

collateral pledged to secure the PCFG. Requests for major collateral adjustments, 

including subordination of liens, require a full review of the benefits and the risks of the 

proposal. You must perform an analysis of any such request including an evaluation of 

management ability, review of current financial information, the prior record of the 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-16 

 ̊

1

 ̊

)

 ̊

Use of funds.

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

borrower, the extent of remaining collateral, the status of any superior liens, etc. 

Guidelines for release of collateral include the following. 

 (

 ̊

2

 ̊

)

 ̊

Exchanges or trade

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

ins.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The proceeds from the sale of released collateral should ordinarily be provided to 

the trustee to hold in (and/or replenish) the reserve fund. The borrower should be 

required to continue making the periodic payments on the loan to the trustee for 

use in making forthcoming payments to bondholders. Funds obtained from sales 

or releases of collateral, or a part thereof, may be used for business purposes if it 

is deemed that such use is necessary for the continued existence and viability of 

the borrower, and the Agency's interest is reasonably protected. There must be 

documentation that an enhanced repayment ability must exist which is reasonable 

in relation to the outstanding obligations under the qualified contract, and that the 

release of collateral must not interfere materially with the operation of the 

business. The 327 action must fully justify the action to be taken. 

 (

 The trustee and the field office should take any necessary steps to ensure that 

Agency liens apply to the acquired property, subject to purchase money liens. 

 (

 ̊

3

 ̊

)

 ̊

Appraisals.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 ̊

4

 ̊

)

 ̊

Subordination of 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

liens.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The nature of pollution control equipment is such that an appraisal by an industry 

specialist may sometimes be necessary to support requests for major releases of 

such collateral. 

 (

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Release of indemnitors. 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The subordination of an SBA lien may be allowed only when there must be new 

money injected in the borrower and it is necessary to ensure borrower survival 

and future payment to SBA. The requirements for release of collateral indicated 

above should be used in determining the subordination of liens. 

11. Indemnification Agreements. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-17

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Release of indemnitors.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Release of indemnitors of PCFG accounts is not contemplated. Requests for such release 

may be approved in unusual circumstances only with the written concurrence of the 

trustee and Headquarters. 

12. Liquidation Considerations. 

 a

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Transfer to liquidation.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Upon the occurrence of any of the "automatic" reasons for a transfer to liquidation 

(bankruptcy, etc.), or whenever the field office determines that orderly repayment of the 

debt will not occur and that the interests of SBA can best be protected by enforced 

collection efforts, you must immediately prepare an appropriate 327 action and forward it 

to Headquarters. 

 b

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Procedures.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The actual liquidation of collateral in PCFG cases is little different from the procedures 

used for SBA loans. However, careful review of SBA's position and rights must be made 

by the liquidation officer and SBA counsel to ensure a full understanding of the 

important differences. 

 c

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Rights to take action.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 In most cases, the trustee is named in the collateral documents (by assignment or 

otherwise) and arrangements must be made with the trustee to ensure that the Agency's 

rights to proceed are clear. 

 d

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Exhaustion of escrow funds.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 The bond documents may require as a condition precedent to the trustee's filing of a 

claim against SBA, both the exhaustion of the escrow funds and reasonably diligent 

efforts to minimize loss such as advertising the facility for sale, lease or rent, or retention 

of agents or brokers to salvage the value of the property. It is not the Agency's intent that 

the trustee handle liquidation, and, accordingly, all such requirements may (usually) be 

 Actions that could result in the release of indemnitors should not be taken. Indemnitors 

are usually liable to SBA only for actual payments made by SBA, not the total debt due 

from the borrower. Where the indemnitors have hypothecated collateral as direct 

security for an SBA guaranty, special care should be taken in liquidation of such security 

to ensure against problems in the application of funds. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

16-18 

waived. 

 e

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Successor interest.

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 If the transaction requires the trustee to hold the qualified contract, the SBA guaranty, 

and the collateral, as assignee-trustee, the documentation serves to place SBA as the 

successor in interest in the qualified contract. 

 f

 ̊

.

 ̊

 Unique documentation.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Most documents relating to the PCFG transaction were tailored by outside counsel to fit 

the particular case as such counsel viewed it at closing. The liquidating loan officer and 

SBA counsel may not assume that the case fits a predetermined pattern, and must review 

the documents carefully in order to determine the Agency's position, rights, and 

responsibilities in each individual case. 

Special Guidance/Assistance. 

 Any field office desiring special guidance on any aspect of pollution control bond servicing or 

liquidation should contact the Office of Borrower and Lender Servicing at Headquarters. 

13. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

16-19

SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

 APPENDIX 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 1 

SBA FORM 152, PARTICIPATION CERTIFICATE 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A1-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A1-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 2 

SBA FORM 155, STANDBY AGREEMENT 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A2-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 155, STANDBY AGREEMENT (cont.) 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A2-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 3 

SBA FORM 156, CERTIFICATE OF INTEREST

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A3-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A3-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 4 

SBA FORM 172, TRANSACTION REPORT ON LOANS 

SERVICED BY LENDER 

A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

4-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A4-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 5 

SBA FORM 327, MODIFICATION OR 

ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A5-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A5-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 6 

SBA 327 STAMP -- EXAMPLE 

U.S. Small Business Administration 

Action #_______________

We concur with this request. 

 _________________________________ 

 Recommending Official 

 ____________________ 

 Date 

 _________________________________ 

 Counsel 

 ____________________ 

 Date 

 _________________________________ 

 Approving Official 

 ____________________ 

 Date 

SOP__________________________ Paragraph #_______________

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A6-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A6-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 7 

 .SBA FORM 397, NOTICE OF 

FULLY PAID ACCOUNT 

S I  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ MALL BUSINESS ADM NISTRATION

OFFICE OF FINANCIAL OPERATIONS

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

DENVER, COLORADO 80202

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Notice of Fully Paid Account

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

TO: COLLATERAL CASHIER 

The account cited below has been pai

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

d in full. Release of the

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

paid obligating instrument when SBA-serviced, as 

well as any collateral held, is subject to the appropriate provisions of SOP 20 05 and SOP 20 22. 

 [ ] Direct or immediate participation paid in full. 

 [ ] Guarantee loan voluntarily terminated or paid in full. 

 [ ] Automatic termination of guarantee loan. 

 [ ] Loan paid in full by compromise. 

================================================================ 

Borrower: (Name and Address) Loan Number: 

---------------------------------------- ----------

 Svc Off: [ ] SBA  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊-

 ̊

Sc

 ̊  ̊

---------------------------------------- 

 [ ] Bnk-Sc 

------------------------------ -- ---------- ---- 

================================================================ 

 LAST LOAN ACCOUNTING TRANSACTION PROCESSED BY SBA  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

Fund Sy DT# Eff Date Blk# Date Overpayment 

 

================================================================ 

 CERTIFIED CORRECT AND APPROVED FOR PAYMENT  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

Approving Off: Date: 

================================================================ 

 BORROWER REFUND BY OFO  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

Refund on Schedule – W______ Amount: ______ Date:______ 

================================================================ 

 INSTRUMENT RELEASED BY SBA FIELD OFFICE  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

Collateral Cashier: Date: 

================================================================ 

SBA FORM 397 (11

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

95) REF: SOP 20 05 & 20 22

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

================================================================

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A7-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A7-ii 
SOP 50 50 4A

APPENDIX 8 

SBA FORM 466, TRANSCRIPT OF ACCOUNT-EXAMPLE 

EFFECTIVE DATE: SEPTEMBER 4, 1998

A8-i
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A8-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 9 

SBA FORM 515, NOTE RECEIVABLE REPORT 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A9-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A9-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 10 

SBA FORM 596 B, CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF 

ACCOUNT 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A10-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A10-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 11 

SBA FORM 888, MANAGEMENT TRAINING REPORT 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A11-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 888, MANAGEMENT TRAINING REPORT

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 (cont.)

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A11-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 12 

SBA FORM 927, MORTGAGE (DIRECT)

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A12-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 927, MORTGAGE (DIRECT) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A12-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 927, MORTGAGE (DIRECT) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A12-iii
SOP 50 50 4

SB

 ̊  ̊A FORM 927, MORTGAGE (DIRECT) (cont.) ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A12-iv 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A12-v

SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A13-i
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 13 

SBA FORM 928, MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATION)

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A13-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 928, MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATI

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

ON)(cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A13-iii
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 928, MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATION)(cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A13-iv 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 928, MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATION)(cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A13-v

SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 14 

SBA FORM 929, DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT)

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A14-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 929, DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A14-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 929, DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A14-iii
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 929, DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A14-iv 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 15 

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION)

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A15-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A15-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A15-iii
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A15-iv 
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 93

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

0, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) (cont.)

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A15-v
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A15-vi 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 16 

SBA FORM 1032, STATEMENT OF LOAN ACCOUNT

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A16-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A16-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 17 

SBA FORM 1061, REQUEST FOR MA ASSISTANCE

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A17-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A17-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 18 

SBA FORM 1102, CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH FISCAL

REQUIREMENTS

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A18-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A18-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 19 

SBA FORM 1128, GUARANTY LOAN PURCHASED

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A19-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997 

A19-ii 
SOP 50 50 4B

APPENDIX 20 

RESERVED

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A20-i
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A20-ii 
SOP 50 50 4B

APPENDIX 21 

RESERVED

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A21-i
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A21-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 22 

SBA FORM 1201, REPAYMENT NOTICE

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A22-i
SOP 50 50 4

SBA FORM 1201, REPAYMENT NOTICE (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A22-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 23 

SBA FORM 1502, GUARANTY LOAN STATUS & 

LENDER REMITTANCE FORM

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A23-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A23-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 24 

SBA FORM 1614, ORA & ED/SBA INFORMATION REQUEST

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A24-i
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A24-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

APPENDIX 25 

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU) BETWEEN FDIC AND SBA

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A25-i
SOP 50 50 4

M

 ̊

EMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU) BETWEEN FDIC AND SBA (cont.)  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A25-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU) BETWEEN FDIC AND SBA (cont.)  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A25-iii
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A25-iv 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A26-i

APPENDIX 26 

CHECKLIST FOR PURCHASE DOCUMENTS

Lender should note on the checklist below all loan documentation required and outlined in the Loan Authorization and provide copies 

along with any other additional documents relevant to the disbursement, closing, or servicing of the loan. Please do not assign documents 

to SBA unless requested to do so.

Bank SBA use only

SBA Loan Number:____________________ SBA Loan Name:________________________

Req'd Rec'd Need Debt Instruments and Authorizing Borrowing Resolutions

[ ] [ ] [ ] Evidence of guarantor consent for any material changes to the loan terms 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Corporate Resolution to Borrow (SBA Form 160) or equivalent 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Other:________________________________________________________________ 

 Real Property Collateral

[ ] [ ] [ ] Required Title Policies obtained when loan was closed or after substantial changes 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Appraisals subsequent to loan approval, if required 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Other:_________________________________________________________________ 

 Personal Property Collateral

[ ] [ ] [ ] UCC-1 Financing Statements with amendments, if any, filed with Secretary of State 

[ ] [ ] [ ] UCC-3 Lien Search from Secretary of State 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Continuation for Fixture Filing, if appropriate 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Hazard Insurance for Personal Property 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Other:_________________________________________________________________ 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Life Insurance Policies, with acknowledgement by the home office of the collateral assignment 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Certified Transcript of Account 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Standby Agreement 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Phase I or II, if necessary 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Settlement Sheets (SBA Form 1050), if not provided when loan was closed 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Loan Authorization executed by all parties, if a copy was not already provided 

[ ] [ ] [ ] If not covered elsewhere in this checklist, any other documentation showing that all terms and conditions of 

the loan agreement have been followed

[ ] [ ] [ ] Note (SBA Form 147) and any amendments or modifications thereof 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Guarantees (SBA Form 148) of any parties 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Certificate as to Partners (SBA Form 160A) or equivalent 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Authorization to Borrow from Limited Liability Company 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Recorded Deed(s) of Trust / Mortgage(s) covering real property pledged on the note or guaranty 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Hazard Insurance Policies insuring real property pledged as collateral 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Lease 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Security Agreement(s) 

[ ] [ ] [ ] UCC-2 Continuation Statement, if appropriate 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Fixture Filing with County 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Landlord's waiver 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Certificate of Ownership and security agreement on automotive equipment 

 Life Insurance

[ ] [ ] [ ] Other:_________________________________________________________________ 

 Other Miscellaneous Documents

[ ] [ ] [ ] Evidence of Borrower Injection 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Environmental questionnaires 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Fictitious Business Name Statement filing 

[ ] [ ] [ ] Other:________________________________________________________________ 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A26-ii 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-i

APPENDIX 27 

13 CFR  120.600 - 120.660 -- SECONDARY MARKET

 13 CFR  120.600  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ -

 ̊

 120.660.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Subpart F  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ -

 ̊

 Secondary Market

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

FISCAL AND TRANSFER AGENT (FTA) 

 120.600 Definitions. 

 120.611 Pools backing Pool Certificates. 

 120.613 Secondary Participation Guarantee Agreement. 

THE SBA GUARANTEE OF A CERTIFICATE

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 120.620 SBA guarantee of a Pool Certificate. 

 120.630 Qualifications to be a Pool Assembler. 

 120.631 Suspension or termination of Pool Assembler. 

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 120.641 Disclosure to purchasers. 

 120.643 Requirements before the FTA issues Individual Certificate. 

 120.645 Redemption of Certificates. 

 120.651 Claim to FTA by Registered Holder to replace Certificate. 

MARKET  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 120.660 Suspension or revocation.

Subpart F 

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ - ̊

 Secondary Market

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 

 120.601 SBA Secondary Market. 

 CERTIFICATES 

 120.610 Form and terms of Certificates. 

 120.612 Loans eligible to back Certificates. 

 120.621 SBA guarantee of an Individual Certificate. 

 POOL ASSEMBLERS 

 120.640 Administration of the Pool and Individual Certificates. 

 120.642 Requirements before the FTA issues Pool Certificates. 

 120.644 Transfers of Certificates. 

 120.650 Registration duties of FTA in Secondary Market. 

 120.652 FTA fees. 

SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF PARTICIPANT IN SECONDARY  ̊  ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-ii 

FISCAL AND TRANSFER AGENT (FTA)

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 (a) Certificate

 120.600 Definitions. 

 is the document the FTA issues representing a beneficial fractional interest in a 

Pool (Pool Certificate), or an undivided interest in the entire guaranteed portion of an 

individual 7(a) guaranteed loan (Individual Certificate). 

 (b) Current means that no repayment from a Borrower to a Lender is over 29 days late measured 

from the due date of the payment on the records of the FTA's central registry (Pools) or the 

entity servicing the loan (individual guaranteed portion). 

 (c) FTA is the SBA's fiscal and transfer agent. 

 (d) Note Rate is the interest rate on the Borrower's note. 

 (e) Net Rate is the interest rate on an individual guaranteed portion of a loan in a Pool. 

 (f) Pool is an aggregation of SBA guaranteed portions of loans made by Lenders. 

 (g) Pool Assembler is a financial institution that: 

 (h) Pool Rate

 (1) Organizes and packages a Pool by acquiring the SBA guaranteed portions of loans 

from Lenders; 

 (2) Resells fractional interests in the Pool to Registered Holders; and 

 (3) Directs the FTA to issue Certificates. 

 is the interest rate on a Pool Certificate. 

 (i) Registered Holder is the Certificate owner listed in FTA's records. 

 (j) SBA's Secondary Market Program Guide is an issuance from SBA which describes the 

characteristics of Secondary Market transactions. 

 The SBA secondary market ("Secondary Market") consists of the sale of Certificates, representing 

either the entire guaranteed portion of an individual 7(a) guaranteed loan or an undivided interest in a 

Pool consisting of the SBA guaranteed portions of a number of 7(a) guaranteed loans. By the terms of 

such Certificate, SBA guarantees a Registered Holder timely payment of principal and interest from 

the loan or loans underlying the Certificate. Transactions involving interests in Pools or the sale of 

individual guaranteed portions of loans are governed by the contracts entered into by the parties, 

SBA's Secondary Market Program Guide, and this subpart. See

 120.601 SBA Secondary Market.

 sections 5(f), (g) and (h) of the Small 

Business Act (15 U.S.C. 634 (f), (g) and (h)). 

 CERTIFICATES 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-iii

 (a) General form and content

 120.610 Form and terms of Certificates.

. Each Certificate must be registered with the FTA. SBA must 

approve the terms of the Certificate. 

 (b) Face amount of Pool Certificate. The face amount of a Pool Certificate cannot be less than a 

minimum amount as specified in the Program Guide, and the dollar amount of Certificates 

must be in increments which SBA will specify in the Program Guide (except for one 

Certificate in each Pool). SBA may change these requirements based upon an analysis of 

market conditions and program experience, and will publish a Notice of any such change in 

the Federal Register. 

 (c) Basis of payment for Pool Certificates. Principal installments and interest payments are based 

on the unpaid principal balance of the portion of the Pool represented by a Pool Certificate. 

All prepayments on loans in the Pool must be passed through to the appropriate Registered 

Holders with the regularly scheduled payments to such Holders. 

 (d) Basis of payment for Individual Certificates. Principal installments and interest payments are 

based on the unpaid principal balance of the SBA guaranteed portion of the loan supporting an 

Individual Certificate. The Certificate must provide for a pass through to the Registered 

Holder of payments which the FTA receives from a Lender or any entity servicing the loan, 

less applicable fees. 

 (e) Interest rate on Pool Certificate. The interest rate on a Pool Certificate must be equal to the 

lowest Net Rate on any individual guaranteed portion of a loan in the Pool. 

 120.611 Pools backing Pool Certificates. 

 (a) Pool characteristics. As set forth in the Program Guide, each Pool must have: 

 (1) A minimum number of guaranteed portions of loans; 

 (2) A minimum aggregate principal balance of the guaranteed portions; 

 (b) Adjustment of Pool characteristics

 (3) A maximum percentage of the Pool which an individual guaranteed portion may 

constitute; 

 (4) A maximum allowable difference between the highest and lowest note interest rates; 

 (5) A maximum allowable difference between the remaining terms to maturity of the loans 

in the Pool; and 

 (6) A minimum weighted average maturity at Pool formation. 

. SBA may adjust the Pool characteristics periodically 

based upon program experience and market conditions. 

 120.612 Loans eligible to back Certificates.

 (a) Pool Certificates are backed by the SBA guaranteed portions of loans comprising the Pool. An 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-iv 

 (2) Be guaranteed under the Act; and 

 (3) Meet such other standards as SBA may determine to be necessary for the successful 

operation of the Secondary Market program. 

 (b) The loans that back a Pool must meet the SBA requirements in effect at the time the Pool is 

formed. 

 120.613 Secondary Participation Guarantee Agreement.

 When a Lender wants to sell the guaranteed portion of a loan, it enters into a Secondary Participation 

Guarantee Agreement ("SPGA") with SBA and the prospective purchaser. The terms of sale between 

the Lender and the purchaser cannot require the Lender or SBA to repurchase the guaranteed portion 

of the loan except in accordance with the terms of the SPGA. Before execution of the SPGA, the 

Lender must: 

 (a) Submit to FTA a copy of the proposed SPGA, the note, and such other documents as SBA may 

require; 

 (b) Disburse to the Borrower the full amount of the loan; and 

 (c) Pay SBA all guarantee fees relevant to the loan in full. 

THE SBA GUARANTEE OF A CERTIFICATE

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 120.620 SBA guarantee of a Pool Certificate.

 (a) Extent of Guarantee

Individual Certificate is backed by the SBA guaranteed portion of a single loan. Any such 

loan must: 

 (1) Be current as of the date the Pool is formed or the individual guaranteed portion of a 

loan is initially sold in the Secondary Market; 

. SBA guarantees to a Registered Holder the timely payment of principal 

and interest installments and any prepayment or other recovery of principal to which the 

Registered Holder is entitled. If the Borrower of a loan in a Pool backing the Certificates does 

not make a required installment payment, SBA, through the FTA, will make advances to 

maintain the schedule of interest and principal payments to the Registered Holders. 

 (b) SBA guarantee backed by full faith and credit. SBA's guarantee of the Pool Certificate is 

backed by the full faith and credit of the United States. 

 120.621 SBA guarantee of an Individual Certificate. 

 (a) Extent of SBA guarantee. With respect to Individual Certificates, SBA guarantees to purchase 

from the Registered Holder the guaranteed portion of the loan for an amount equal to the 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-v

unpaid principal and accrued interest due as of the date of SBA's purchase, less deductions for 

applicable fees. Unlike the SBA guarantee with respect to pooled loans, SBA does not 

guarantee timely payment on Individual Certificates. 

 (b) What triggers the SBA guarantee. SBA's guarantee to the Registered Holder may be called 

upon when: 

 (c) Full faith and credit.

 (1) The Borrower remains in uncured default for 60 days on payments of principal or 

interest due on the note; 

 (2) The Lender fails to send to the FTA on a timely basis payments it received from the 

Borrower; or 

 (3) The FTA fails to send to the Registered Holder on a timely basis any payments it has 

received from the Lender. 

 SBA's guarantee to the Registered Holder is backed by the full faith and 

credit of the United States. 

 POOL ASSEMBLERS

 120.630 Qualifications to be a Pool Assembler. 

 (a) Application to become Pool Assembler. The application to become a Pool Assembler is 

available from the AA/FA. In order to qualify as a Pool Assembler, an entity must send the 

application to the AA/FA, with an application fee, and certify that it: 

 (b) Approval by SBA

 (1) Is regulated by the appropriate agency as defined in section 3(a)(34)(G) of the 

Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(34)(G)); 

 (2) Meets all financial and other applicable requirements of its regulatory authority and the 

Government Securities Act of 1986, as amended (Pub. L. 99-571, 100 Stat. 3208); 

 (3) Has the financial capability to assemble acceptable and eligible guaranteed loan 

portions in sufficient quantity to support the issuance of Pool Certificates; and 

 (4) Is in good standing with SBA (as the AA/FA determines), the Office of the 

Comptroller of the Currency ("OCC") if it is a national bank, the Federal Deposit 

Insurance Corporation if it is a bank not regulated by the OCC, or the National 

Association of Securities Dealers if it is a member. 

. An entity may not submit Pool applications to the FTA until SBA has 

approved the application to become a Pool Assembler. 

 (c) Conduct of business by Pool Assembler. An entity continues to qualify as a Pool Assembler 

so long as it: 

 (1) Meets the eligibility standards in paragraph (a) of this section; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-vi 

 (3) Maintains its books and records in accordance with generally accepted accounting 

principles or in accordance with the guidelines of the regulatory body governing its 

activities. 

 120.631 Suspension or termination of Pool Assembler. 

 (a) Suspension or termination

 (2) Conducts its business in accordance with SBA regulations and accepted securities or 

banking industry practices, ethics, and standards; and 

. The AA/FA may suspend a Pool Assembler from operating in the 

Secondary Market for up to 18 months or terminate its status as a Pool Assembler, if the Pool 

Assembler (and/or its Associates): 

 (1) Does not comply with any of the requirements in 120.630(a) and (c); 

 (2) Has been indicted or otherwise formally charged with, or convicted of, a misdemeanor 

or felony; 

 (3) Has received an adverse civil judgment that it has committed a breach of trust or a 

violation of a law or regulation protecting the integrity of business transactions or 

relationships; 

 (4) Has not formed a Pool for at least three years; or 

 (5) Is under investigation by its regulating authority for activities which may affect its 

fitness to participate in the Secondary Market. 

 (b) Suspension procedures. The AA/FA shall notify a Pool Assembler by certified mail, return 

receipt requested, of the decision to suspend and the reasons therefore at least 10 business days 

prior to the effective date of the suspension. The Pool Assembler may appeal the suspension 

made under this section pursuant to the procedures set forth in part 134 of this chapter. The 

action of the AA/FA shall remain in effect pending resolution of the appeal. 

 (c) Notice of termination. In order to terminate a Pool Assembler, the AA/FA must issue an order 

to show cause why the SBA should not terminate the Pool Assembler's participation in the 

Secondary Market. The Pool Assembler may appeal the termination made under this section 

pursuant to procedures set forth in part 134 of this chapter. The action of the AA/FA shall 

remain in effect pending resolution of the appeal. 

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 (a) FTA responsibility

 120.640 Administration of the Pool and Individual Certificates. 

. The FTA has the responsibility to administer each Pool or Individual 

Certificate. It shall maintain a registry of Registered Holders and other information as SBA 

requires. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-vii

 (b) Self-liquidating. Each Pool or individual guaranteed portion of a loan in the Secondary 

Market is self-liquidating because of Borrower payments or prepayments, redemption by SBA, 

and/or payments by SBA or the Lender after default by the Borrower. Substitution of the 

guaranteed portions of existing loans for defaulted loans is not permitted. 

 (c) SBA's right to subrogation. If SBA pays a claim under a guarantee with respect to a 

Certificate issued under this subpart, it must be subrogated fully to the rights satisfied by such 

payment. 

 (d) SBA ownership rights not limited. No Federal, State or local law can preclude or limit the 

exercise by SBA of its ownership rights in the portions of loans constituting the Pool against 

which the Certificates are issued. 

 120.641 Disclosure to purchasers. 

 (a) Information to purchaser. Prior to any sale, the Pool Assembler, Registered Holder of an 

Individual Certificate, or any subsequent seller must disclose to the purchaser, verbally or in 

writing, information on the terms, conditions, and yield as described in the SBA Secondary 

Market Program Guide. 

 (b) Information on transfer document. The seller must provide the same information described in 

paragraph (a) of this section in writing on the transfer document when the seller submits it to 

the FTA. After the sale of an Individual Certificate, the FTA will provide the disclosure 

information in writing to the purchaser. 

 (c) Information in prospectus. If the Registered Holder is a trust, investment Pool, mutual fund or 

other security, it must disclose the information in (a) above to investors through a prospectus 

and other promotional material if an Individual Certificate or Pool Certificate is placed into or 

used as the backing for the investment vehicle. 

 120.642 Requirements before the FTA issues Pool Certificates.

 Before the FTA issues any Pool Certificate, the Pool Assembler must deliver to it the following 

documents: 

 (a) A properly completed Pool application form; 

 (b) Either: 

 (1) Individual Certificates evidencing the guaranteed portions comprising the Pool; or 

 (2) An executed SPGA and related documentation for the loans whose guaranteed portions 

are to be part of the Pool; and 

 (c) Any other documentation which SBA may require. 

 120.643 Requirements before the FTA issues Individual Certificates. 

 (a) FTA issuance of initial Certificate. Before the FTA can issue the Individual Certificate for a 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-viii 

guaranteed portion of a loan, the original seller must provide the following documents to the 

FTA: 

 (1) An executed SPGA; 

 (2) A copy of the note representing the guaranteed loan; and 

 (b) Review of documentation

 (3) Any other documentation which SBA may require. 

. SBA may review or require the FTA to review any documentation 

before the FTA issues a Certificate. 

 (a) General rule

 120.644 Transfers of Certificates. 

. Certificates are transferable. Transfers in the Secondary Market must comply 

with Article 8 of the Uniform Commercial Code of the State of New York. The seller must 

use the detached form of assignment (SBA Form 1088), unless the seller and purchaser choose 

to use another form which the SBA approves. The FTA may refuse to issue a Certificate until 

it is satisfied that the documents of transfer are complete. 

 (b) Transfer on FTA records. In order for the transfer of a Certificate to be effective the FTA 

must reflect it on its records. 

 (c) Contents of letter of transmittal accompanying the transfer of Certificates. 

 (1) A letter of transmittal must accompany each Certificate which a Registered Holder 

submits to the FTA for transfer. The Registered Holder must supply the following 

information in the letter: 

 (i) Pool number, if applicable; 

 (ii) Certificate number; 

 (iii) Name of purchaser of Certificate; 

 (iv) Address and tax identification number of the purchaser; 

 (v) Name and telephone number of the person handling or facilitating the transfer; 

 (vi) Instructions for the delivery of the new Certificate. 

 (2) The Registered Holder must also send the fee which the FTA charges for this service. 

The FTA will supply fee information to the Registered Holder. 

 (d) Lender cannot purchase guaranteed portion of loan it made. The Lender (or its Associate) that 

made a 7(a) guaranteed loan cannot purchase the guaranteed portion of that loan in the 

Secondary Market. If a Lender does purchase the guaranteed portion of one of its own loans, 

it shall not have the unconditional guarantee of SBA. 

 120.645 Redemption of Certificates.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-ix

 (a) Redemption of Individual Certificate. The prepayment of the underlying loan or a default on 

such loan will trigger the redemption of the Certificate by FTA/SBA in accordance with the 

procedures prescribed in the SPGA. 

 (b) Redemption of Pool Certificate. The FTA and SBA may redeem a Pool Certificate because of 

prepayment or default of all loans in a Pool. 

 120.650 Registration duties of FTA in Secondary Market. 

 The FTA registers all Certificates. This means it issues, transfers title to, and redeems them. All 

financial transactions relating to a guaranteed portion of a loan flow through the FTA. In fulfilling its 

obligation to keep the central registry current, the FTA may, with SBA's approval, obtain any 

necessary information from the parties involved in the Secondary Market. 

 120.651 Claim to FTA by Registered Holder to replace Certificate. 

 (a) To replace a Certificate because of loss, theft, destruction, mutilation, or defacement, the 

Registered Holder must: 

 (1) Give the FTA information about the Certificate and the facts relating to the claim; 

 (2) File an indemnity bond acceptable to SBA and the FTA with a surety to protect the 

interests of SBA and the FTA; 

 (3) Pay the FTA its fee to replace a Certificate; and 

 (4) Use an affidavit of loss (form available from the FTA) to report: 

 (i) The name and address of the Registered Holder (and the name and capacity of 

any representative actually filing the claim); 

 (ii) The Certificate by Pool number, if applicable; 

 (iii) The Certificate number; 

 (iv) The original principal amount; 

 (v) The name in which the Certificate was registered; 

 (vi) Any assignment, endorsement or other writing on the Certificate; and 

 (vii) A statement of the circumstances of the theft or loss. 

 (b) When the FTA receives notice of the theft or loss, it will stop any transfer of the Certificate. 

The Registered Holder must send to the FTA all available portions of a mutilated or defaced 

Certificate. When the Registered Holder completes these steps, the FTA will replace the 

Certificate. 

 120.652 FTA fees. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-x 

SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF PARTICIPANT IN SECONDARY 

MARKET

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 120.660 Suspension or revocation.

 (a) Suspension or revocation of Lender, broker, dealer, or Registered Holder for violation of 

 The FTA may charge reasonable servicing fees, transfer fees, and other fees as the SBA and FTA may 

negotiate under contract. 

Secondary Market rules and regulations. The AA/FA may suspend or revoke the privilege of a 

Lender, broker, dealer, or Registered Holder to sell, purchase, broker, or deal in loans or 

Certificates for: 

 (1) Committing a serious violation, in SBA's discretion, of: 

 (i) The regulations governing the Secondary Market; or 

 (2) Knowingly submitting false or fraudulent information to the SBA or FTA. 

 (b) Additional rules for suspension or revocation of broker or dealer

 (ii) Any provisions in the contracts entered into by the parties, including SBA 

Forms 1085, 1086, 1088 and 1454; or 

. In addition to acting under 

paragraph (a) of this section, the AA/FA may suspend or revoke the privilege of any broker or 

dealer to sell or otherwise deal in Certificates in the Secondary Market if: 

 (c) Notice to suspend or revoke

 (1) Its supervisory agency has revoked or suspended the broker or dealer from engaging in 

the securities business, or is investigating the firm or broker for a practice which SBA 

considers, in its sole discretion, to be relevant to the broker's or dealer's fitness to 

participate in the Secondary Market; 

 (2) The broker or dealer has been indicted or otherwise formally charged with a 

misdemeanor or felony which bears on its fitness to participate in the Secondary 

Market; or 

 (3) A civil judgment is entered holding that the broker or dealer has committed a breach of 

trust or a violation of any law or regulation protecting the integrity of business 

transactions or relationships. 

. The AA/FA shall notify the affected party in writing, providing 

the reasons therefore, at least 10 business days prior to the effective date of the suspension or 

revocation. The affected party may appeal the suspension or revocation made under this 

section pursuant to the procedures set forth in part 134 of this chapter. The action of the 

AA/FA will remain in effect pending resolution of the appeal. Revocation will last a 

minimum of five years. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A27-xi

SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

A28-i

APPENDIX 28 

CAPLINES PROGRAM SERVICING GUIDELINES

1. Introduction.

 There are universal requirements for both processing and servicing CAPLines, as well as 

requirements for processing and servicing each of the separate sub-programs under the 

umbrella. Servicing personnel must be familiar with both the unique and general requirements 

that are applicable to each sub-program when servicing loans disbursed under this program. 

 c. Procedures and policies not covered in this section must be governed by the requirements 

detailed in existing SOPs or regulations, as applicable. 

 d. Servicing of every CAPLines loan will require different knowledge than the servicing of 

regular 7(a) guaranty loans. The loan amount for each sub-program is based on the value of 

either existing or to be generated current assets

 a. CAPLines is the name assigned to all of the Agency's short term lending programs except 

those dedicated entirely to exporting. The CAPLines umbrella consists of five separate and 

distinctive sub-programs: 

 (1) Seasonal; 

 (2) Contract; 

 (3) Builder; 

 (4) Standard Asset Based; and 

 (5) Small Asset Based. 

 b. Each sub-program is only available on a guaranty basis. 

. Disbursements or advances can be 

continually made throughout the loans term, but only after an acceptable value of the current 

assets is determined. Repayment comes from the orderly or operational liquidation of these 

assets (which also serves as collateral). Liquidation, as used herein, refers to the conversion of 

the assets (accounts receivables and inventory) to cash. 

 e. Each sub-program is only available on a guaranty basis. Lender responsibility includes 

determining which current assets are acceptable, the value of these assets, and the control of 

all cash or near cash receipts obtained from these assets when liquidated. 

 f. In this program as with the regular 7(a) loan program, servicing efforts of Commercial Loan 

Servicing Centers (CLSCs) and the field offices must be directed primarily to the servicing of 

the participant and the performance of an overview of the participant's servicing. 

2. General Servicing Criteria.

 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

A28-ii 

 i. For increases, refer to Chapter 6, "Special Loan Programs," in the paragraph 6-8 titled 

"CAPLines Loan Program - Servicing." 

 a. Post disbursement servicing of any CAPLines loans must be acted upon by personnel who 

have successfully completed either SBA's Level III Commercial Credit & Analysis Course or 

an SBA/National Association of Government Guaranty Lenders (NAGGL) GreenLine Course. 

 b. All personnel servicing CAPLines sub-program loans must keep abreast of all aspects of the 

program as noted in this appendix, "CAPLines Program Servicing Guidelines." 

 c. As with the regular 7(a) loan program, servicing efforts of CLSC and the field offices must be 

directed primarily to the servicing of the participant and the performance of an overview of the 

participant's servicing of the borrower. 

 d. Once the initial disbursement of a CAPLines loan has been made, whether partial or full, it 

must be transferred to servicing in the applicable servicing center. 

 e. Since CAPLines sub-program loans have some unique servicing requirements, these 

guidelines act as a supplement to those set throughout this SOP. 

 f. Servicing personnel must be familiar with the various additional authorization requirements 

which are unique to the CAPLines sub-programs. 

 g. Any action which requires SBA concurrence/approval must be sent to the servicing division of 

the local SBA field office/servicing center where appropriate. The SBA will strive to respond 

to all requests within 5 working days. Requests may be sent via facsimile (FAX) and 

depending on the urgency of the request, the lender may wish to follow-up with a phone call to 

SBA. 

 h. District offices currently sending their loans to a servicing center, must continue to do so with 

the CAPLines loans. These loans must be sent to the center after the first disbursement has 

been made and remain there until the lender has proceeded to liquidate the current assets or the 

servicing/workout of the line has become so intense that field office interaction is required in 

order to facilitate the process. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-iii

3. Universal Servicing Requirements.

 In the event SBA approves an increase to a loan that was for $50,000 or less 

and

 a. Guaranty fee.

 For all CAPLines originally approved on or before 9/30/95 with a maturity of 12 months or 

less that are renewed past 12 months, SBA is due an additional guaranty fee equal to 2 percent 

of the guaranteed portion less the 1/4 of 1 percent fee of the guaranteed portion previously 

paid. For all CAPLines approved on or after 10/12/95 for 12 months or less that are renewed 

past 12 months, SBA is due an additional guaranty fee equal to what the fee would have been 

under the rules of the Small Business Lending Enhancement Act of 1995, less the 1/4 of 1 

percent fee of the guaranteed portion previously paid. 

 No additional guaranty fee is due if: 

 (1) The original CAPLines was approved with a maturity exceeding 12 months; or 

 (2) The CAPLines is extended past its original maturity, providing the extension is to only 

effect collections, with no further disbursements. 

 b. Interest rates.

 (1) The SBA's standard interest rate provisions are applicable to all CAPLines subprograms loans. Since no commitment can exceed 5 years, the maximum initial 

interest rate cannot exceed the minimum prime rate as published in the Money Rate 

section of the Wall Street Journal for the date the application is received by SBA, plus 

2.25 percent (Prime + 2.25 percent). 

 (2) As an inducement for the lenders to make small loans, the Agency has permitted the 

lenders to charge (see 13 CFR  120.215): 

 (a) Interest rates as high as 2 percent over the standard rate for loans of $25,000 or 

less (Prime + 4.25 percent). 

 (b) Interest rates as high as 1 percent over the standard rate for loans over $25,000 

but not exceeding $50,000 (Prime + 3.25 percent). 

 the lender availed themselves of the ability to charge an interest rate higher 

than prime plus 2.25 percent which raises the loan over one of small loan 

incentive thresholds as noted above ($25,000/$50,000), the interest rate must be 

adjusted accordingly. 

 (3) Interest computations for all CAPLines can be based on either the daily (simple 

interest) or average daily outstanding balance. The method chosen by the lender is 

stated in the authorization. Once the method has been established, it must remain the 

same throughout the term of the loan. 

 c. Lender Servicing Fees.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-iv 

 d. Maturity, renewals, and extensions.

 (1) A renewal continues an existing loan along with its original terms and conditions, 

except maturity and other specifically changed conditions, in place so that both 

disbursements and collections can continue. The maturity of all CAPLines can not 

exceed 60 months including all renewals. Renewals, in this context, mean lengthening 

the original or modified maturity to permit both additional disbursements and 

collections. A renewal does not constitute a new loan. 

 For loans approved under CAPLines, lenders are permitted to charge an annual fee of up to 2 

percent of the outstanding loan balance for extraordinary servicing, when justified and 

approved by SBA, in addition to the guaranty fee and actual closing costs. This fee must be 

based on either the average daily outstanding balance or the average monthly outstanding 

balance times 0.167 percent. Lenders may charge servicing fees in excess of the 2 percent 

limit for loans approved under the Standard Asset Based sub-program, subject to certain 

restrictions. 

 (2) Extensions are made to only effect collections. All CAPLines can be extended past 

original maturity and the 60 month limit, but no new disbursements are permitted when 

an extension is approved. An extension may require that the loan be termed out with 

payments amortized over an established period based on the business' traditional 

repayment ability. 

 (3) When a short term loan secured by only current assets is termed out, it becomes 

prudent to require additional collateral, including fixed assets (business or personal) to 

assist in repayment. 

 (4) All CAPLines must be structured so there is some form of exit strategy built into the 

repayment terms. This provides the loan's administrator with a degree of control to 

make sure the loan will be paid out by maturity. Since these types of loans can be for 

short periods, maturity can occur relatively quickly after initial disbursement. The PM 

staff must be aware of the anticipated maturity for each CAPLines and understand that 

the participant must generally need to move quickly if full payment is not to be 

obtained when due, particularly since the collateral is so volatile. 

 e. Collateral considerations.

 (1) All CAPLines are to be secured by either specific or generic short term current assets, 

along with personal guarantees of all individuals owning 20 percent or more of the 

operating concern. There are no restrictions on taking fixed assets to bolster the 

collateral position, but securing a CAPlines with fixed assets in lieu of proper 

monitoring and control of inventories and/or receivables is not authorized. Additional 

collateral requirements are listed under each sub-program. 

 (2) In addition, taking all assets to secure a line of credit will usually strap a small business 

concern. When a CAPLines is increased, taking additional collateral must only be 

done as an exception, with justification. 

 (3) Control of the collateral is essential for any CAPLines loan because the conversion of 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-v

 (2) An existing CAPlines can be increased in the same manner as presently provided for 

partially disbursed loans, except

the current assets from inventory or labor and materials to receivables and finally to 

cash creates the opportunity for repayment. As long as the proceeds generated from 

operations are applied against the loan's balance, repayment will occur. 

 (4) Each of the sub-programs under the CAPLines umbrella has a method for controlling 

the cash received from the liquidation of the collateral securing the loan. 

 (5) The SBA must also consider both the existing and future financing needs of the 

business when restructuring or servicing the required collateral. 

 f. Additional collateral with extensions.

 (1) While short term loans are generally considered to be self liquidating because the cash 

received from the conversion of current assets is applied against the loan's balance. 

However, reliance upon the continued existence of specific current assets when a loan 

is termed out and repayment no longer occurs with the current assets are converted to 

cash is very limited. Once a loan is termed out, repayment comes from the borrower's 

cash flow at pre-determined intervals (usually monthly). 

 (2) When a short term loan is extended for purposes of affecting collection activity, the 

reliance on the existing short term assets may prove tenuous for the protection of the 

Government. 

 (3) When providing an extension to any CAPLines loan, full consideration for requiring 

additional collateral needs to be made a part of the recommendations in the 327 action 

approving the extension, and justification is required if additional collateral will not be 

acquired. 

 g. Increases in loan amount (SBA Form 327).

 (1) A CAPLines can be made on a revolving basis, with continual draws or advances, as 

well as continual payments throughout the term, as long as the outstanding balance 

does not exceed the approved amount. For purposes of complying with SOP 50 10, a 

CAPLines must not be considered "fully disbursed" until one cash cycle before 

maturity. 

 the amount of the increase must be limited to onethird of the original loan amount and the increase can only be provided one time. All 

increases are subject to permissible SBA maximums, as cited in SOP 50 10. An SBA 

guaranty fee will be due and 

 payable from the lender in the same manner as provided for other increases in the 

guaranteed portion of a loan. All increases must be based upon the lender's justifiable 

request and are to be processed and recommended by a member of the CLSC. 

 (3) When a borrower has justified an increase to their existing CAPLines in excess of the 

one-third limit, consideration can be given for a second loan, made on a term basis 

with monthly principal and interest payments. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-vi 

 (4) This second loan can be guaranteed by SBA, subject to the $750,000 maximum. The 

proceeds of the term loan can be used to finance new work, generating new 

receivables. The borrower would therefore not have to draw upon the CAPLines loan 

to accomplish this new effort. The existing receivables which had previously been 

either generated or advanced against as part of the CAPLines, must be converted to 

cash and applied against the outstanding CAPLines balance. The borrower will then 

have the ability to draw upon the increased availability of the CAPLines. The 

borrower would also begin to make monthly payments on the term loan. 

 (5) Under this process the term loan does not directly pay down the CAPLines. Instead, 

the term loan allows the borrower to generate new business without having to draw 

upon the CAPLines. This means that as existing CAPLines assets are converted to 

cash, the CAPLines balance decreases. The term loan allows the business to continue 

to generate cash which will bring the CAPlines balance down to an amount generally 

equal to the term loan. After this occurs the borrower can continue to operate with a 

CAPlines that has new borrowing ability and a term loan that addresses the business' 

permanent working capital needs. 

 h. Forms applicable to CAPLines.

 Due to the short term nature of all CAPLines, certain data is necessary for the adequate 

servicing of these loans. Select forms have been developed for use by lenders and SBA for 

this program. Forms with a prefix of CAP are applicable to all CAPLines. Forms with an AB 

in the prefix are applicable for the two asset based sub-programs and the SAB prefix forms are 

only applicable to the Standard Asset Based sub-program. 

 Forms marked with an omega (Ω) are always required. Lenders may substitute their own 

forms for the example forms not marked with an omega providing they furnish the same basic 

information and are satisfactory to SBA before being used. 

 (2) SBA Form 1050 Ω, "Settlement Sheet."

 (1) SBA Form 1502 Ω, "Guaranty Loan Status & Lender Remittance Form."

 Loan status of every CAPLines must be reported on the same SBA 1502 as any other 

7(a) loans. When a CAPLines is made on a revolving basis, the loan is not considered 

fully disbursed until the exit period begins. Therefore, most of the time the SBA 1502 

will likely reflect an outstanding balance as well as an undisbursed balance. Only if 

the outstanding balance as of the last day of the quarter happens to coincide with the 

full approved loan amount, must there not be an undisbursed balance shown. The 

combination of the disbursed and undisbursed columns must always equal the 

approved loan amount.

 (a) SBA's Form 1050 Ω is to be used at the time of initial disbursement of all SBA 

7(a) loans. Since CAPLines involve numerous advances and the standard SBA 

1050 is designed to report single draws, a new form (SBA Form CAP 1050 Ω) 

has been established to report all subsequent disbursements. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

A28-vii

 (b) SBA Form 1050 Ω, "Lender's Semi-Annual Funds Disbursement Report," is to 

be completed by the lender on a semi annual basis (October 31, and March 31) 

and sent to the SBA office servicing the loan. 

 (3) Forms to report fees.

 SBA Form 159 (Ω) must be used to report all compensation the lender or 

representative charges the applicant/borrower in connection with all CAPLines, except 

those processed under the Standard Asset Based sub-program which must use the 

modified SBA Form SAB 159A to report the anticipated compensation and SBA Form 

SAB 159B to report actual compensation every 6 months over the life of the loan. 

These special compensations agreements have been established to accommodate the 

pilot basis unrestricted fee provisions for SAB loans. 

 i. Review of reports.

 (1) It must be the responsibility of SBA servicing personnel to review all reports submitted 

by the lender and borrower in connection with a CAPLines loan. Forms required semiannually are to be included when the participant submits the March 31, and October 

31, SBA 1502. 

 (2) Servicing personnel are responsible for reviewing the "Lender's Semi-Annual Funds 

Disbursement Report," SBA Form CAP-1050 Ω, to determine if the line is revolving in 

accordance with the terms of the authorization and to determine that advances and 

repayments are properly occurring according to the business' cash cycle, seasonal 

cycle, contract(s) performance, etc. as specified in the authorization. 

 j. Withholding tax requirement.

 (1) Tax requirements under CAPLines are the same as those for any of the other SBA loan 

programs. Applicants under this program must be current on payroll taxes or have an 

IRS approved plan for repayment which is in good standing at the time of initial 

disbursement. Since all CAPlines include working capital for the payment of labor, all 

CAPLines must have a depository plan in place for the payment of future withholding 

taxes. 

 (2) If the lender should make disbursements for the borrower's payroll, the lender must 

deduct all payroll taxes and make appropriate direct deposits to the Federal and State 

authorities. This is a prudent management practice, providing protection to the lender 

and SBA because of the provisions of the Federal Tax Lien Act of 1966. This Act 

holds the lender liable for unpaid income tax withholdings when the lender's advances 

are used for payroll purposes and the lender had knowledge of a deficiency in tax 

remittances. 

 (3) If the direct deposits are not made by the participating lender, the lender will require 

the borrower to submit a copy of SBA Form 941,"Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax 

Return," within 3 weeks after the end of each quarter and have stapled to it a copy of 

the bank's receipt where the withholdings were deposited. 
SOP 50 50 4A

EFFECTIVE DATE: NOVEMBER 2, 1998

A28-viii 

4. Servicing of Both Asset Based Caplines.

 k. Zero balance period requirement.

 (1) There is no requirement that a zero balance be maintained for any particular time 

period (clean up period) on any revolving CAPLines with the exception of loans made 

under the Seasonal sub-program (CAS) loan. However, prudent lending must be used 

as circumstances dictate. If the lender and the SBA should require a clean-up period, it 

must be noted in the authorization. 

 (2) If a clean up period is required in the authorization, the lender must note, on an annual 

or semi-annual basis, in the "Lender's Semi-Annual Funds Disbursement Report," SBA 

Form 1050 Ω, whether the borrower is in compliance. 

 l. SBA oversight.

 The AA/FA, in coordination with field offices, must review selected CAPLines case files. If 

needed, the review will include contact with the lender and borrowers to review the loan 

application documents, servicing and reporting documents, and to assess the overall health of 

the program. SBA reserves the right to review and examine both borrower and lender records, 

collateral, etc. as needed, to determine the extent of compliance with SBA's rules and 

regulations, standard operating procedures, and the terms and conditions of the authorization. 

 m. Right of offset.

 If the borrower incurs financial difficulty or other situation which constitutes a serious default 

under the terms and conditions of this loan, the lender must, to the extent allowed by law, 

exercise its right of offset in servicing the account. All funds received must be applied or paid 

against outstanding balances prior to the lender requesting that SBA honor its guaranty. 

 n. Honoring of the guaranty.

 Under CAPLines, the lender agrees as a condition of initial disbursement and stated in the 

authorization, to liquidate the current working capital assets that secure the line before SBA 

will honor its guaranty. Once the deficient balance is established and the lender seeks a 

purchase, SBA will have to assure itself, as it does in all other guaranty lending programs, that 

prudent lending practices, as required in the SBA 750, were utilized in the making, servicing, 

and liquidation of the line of credit. 

 o. Maintenance of documentation and reports.

 All required documentation must be maintained by the lender and made available to SBA for 

inspection, at its option, during normal banking hours, until the guaranty obligation of the 

SBA has expired or is terminated. 

 If further guidance is desired, comments must be forwarded to the Office of Borrower and 

Lender Servicing in Headquarters. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-ix

 a. Introduction.

 (1) The Standard Asset Based and Small Asset Based sub-programs are both part of the 

CAPLines umbrella. The requirements for servicing these loans is based on an 

understanding that: These loans are actually lines of credit that are extended on a 

revolving only basis; they are collateralized by current assets (accounts receivables 

and/or inventory); disbursement is based upon the value of an acceptable portion of the 

current assets that collateralize the line; and the collateral being financed has to be sold 

in order to generate the funds for repayment. 

 (2) The heart of the asset based sub-programs is their ability to support lenders in their 

efforts to provide businesses with short term financing, based on the business' cash 

cycle rather than its cash flow over an established period of time. The servicing 

procedures are established to provide assurances that the revolving feature is 

maintained which means that principal payments are made in relation to the advances 

and tied to the cash cycle, not the cash flow of the business. 

 (3) Disbursements against the line and repayment of principal back to the line must be 

made throughout the term of the loan in relation to the borrower's cash cycle. No 

provisions exist to permit the payment of interest only past the conclusion of one cash 

cycle following initial disbursement. 

 (4) All personnel servicing asset based loans must keep abreast of all aspects of the 

program as noted in this CAPlines Program Servicing Guidelines as well as in the 

Program Guide for Financing. 

 b. Cash cycle lending.

 (1) Cash-cycle lending is highly specialized. Many lenders do not provide this type of 

credit extension because of the risk associated with the borrower not applying the cash 

collected from the liquidation (conversion) of the current assets financed with the 

proceeds against the outstanding balance is high. In addition many small businesses do 

not need this type of financing, as it is usually only needed by businesses that extend 

credit to other businesses. 

 (2) A borrower may not appear to demonstrate the capacity to generate a sufficient cash 

flow to repay the installments required to satisfactorily amortize intermediate or long 

term debt, but may still have the capacity to meet the repayment terms of a properly 

operating line of credit. 

 (3) The cycle is generally defined as the time between when cash is used to acquire assets 

(which are to be sold in the normal course of business) to the time when cash is 

collected as a result of the sale of those same assets. Most businesses need to be able 

to continually sell to stay in business, but when they sell on terms, a sale is only an 

increase (debit) to accounts receivable. It is not until the purchasing customer pays 

their account payable that a business receives the cash from the sale and can reduce its 

accounts receivables (credit). 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-x 

 (4) Since the income from any given sale is not available to pay for additional purchases 

until the end of the cycle for a particular sale, the business needs other sources of cash 

to use to replace sold assets. This need for alternative sources generally occurs in 

businesses that provide credit terms to their purchasing customers. 

 (5) Asset based borrowers use the value of their existing accounts receivable and inventory 

to borrow against, so they can have sufficient cash to acquire new current assets while 

they wait for the existing current assets to be converted to cash. Proceeds received 

from the collection of accounts receivable and cash from inventory sales repay the 

loan. Since collections are applied against the loan's balance, a business continually 

needs to borrow to obtain replacement assets. Borrowing is generally secured by 

inventory and accounts receivables which were financed with loan proceeds. 

 (6) The business, therefore, uses its short term assets, which will become cash in the 

future, to have working capital available in the present. The most important 

component of this type of lending is that once the proceeds are actually generated, the 

business has acquired repayment ability and these proceeds need to be used to pay back 

the loan, rather than be available to the business. Otherwise, the business would have 

twice the cash from a single sale and the lender would not get repaid. This type of 

financing is referred to as asset based lending (ABL). 

 (7) Asset based lending broadly entails assessing a business' short term working capital 

needs to derive a loan amount, determining the maximum borrowing amount after 

evaluating the current assets which will collateralize the loan, and establishing 

accounting procedures for continual draws and repayments of funds over the term of 

the line of credit. 

 

 c. Lender responsibility and authority.

 (1) It is of the utmost importance that the lender be able to immediately recognize 

borrower deterioration and be able to curtail credit and/or commence liquidation of 

collateral, when necessary. It is imperative that the lender, maintain a constant watch 

on collateral flow, financial performance, internal reporting practices and the quantity 

and quality of the assets pledged. 

 (2) Lenders are expected to utilize all the disbursement and repayment controls necessary 

to ensure that an asset based loan maintains its revolving nature and otherwise properly 

operates. The control requirements are developed from data provided at the time of 

original processing and included in each authorization. SBA Form AB4 (Ω) provides 

information on the current asset practices of the applicant and is required for both asset 

based sub-programs. Servicing staff must review this form to gain insight into these 

practices. 

 (3) With all asset based loans, the lender has the authority to take immediate action to 

remedy any adverse condition. In addition, lenders have authority to increase controls 

as deemed necessary for non-performing loans without SBA's concurrence. Relaxation 

of any controls required in the authorization requires SBA's concurrence. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xi

 d. Authorization conditions.

 The authorization specifies the covenants required of the borrower. Violations of these 

covenants need not always reflect trouble, nor a termination of the lending, but alternatively, 

the potential for a restructuring before there is a default or insolvency. 

 e. Disbursements.

 (1) The lender may make advances at any time before the beginning of the last cash cycle 

prior to maturity, providing the borrower is current on all principal and interest 

payments and in substantial compliance with the terms and conditions of the 

authorization. 

 (2) Lender justification and SBA approval is required in order for disbursements to be 

made after the last cash cycle before maturity has commenced. No disbursements must 

be made after maturity. 

 f. Borrowing base certificate.

 (1) Both asset based sub-programs require the use of a borrowing base certificate 

(certificate) which is submitted by the borrower and used by the lender to determine 

the borrowing base, or the amount that the lender may advance to the borrower at a 

particular time. The certificate lists all current assets of the borrower, including those 

which may not be eligible for inclusion in the borrowing base computation. 

 (2) Assets that are less likely to be converted to cash must be eliminated from the 

certificate, e.g., receivables more than three times the normal term, or 30 days past 

extended terms (sales date), as well as those receivables due from affiliated companies, 

and work in progress inventory. 

 (3) The aggregate face value of eligible current assets must be used to form the borrowing 

base. Various assets that are not accepted in the certificate, may still serve as viable 

collateral for the loan. The determination of eligible accounts receivable and inventory 

is accomplished in the certificate in order to determine the dollars that may be 

advanced. (See section g. below.) 

 (4) In addition certificates need to include a reconciliation section which reports the 

movement (creation and collection) of the current assets between successive 

certificates. 

 (5) A current borrowing base certificate is required at least monthly even if there are no 

advances within that specified period and may be obtained with each advance to 

determine the amount that can be disbursed. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xii 

 g. Advance rate.

 Throughout the term of an asset based loan, advances are made by the lender for any 

authorized identifiable and legitimate short term business purposes including: support of 

growth; use in exporting; financing seasonal needs; contract financing; flexibility to take 

advantage of specific opportunities; other short term needs; or a combination of any of these 

purposes. 

 The lender agrees to advance the funds and service the line as agreed in the authorization. 

 (1) The advance rate is the percentage amount loaned against the face value of eligible 

receivables and inventory. 

 (a) The maximum advance rate on accounts receivable cannot exceed 80 percent of 

the eligible receivables (less allowances for dilution of receivable values 

occurring through charge backs, returns, bad debt allowances, and contra 

account write downs, etc.). 

 (b) The maximum advance rate for inventory is 50 percent. It is typically based 

upon the lesser of the sum of the direct material plus labor cost in 

manufacturing, or the invoice cost less discounts of resale goods in wholesale 

distribution. The advance rates will be unique for each case depending upon 

the various factors mentioned. 

 (c) Unless there is a very long manufacturing cycle or a very good borrower 

history and financial condition, only minor (if any) advances must be made 

against intermediate work in process since little can be realized through 

liquidation. 

 (2) Exceptions to the advance rate are discussed in the section titled Lender Unilateral 

Authority, Maximum Change in the Advance Rate. 

 h. Repayment of principal and interest.

 (1) While there are no requirements for reducing the line's principal balance on a monthly 

basis, principal must be reduced in accordance with the cash cycle of the business. 

There are no provisions to permit interest only payments for any period exceeding the 

borrower's cash cycle. 

 (2) Borrowers must make their interest payments on a monthly basis. The revolving 

feature must be maintained by the borrower. This is accomplished through the process 

of drawing funds, increasing the current assets, and repaying principal when the cash is 

received from the sale of these assets. This is all done in relation to their cash cycle. 

 (3) The lender must report all draws from the line and payments back to the line on an 

SBA 1050. The SBA 1050 Ω "Settlement Sheet," must be executed at the time of 

initial disbursement to report that transaction. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xiii

 (4) Subsequent disbursements are to be recorded on SBA CAP 1050 (Ω). This report is to 

be included when the lender submits their April 30, and October 30, SBA 1502 reports. 

 i. Review of SBA Form CAP 1050 Ω.

 (1) Maintaining the revolving feature in asset based lending is the primary responsibility 

of the lender. When a loan is not revolving in relation to its cash cycle or actual need, 

increased servicing will be required to re-institute the revolving nature of the loan. 

 (2) Servicing personnel must review the "Lender's Semi-Annual Funds Disbursement 

Report," SBA Form CAP 1050 Ω to determine that the line is revolving in accordance 

with the terms of the authorization and to be ensured that the borrower is correctly 

utilizing the line in relation to its cash cycle. The authorization must state the cash 

cycle in days. With an analysis of the cash cycle and the loan amount, the analyst must 

be able to determine the amount of total draws the borrower should have taken during 

the period covered by the disbursement report. 

 (3) One of the key measurements to any revolving loan is the total amount of draws 

against the line and number of times a business uses it. If a business has a cash to cash 

cycle of 60 days, then the business must have total draws of up to 6 times the amount 

of the loan (365/60 = 6). If the loan amount is $100,000, the borrower must have 

drawn up to $300,000 over a 6 month period. If the line is being properly used in the 

above example but the total draws for the six month period only equals $210,000, the 

approved amount may be too high or exceed actual needs by $30,000. 

 (4) The review must consist of a comparison of the total draws and repayments in relation 

to the total loan amount and the total dollars disbursed, both in the last 6 month period, 

and over the entire loan's term. 

 (5) If this same business was drawing up to the amount of the loan and keeping only the 

interest current, it would not be revolving. If either Asset Based sub-program loan is 

not revolving, additional requirements are to be placed on the borrower to ensure that 

the revolving nature of the loan is maintained. (See section under Lender Unilateral 

Authority titled Workout Status.) 

 (6) When a business receives the cash it generated by having the use of asset based 

proceeds but does not reduce its balance, the line has to be considered as negatively 

operating. This is a significant "Red Flag" which must result in immediate 

consultation between SBA and the participant. 

 (7) After review, the report must be initialed/dated by the servicing loan officer and 

properly filed and maintained in the loan's docket file together with any additional 

documentation/comments. 

 (8) The disbursement report also allows the Agency to determine the amount of leverage 

its revolving loan programs are creating for small business and to indicate the degree to 

which the lines are truly revolving. 

 j. Monitoring and controls.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xiv 

 (3) Funds control covers the cash (or near cash) the business generates as a result of 

having the use of asset based proceeds. This type of control could include requiring a 

borrower's customers to remit payments via: collecting joint payee checks; obtaining 

dominion over the borrower's existing post office box where collections are sent (block 

box); or establishing an independent post office box under the control of the lender 

(lock box). However, these collections methods are not required

 (1) The guaranty which SBA provides its participants is designed to cover the risk 

associated with a borrower's failure to generate sufficient sales to repay the debt 

guaranteed by the Agency. Our guaranty does not cover the risk associated with a 

lender's failure to adequately close, secure, or service the credit, or maintain 

compliance with the deferred participation agreement (SBA Form 750) or individual 

authorization. Therefore, the responsibility that an asset based loan is properly booked 

and serviced so the loan revolves is the lender's. The methods for achieving this 

responsibility include the use of adequate monitoring techniques in conjunction with 

periodic reviews, plus sufficient control of the funds generated as a result of having the 

line of credit. 

 (2) Monitoring is the continual review of the borrower's compliance with loan covenants, 

payment plans, tax obligations, and credit proceedings to determine the borrower's 

management of the collateral. Monitoring includes a review of the borrowing base 

certificate and financial statements with aging schedules to determine the maximum 

amount that can be outstanding during the effective period of the certificate. This 

process also includes a determination of the maximum amount which can be advanced 

after subtracting the existing loan balances. 

. At a minimum for 

all Asset Based loans, collections of all receivables which were advanced against must 

be applied against the loans outstanding balance. 

 (1) Since an asset based loan may have a maturity of up to 60 months, the original loan 

amount may prove unsatisfactory in latter years, particularly as a business grows and 

its need for a larger line of credit increases. All asset based loans may be increased in 

the same manner as is presently provided for on partially disbursed loans except

 k. Increases in loan amount (327 actions).

 the 

amount of the increase must be limited to one-third of the original loan amount, can 

only be done once over the life of the loan, and must be processed and recommended 

by a member of the servicing office's staff. 

 (2) All increases are subject to permissible SBA maximums, as cited in SOP 50 10. An 

SBA guaranty fees will be due and payable from the lender in the same manner as 

provided for other increases in the guaranteed portion of short term loans. 

 (3) For purposes of complying with SOP 50 10, an asset based loan must not be considered 

"fully disbursed" until maturity. 

 (4) No increases must be made without justification from the lender. This justification 

must relate back to the short term working capital needs of the borrower. The Agency 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xv

does not want to commit excessive loan funds to the detriment of overall funding 

authority or unduly restrict the amount approved so it limits the operation or adequate 

growth of the borrower. The recommending official must justify the loan amount in 

their report. Comments that support the level authorized have to be provided. 

 (5) All increases must be based on a lender's justifiable request and must be recommended 

by a servicing loan officer in the designated district office's servicing division or by a 

loan officer in the servicing center, where applicable, using a 327 action. 

 (6) In order to consider a request to increase the loan amount, some basic concepts must be 

understood. They are: 

 (a) Determining the cash cycle to confirm that there have not been any changes; 

and 

 (b) Verifying the requested increase. 

 l. Determining the cash cycle.

 (1) The cash to cash cycle of a business is comprised of elements which are traditionally 

measured by the turnover ratios of selected current assets and liabilities. The accounts 

receivable turnover ratio is a general indicator of receivable quality. Credit sales are 

divided by accounts receivable (A/R) to obtain the A/R turnover ratio. 

 NOTE: Caution must be used in accounting for non-credit sales.

 A declining ratio usually indicates a dropping quality of receivables and may indicate a 

restructuring of terms is required. 

 (2) The inventory turnover ratio gives insight into inventory quality. Cost of goods sold 

are divided by inventory to get the ratio. Generally the higher ratios indicate that the 

inventory is moving faster. This is usually viewed favorably, but it may also indicate 

inventory shortages. 

 (3) Businesses with a low inventory turnover could have obsolete items or be overstocked. 

 (4) The trade related accounts payable turnover ratio shows how often a business pays its 

creditors. Cost of goods sold are divided by trade payables to determine the ratio. 

Businesses that have a declining ratio over time are usually experiencing a cash 

shortage, but they could also be expanding their trade credit. 

 (5) Converting ratios into days allows the loan officer to determine the cycle's length. 

Adding the receivable plus inventory turnovers and subtracting the payable turnover, 

all expressed in days, equals the cash cycle of the business being evaluated. Averaging 

the beginning and ending levels of each asset and liability should eliminate seasonal 

variances and assist in the analysis. 

 (6) After an analysis of the applicant's financial information, the lender must establish the 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xvi 

 LESS

cycle's time period, and SBA must concur. A condition must be included in the 

authorization that states the original cash cycle for the loan and establishes the 

guidelines for the allowable time difference between disbursements and repayment of 

principal. The cycle's definition must be determined after analyzing the small business 

company's (SBC) prior three full years of statements. 

 (7) To avoid skewing, consideration must be given for the use of a weighted average 

where the most recent year will receive a weight of 3, the next oldest a weight of 2, and 

the oldest a weight of 1. 

 (8) If the cash cycle should change, the lender must notify the SBA in writing of the 

revision to the authorization with a brief explanation. 

 m. Verifying the requested increase.

 (1) The total dollar amount of any asset based loan must be based on the short term 

working capital needs of the applicant. The recommending official has to justify an 

increase in the loan amount with a 327 action based on need rather than collateral. The 

comments must indicate that the approved amount is not artificially inflated which 

would cause excessive loan funds to be committed, or unsatisfactorily low which could 

restrict operations or prevent adequate growth. 

 (2) Justification must start with a determination of the borrowers needs based upon the 

same formula used for determining the original loan amount for all asset based subprogram loan. 

 (3) The formula for determining the justifiable loan amount for an existing asset based 

borrower is: 

 HISTORICAL NET SALES (Excluding returns and bad debt allowances, 

credit memos, and other elements of dilution) - Based on the most recently 

completed full fiscal year. 

 TRADITIONAL RULE OF THUMB CASH FLOW - Herein defined 

as Net Profit and Depreciation/Amortization and other non-cash items. 

 DIVIDED BY

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 365

 ̊ ̊ ̊

 TO YIELD AVERAGE DAYS CASH REQUIRED.

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 TIMES

 ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ THE DAYS OF THE CASH TO CASH CYCLE

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Note that this formula relies upon historical sales, rather than projected sales. The 

formula is to be used to arrive at a base loan amount. 

 (4) Generally, if projected financial data is used to determine the loan amount, the 

potential for a larger loan exists. While loans can be made in an amount greater than 

the base loan amount calculation, all amounts must be justified. Any amount other 

than the base amount which the above formula yields requires additional justification. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xvii

 (a) Acquiring more capital or subordinate financial support, where it otherwise 

does not dilute the senior lender loan liens. This can also include participation 

of trade creditors and the use of inter creditor agreements. 

 (b) Acquiring more collateral or reduce the advances against existing collateral. 

 (5) For purposes of the analysis to be included in the loan report, the amount derived from 

the basic formula is self- justified. However, alternative amounts need to be justified 

by the lender and supported in the SBA officer's report. Alternative amounts are 

acceptable, providing they relate to actual business need rather than unsupported 

desire. 

 (6) The total dollar amount of any asset based loan is to be based on the short term 

working capital needs of the applicant, for the period to be covered by the line. It is 

not to be set from a determination of the value of eligible collateral that is listed on the 

borrowing base certificate and then multiplied by the applicable advance rate. 

 (7) While the product of this multiplication forms the "Borrowing Base," it does not 

adequately address a business' actual working capital need. 

 (8) As an alternative to considering an increase to an existing asset based loan, a standard 

7(a) term loan can be approved in the Finance Division, where the proceeds allow the 

borrower to generate new work while the collections from the prior work pays down 

the line. Reference paragraph 3(g) of this guide for further discussion on this method 

of increasing loans. 

 (9) As previously outlined in this document, draws/advances from the line and repayments 

back to the asset based line can be made, as provided herein, throughout the term (prior 

to the last cash cycle before maturity) of the loan as long as the outstanding balance 

does not exceed the approved amount. 

 n. Loan restructuring.

 (1) It is of the utmost importance that the lender be able to immediately recognize 

borrower deterioration and be able to curtail credit or liquidate the collateral, if 

necessary. Therefore, it is imperative that the lender maintain a constant watch on 

collateral flow, financial performance, internal reporting practices, and the quantity and 

quality of the assets pledged. 

 (2) The loan authorization must specify the covenants to be required of the borrower. 

Violations of these covenants need not reflect trouble, nor a termination of the lending, 

but alternatively, the potential need for restructuring before there is a monetary default 

or insolvency. 

 (3) With asset based loans, the lender has the authority to take immediate action to remedy 

any adverse condition. Some of the action a lender can take when an asset based line of 

credit is not performing as required may include the following: 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xviii 

 (c) Obtaining conditional or actual dominion of the receivables by operating a 

postal block or lock box, wherein receivable proceeds are directed to the cash 

collateral account and perpetually

 (c) Adjusting pricing and fees. 

 (d) Obtaining credit enhancements or outside guarantees. 

 (e) Retaining a qualified financial consultant. 

 (f) Paying down the loan to acceptable levels. 

 (g) Continuing the financing, but increase the intensity of the level of collateral 

control. This may mean lock boxes are employed or a third party is utilized to 

make certain that there is conditional dominion of the assets should things 

deteriorate further. 

 (4) The degree of increased servicing will depend on the circumstances of the case. Some 

additional alterations to the conditions of the loan could include: 

 (a) Requiring the borrower's customers to remit their payments via a joint payee 

process checks to the lender and small business concern; 

 (b) Establishing a demand deposit account (DDA) or other type of controlled cash 

collateral account, where the borrower's receivable collections are deposited; 

 applied against the loan; and 

 (d) Converting the outstanding balance from a revolving to a term loan with no 

further draws and the establishment of monthly payments of principal and 

interest. 

 o. Conditions of default.

 (1) Any one or more of the following must be a default under an Asset Based loan, unless 

waived by lender. 

 (a) Borrower fails to pay any indebtedness when due. 

 (b) Borrower breaches any term, provision, warranty or representation under the 

security agreement, or under any other agreement or contract between borrower 

and lender or obligation of the borrower to lender. 

 (c) Any involuntary petition in bankruptcy filed against the borrower and not 

dismissed within 60 days. 

 (d) The appointment of any receiver or trustee of all or a substantial portion of the 

assets of the borrower. 

 (e) The borrower, or any of its subsidiaries or guarantors become insolvent or 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xix

unable to pay debts as they mature, make a general assignment for the benefit 

of creditors, or voluntarily file any bankruptcy or similar law. 

 (f) Any financial statements (balance sheet, profit and loss statement, aging reports 

etc.), certificates or schedules, or other statements furnished by the borrower to 

lender which prove false or incorrect in any material aspect. 

 (g) Any levies of attachments, executions, tax assessments, or similar processes 

issued against the collateral and not released within 10 days. 

 (h) If any of the collateral pledged as security for this loan is sold in bulk or outside 

the normal course of business, the entire debt must become due and payable at 

the option of the lender, unless written permission for alternative repayment is 

provided by the lender. 

 (i) Suspension of business operations for more than 5 days in any calendar year. 

 NOTE: These examples of default situations are provided here so they may be included 

in the authorization.

 p. When conditions of default occur.

 (1) The following represent examples of potential cures to default situations which lenders 

may choose when administering asset based loans and are provided herein so they may 

be included in the authorization. The lender must respond to the adverse changes or 

indications of deterioration in the borrower's condition. Lender must: 

 (a) Declare any portion of the indebtedness that is over-advanced or unsecured 

immediately due and payable; 

 (b) Provide the borrower with notification of default and a specific written time 

frame in which they will cure said default, when default is correctable in a 

commercially feasible manner; and 

 (c) Advise SBA of borrower's default or delinquency in regard to the loan or other 

borrower financial obligations of which the lender has knowledge and provide 

outline of intended action. 

 (2) Lender may do any one or more of the following without SBA's concurrence, 

providing notification of action is provided SBA: 

 (a) Enforce the security interest given pursuant to the UCC or other applicable law; 

 (b) Execute the lender's rights of offset to recover up to the amount eligible of the 

indebtedness that is over advanced or unsecured; 

 (c) Require the borrower to assemble the collateral and the records pertaining to 

receivables and make them available to the lender at a place designated by the 

lender; 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xx 

 (1) The lender has the unilateral authority to increase

 (d) Use, in connection with any assembly or disposition of the collateral, any 

trademarks, trade names, trade style, copyright, patent right, or technical 

process used or utilized by the borrower; and 

 (e) Enter the premises of the borrower and take possession of the collateral and of 

the records pertaining to the receivables and any other collateral. 

 (3) The lender may do the following, providing SBA's concurrence is obtained prior to 

taking these actions: 

 (a) Declare all indebtedness secured hereby immediately due and payable; 

 (b) Compromise claims and settle receivables for less than face value, either with 

or without prior notice to the borrower; and 

 (c) To the extent allowed by law, execute a full right of offset and apply all funds 

against the outstanding ABL balances. This is to be accomplished prior to the 

lender requesting that SBA honor its guaranty. 

 q. Maximum change in the advance rate.

 or decrease the advance rate 

stipulated in the authorization by 5 percent (not to exceed the approved loan amount). 

This authority will be used in rare situations, with a written plan in place identifying 

how and when the loan will be returned to compliance with the original terms and 

conditions of the authorization. It is strongly recommended that the loan be returned to 

compliance within 30 days. 

 (2) The lender must document the borrower's file and fax notification of this action with 

the plan to the SBA. 

 (3) If the loan is not returned to compliance in accordance with the plan, SBA must be 

notified of the workout plan that will be implemented to bring the loan back into 

compliance or move it to in-liquidation status. By the date specified in the workout 

plan, the lender must inform SBA of the success of the plan. 

 r. Right of offset.

 If the borrower incurs financial difficulty or other situation which constitutes a serious default 

under the terms and conditions of this loan, the lender must, to the extent allowed by law, 

exercise its right of offset in servicing the account. All funds received must be applied or paid 

against outstanding asset based balances prior to the lender requesting that SBA honor its 

guaranty. 

 s. Honoring of the guaranty.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxi

 Under the asset based sub-programs, the lender agrees, as a condition of initial disbursement 

and stated in the authorization to liquidate the current working capital assets securing the line 

before SBA honors its guaranty. Once the deficient balance is established, and the lender 

seeks a purchase, SBA will have to assure itself, as it does in all other guaranty lending 

programs, that prudent lending practices, as required in SBA 750, were utilized in the making, 

servicing, and liquidation of the line of credit. 

 t. Factors to determine sufficient lender effort to liquidate.

 The following factors must be utilized by the Liquidation Division when determining if a 

lender has significantly liquidated an asset based borrower's receivables prior to requesting 

SBA to honor its guaranty. These factors must be included in the servicing section of the asset 

based (formerly GreenLine) program guide. 

 (1) The lender must make a good faith effort to collect all accounts receivable outstanding 

at the date of default. The date of default must be the date determined by the lender 

based on the events of default detailed in the authorization. Collection of the accounts 

receivable must commence on or after the date the borrower fails to cure the default. 

 (2) Good faith effort must be evidenced by the collection of not less than 50 percent of the 

outstanding balance on the loan within the first 100 days after default. However, if less 

than 50 percent of the outstanding balance is collected in the first 100 days, the lender 

may submit evidence of the effort made to collect all accounts receivable as 

justification for a lower collection. 

 (3) The lender is responsible to continue the collection effort although SBA has honored a 

request for payment under the guaranty. 

 (4) The interest allowance period of 120 days contained in the regulations and this SOP 

must be adhered to. 

 u. Maintenance of documentation & reports.

 All required documentation must be maintained by the lender and made available to SBA for 

inspection, at its option, during normal banking hours, until the guaranty obligation of the 

SBA has expired or is terminated. 

 If further guidance is desired, comments must be forwarded to the Office of Borrower and 

Lender Servicing, Headquarters, Washington, D.C. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxii 

5. Servicing Requirements for Standard Asset Based (SAB) Caplines.

 a. Introduction.

 (1) SBA's standard asset based CAPLines loans are available to small businesses which are 

unable to obtain revolving lines of credit without guaranty support and who show the 

ability to comply with the servicing requirements that are imposed to prudently assure 

that the revolving nature of these loans is maintained. 

 (2) The SAB CAPLines are considered to have enough risk associated with them that the 

authorization must include requirements for the lender to make both initial and periodic 

on site examinations of the loan's current assets which serve as collateral and form a 

borrowing base. Also required must be conditions for the continual monitoring of 

financial data and control of the proceeds generated as a result of the business having 

the use of the SAB proceeds. 

 b. Approval of SBA personnel to service SAB loans.

 (1) The servicing of SAB loans must be more comprehensive than for the regular 7(a) 

guaranty loans. Standard asset based loans may only be serviced at a "designated" SBA 

district office or servicing center. At a minimum, the designated office's chief of 

portfolio management or servicing loan officer must be trained in either GreenLine or 

asset based lending (which is included in a Commercial Credit and Analysis Courses 

conducted after July 31, 1995) in order to take any servicing actions on SAB loans. 

 (2) Due to the fact that the Standard Asset Based sub-program is considered a high risk 

loan, these guidelines will set out the areas that will be different from those elsewhere 

in this SOP. 

 c. Approval of lender participants.

 Lenders participating in the Standard Asset Based sub-program must complete a Lender 

Qualification Survey and be approved as a standard asset based lender before being able to 

submit applications under this sub-program. 

 d. Lender responsibilities.

 (1) Lenders are expected to utilize all the disbursement and repayment monitoring and 

collateral controls necessary to ensure that an SAB loan maintains its revolving nature, 

and otherwise properly operates. 

 (2) As a minimum, the acceptable administration of an SAB loan must include an initial 

and semi-annual examination of selected quantities of assets, plus the quantification 

and qualification of those assets which are susceptible to dilution, shrinkage, or 

depreciating values. 

 (3) The initial examination, monitoring, and control requirements are developed from 

information provided by the applicant at the time of the lender's original processing. 

Lenders have the authority to increase controls, as deemed necessary, for non-
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxiii

 (2) The lender is required to make full disclosure and have the borrower acknowledge 

ALL FEES to be, and that are actually, charged in connection with both making and 

maintaining these loans throughout their term. The SBA AB 159 A, is to be used to 

disclose all fees that the lender anticipates charging the borrower and is submitted with 

the original application. 

 (3) Fee disclosure updates are required on a semiannual basis. The SBA Form AB 159-

B (Ω), "Pilot Compensation Agreement for Services Provided in Connection with 

Standard Asset Based Application and Loan Made in Participation with the U.S. Small 

Business Administration," must be used by the lender to report on a semi-annual basis, 

for each 6-month reporting period. 

 This report must be submitted by the lender when forwarding the April 30, and 

October 31, Quarterly Guaranty Loan Status Report to SBA. Borrower 

acknowledgement and acceptance of all fees is required as part of this form. 

 (4) The SBA loan officer must review this form. If an increase in servicing fees from the 

previous period is noticed, it may be an indication of additional monitoring by the 

lender which may signify that a problem exits. The SBA loan officer must contact the 

lender for clarification. 

 (5) If any of these fees are outstanding at the time of liquidation, they must not be added to 

the principal balance of the loan. The SBA must not pay these fees when honoring the 

guaranty. Lender fees are not guaranteed by the SBA. 

 f. Collateral considerations.

 (1) All SAB CAPLines must be secured by a first lien position on the assets being 

financed as the proceeds are designed to generate new current assets. In most cases, 

pledged assets must consist of accounts receivable and/or inventories (raw materials 

performing loans without SBA's concurrence. Relaxation of any controls required in 

the authorization requires SBA's concurrence. 

 (4) Regularly submitted financial information must be reviewed in connection with 

completed field examinations. Periodic credit reviews, along with tests of adherence to 

loan documents and collateral control, including specific financial covenants, are to be 

completed at least annually. 

 (5) A detailed explanation of the servicing requirements for all SAB loans can be found in 

exhibit 1 of this document. 

 e. Lender servicing fees.

 (1) The Agency's policies regarding "Other Fees" for the Standard Asset Based subprogram are on a pilot basis. Lenders are permitted to charge the same fees they would 

normally charge their non-SBA borrowers for similar types of revolving lines of credit 

over the original term of the loan. The AA/FA can end or modify this pilot provision if 

it is determined that unreasonable fees are being charged. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxiv 

and finished goods). The line's repayment is tied directly to the sale of these assets. 

These loans are not to be approved where the primary collateral securing the line are 

fixed assets. 

 (2) An SAB CAPLines may have no other lines of credit outstanding unless the assets 

securing the other line are separate and distinct from the assets securing the SAB loan. 

 (3) There may a continuing need to monitor or control the collateral on a daily, weekly, or 

monthly basis, depending upon the size of the loan, the underlying financial strength of 

the borrower, and the volatility of the industry and/or assets in which the borrower is 

engaged. 

 g. Maturity considerations.

 (1) After start of the borrower's last cash cycle, no further disbursements must be made 

without SBA concurrence. No disbursements must be made after the loan has matured. 

 (2) The following options are available if the line has a outstanding balance at maturity. 

 (a) Pay off the loan through the recovery of the accounts receivable in the normal 

cash cycle. If it is not possible for the loan balance to be paid in full in this 

manner, one of the other alternative actions noted here must be taken. 

Notification to SBA is required.) 

 (b) Renew the line without SBA's guaranty. 

 (c) Renew the line, requesting SBA's guaranty (new application must be processed 

by the SBA Finance Division). 

 (d) Term out any outstanding balance. SBA's concurrence is required if the 

guaranty is to remain in place. There must be no new advances. 

 (Care has to be taken to ensure that when a loan is termed out it is adequately 

collateralized so that the interest of the Government is protected.) 

 (3) Liquidate the assets being financed by the SAB Loan. (SBA notification required.) 

 (4) Liquidate other assets. For further information on liquidation see the section titled 

Liquidation. (The SBA's concurrence isrequired. Other assets must be liquidated in 

accordance with the requirements set out in SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation and 

Acquired Property". 

 (5) Additional security may not be available at maturity. At this time tighter controls on 

the existing collateral often becomes necessary. When "terming out a loan," the 

balance must be amortized over a period consistent with the borrower's ability to repay 

based on cash flow, rather than cash cycle. Under these circumstances, it is important 

to maintain diligence over collateral servicing, potentially tightening the degree of 

control. At a minimum, the proceeds must be controlled even though payments are 

made on a fixed schedule rather than in relation to the cash cycle. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxv

 (6) The SBA guaranty on any line of credit expires 120 days after the maturity date of the 

loan. A renewal or extension which alters the maturity automatically extends the 

guaranty. The SBA is not obligated to purchase the guaranteed portion where the 

demand for such purchase or request to extend the loan's maturity is not received by 

SBA within 120 days after maturity of the note. 

 h. Authorization.

 (1) The authorization must specify the covenants to be required of the borrower. 

Violations of these covenants need not reflect trouble, nor a termination of the lending, 

but alternatively, the potential need for restructuring before there is a monetary default 

or insolvency. 

 (2) The servicing loan officer must be familiar with the authorization boiler plate which is 

specific to SAB loans. 

 i. Monitoring (with examinations) and controls.

 (1) As a minimum, the acceptable administration of SAB loans must include an initial and 

semi-annual examination of selected quantities of assets, plus the quantification and 

qualification of those assets which are susceptible to dilution, shrinkage, or 

depreciating values. 

 (2) In addition there may a continuing need to monitor or control the collateral to loan 

ratio on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis, depending upon the size of the loan, the 

underlying financial strength of the borrower, and the volatility of the industry and/or 

assets which the borrower is involved. 

 (3) Regularly submitted financial information must be reviewed in connection with 

completed field examinations. Periodic credit reviews, along with tests of adherence to 

loan documents and collateral control, including specific financial covenants are to be 

completed at least annually. 

 (4) Upon conclusion of the semi-annual review by the lender, SBA is to be contacted 

whenever deficiencies or discrepancies are found, so SBA may be apprised of the 

situation. 

 j. Responses to lender servicing actions.

 Any action which requires SBA's concurrence/approval must be sent to the servicing division 

of the local SBA field office or servicing center where appropriate. The SBA must respond to 

all requests within 2 business days of receipt. These requests may be sent by facsimile (FAX). 

 Depending on the urgency of the request, the lender may wish to follow-up with a phone call 

to the SBA. 

 k. Workout situations.

 (1) A workout situation can occur when the CAPLines loan is no longer in compliance 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxvi 

 (e) Increase the amount of the line with the SBA's concurrence

with the terms of the authorization. This is an action that will require more intensive 

servicing with the intention of avoiding problems in the future. At this time, the loan is 

still in regular servicing not in liquidation. 

 (2) When a loan is in workout status, the lender must notify the SBA servicing office 

personnel of this action and of the nature of the workout by telephone or fax. 

 (3) However, workout status must not be construed as an action that would automatically 

place a loan into liquidation status unless the lender clearly indicates that the workout 

is for the purpose of liquidation. 

 (4) There could be more than one occasion when a loan may be in workout status as it 

moves in and out of compliance with the authorization. With this action, a lender's 

opportunity to correct a potential problem before it is out of control should be greatly 

improved thus increasing the chances of success for the small business. 

 (5) Some situations where a workout status may be appropriate are when: 

 (a) The value of the borrowing base certificate (collateral) has deteriorated below 

that which was identified in the authorization (out of formula) placing the loan 

into a position of being over advanced. 

 (b) The borrower has difficulty making regular monthly interest and/or principal 

payments at the end of the cash cycle. 

 (6) Some actions that may be taken to bring a loan back into compliance are as follows. 

 (a) Increase monitoring of disbursements to the borrower. 

 (b) Establish tighter controls on the collection of accounts receivable. 

 (c) Increase the frequency and or intensity of field exams. 

 (d) Term out the remaining balance of the loan. 

. 

 (f) Reduce the advance rate (see section titled Lender Unilateral Authority, 

Maximum Change in the Advance Rate). 

 The lender must take great care when reducing the advance rate in order to 

avoid creating additional problems for the small business. This must be done 

only as a last resort to assist in bringing the borrower in compliance as opposed 

to stopping all advances. 

 (g) Temporarily eliminate disbursements. 

 (7) The SBA must be notified when a loan has been moved out of workout status after 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxvii

 (2) The lender must immediately telephone the local district office, followed by a fax, at 

the time it appears that they may have to begin liquidating the current assets securing 

the loan. However, prior to placing the loan into liquidation status a workout status

having returned to compliance with the conditions of the authorization. 

 l. Liquidate the loan.

 (1) The lender must liquidate all current assets securing the loan. (See section titled 

Liquidation for further information on the liquidation of CAPLines loans.) 

must be considered. 

 m. Situations placing loans in liquidation.

 (1) The normal policy guidelines, as set out in SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation and 

Acquired Property."pertaining to placing a loan into liquidation status must apply for 

SAB loans. In addition to these situations, if principal payments are not made and 

therefore the loan is not revolving or if the loan is substantially out of compliance with 

the terms of the authorization, this must also be considered as severe enough to warrant 

liquidation to commence. 

 (2) The lender must immediately advise his/her local SBA district office by telephone, to 

be followed up in writing, of the steps he/she is taking and/or plan to take. The lender 

will not be required to obtain SBA's concurrence to proceed with the liquidation. (The 

SBA's approval is required for liquidation expenses.) 

 (3) Liquidation of all other assets securing the loan must be in accordance with SOP 50 51, 

"Loan Liquidation and Acquired Property." 

 n. Application of funds while in liquidation.

 (1) When the SBA guaranty has not been purchased, the lender must apply the proceeds to 

principal first, then to interest. 

 (2) When the SBA guaranty has been purchased, the lender must apply the net proceeds to 

principal first, then to interest, and remit SBA's share of the net proceeds together with 

SBA Form 172, "Transaction Report on Loan Serviced by Lender," and an itemized 

accounting of all income and expenses to the local SBA office. 

 (3) After reviewing the submission and determining that everything is in accordance with 

the liquidation plan, the liquidation officer must advise the cashier to forward the funds 

and the SBA 172 to OFO, Denver, for application on the account (using transaction 

code 307). 

 NOTE: The lender must not send any collections from the liquidation process directly 

to OFO, Denver. (Review SOP 50 51 for more detail.)

 o. Liquidation expenses.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxviii 

 (1) A good estimate of liquidation expenses must be included in the liquidation plan. All 

liquidation expenses must be approved by the SBA. As it will probably be necessary 

for the bank to act quickly due to the nature of the collateral, they may phone the SBA 

field office for immediate approval with a follow up by fax. Approved liquidation 

expenses must be paid on a pro rata basis as noted in SOP 50 51. 

 (2) If it is necessary for the lender to respond immediately (i.e. for care and preservation of 

the collateral) and contact with the SBA is not possible, the lender may proceed. 

However, at the first possible opportunity, the lender must advise SBA of the action 

taken and of their related expenses. Some immediate actions which may be taken in 

this situation are field exams and the prompt securing of the inventory. 

 (3) The exception to this policy must be that once a lender has placed a loan into a 

workout and or liquidation status, and has notified the SBA, fees charged specifically 

for the care and preservation of the collateral (e.g., lock box, field exam, etc.) that are 

approved by the SBA and not recovered from the borrower must be shared on a pro 

rata basis when the guaranty is honored. 

 p. Conditionality of SBA guaranty.

 (1) Two key premises regarding the conditionality of an SBA guaranty are that the lender 

is expected to administer loans guaranteed by SBA in a similar manner as they would 

administer their own equivalent non-guaranteed loans and lenders must not commit 

any negligence, misrepresentation, or fraud in the making or administration of any loan 

guaranteed by SBA. Non-compliance with these premises may result in the 

cancellation or alteration of the guaranty provided by SBA to the lender. 

 (2) When SBA's asset based program was being developed, SBA realized that every lender 

did not have pre-existing policies, to administer their own asset based lines of credit 

that the Agency could rely upon for equal administration on SBA guaranteed lines of 

credit. Therefore the Agency promulgated its own minimum requirements for making 

and administering its asset based loans so that all lenders could obtain a guaranty on 

this type of credit extension. 

 (3) The act of creating these minimum standards does not alter the conditionality of SBA's 

guaranty to the lender or the established practices of the Agency for honoring its 

guaranty. Under SBA's asset based loan programs, as with any other 7(a) loan, the 

Agency is not obligated to honor its guaranty if or when it has knowledge of bank 

negligence, misrepresentation, or fraud. However, in the absence of these identifiable 

negatives and when compliance with the terms of the authorization are met by the 

Lender, the Agency is obligated to honor its guaranty. 

 (4) Regulations: 

 13 CFR  120.524. 

 When is SBA Released from liability on Its guarantee? 

 (a) SBA is released from liability on a loan guarantee (in whole or in part, within SBA's exclusive 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxix

discretion), if any of the events below occur: 

 1. The lender has failed to comply materially with any of the provisions of these regulations, the 

Loan Guarantee Agreement, or the Authorization;... 

 (5) No aspect of SBA's asset based loan programs alters this premise. There is no 

authority built into SBA's asset based programs which would increase or decrease 

SBA's long established practices with respect to the honoring of our guaranty which 

would differ from the standard conditionality or practices the Agency follows in any 

7(a) guaranty loan. 

 q. Review of annual loss rates.

 Servicing personnel must annually review the loss ratios of all lenders participating in the 

Standard Asset Based sub-program. If the loss ratio appears to be substantial, the Servicing 

Division must notify the Finance Division that a problem appears to exist. At that time, a 

strategy must be considered to reduce the loss ratio with that particular lender. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxx 

6. Servicing Requirements for Small Asset Based (SMAB) Caplines.

 (c) There is no requirement for a cash collateral account under the Small Asset 

Based sub-program. However, if a borrower fails to remit 100 percent of the 

 a. Introduction.

 (1) The SBA recognizes that all the criteria for the Standard Asset Based (SAB) program 

may not be necessary for more credit worthy small businesses needing smaller lines of 

credit, and therefore a Small Asset Based (SMAB) sub-program was established under 

CAPLines. The maximum loan amount under this sub-program must not exceed 

$200,000. 

 (2) Loans approved under the Small Asset Based sub-program must demonstrate 

capabilities to meet higher credit standards by showing repayment ability from cash 

flow based on the requested loan amount being amortized over not more than 7 years. 

 (3) Under the Small Asset Based sub-program a borrower is only required to remit to the 

lender what they collect from the pledged assets that were advanced against, as 

opposed to remitting all the proceeds (cash and near cash) collected from the sale of 

any inventory or collection from all receivables as is required in the Standard Asset 

Based sub-program. This distinction allows a small business borrower receiving a 

SAB loan to keep their proceeds from cash inventory sales and receivable collections 

from receivables not advanced against. 

 b. Lender approval.

 The ability for a lender to participate in the Small Asset Based sub-program does not require 

completion of a Lender Qualification Survey with subsequent approval of SBA. However a 

properly executed SBA 750 and/or SB 750B is required. 

 c. Servicing fees.

 The unrestricted fee provisions provided in the Standard Asset Based sub-program are not 

available for lines of $200,000 and under, but lenders may charge up to a 2 percent fee for 

extraordinary servicing, since they are required to monitor the collateral assets and reconcile 

the borrowing base certificate. 

 d. Monitoring and control.

 (1) The monitoring and control requirements for a SMAB loan are the same as for the SAB 

loan except: 

 (a) There is no requirement for on site examinations of the collateral prior to initial 

disbursement or on a semi-annual basis after disbursement. 

 (b) The borrowing base certificate is due monthly and the lender's analysis of the 

certificate is only required when submitted. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxi

collections it receives from the pledged assets which were advanced against, the 

borrower is technically in payment default. 

 (d) Under this situation the lender would have to either collect the difference 

between what a borrower collected from its customers and what was remitted 

for any given month or consider the loan in default. In this situation, the lender 

would most likely have to initiate proceedings to end the loan's revolving 

feature and term the obligation out or commence enforced collection. 

 (e) The frequency of all required reviews is lengthened so they are required less 

often. 

 (2) A detail explanation of the servicing requirements for all Small Asset Based loans can 

be found in Exhibit 1 of the this appendix. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxii 

7. Servicing of Seasonal Caplines Loans.

 (2) The limitations of one seasonal loan outstanding at a time and the 30 day out-of-debt 

requirement do not apply to agricultural enterprises because of their special nature. 

 a. Introduction.

 (1) There can be only one seasonal loan outstanding at a time. Loans made under this subprogram do not revolve as other CAPLines can, because there is no provision to 

permit a borrower to obtain more than the approved loan amount one time between 

cleanup periods. The borrower cannot commence repayment and then redraw the 

difference between the allowable borrowing base and outstanding loan balance during 

a season. 

 (2) Seasonal loans are designed to provide funds based on the projected cash to be 

generated in the future from funds that are disbursed before the inventory is acquired, 

the receivable generated, or labor paid for, in much the same way that a contract 

CAPLines is based on the eventual payments to be received after the job is completed. 

This is counter to the philosophy of asset based lending where advances are only made 

against existing current assets. 

 b. Out-of-debt period.

 (1) An out-of-debt period of at least 30 days must follow each seasonal cycle. At the 

conclusion of the out-of-debt period, borrowers are permitted to obtain new financing 

for their next season. A seasonal CAPLines does not revolve within a season but can 

revolve over numerous seasons. 

 (3) The maximum duration of a seasonal line of credit's cycle may not exceed 11 months. 

 c. Borrowing Base Certificates.

 Loans approved under the Seasonal sub-program require a borrowing base certificate to be 

submitted to the lender monthly. The certificate must permit the lender to monitor the 

seasonality of the current assets and to inform them when payments are coming to the 

borrower from its customers so repayment exists. The advance rate must be based on a 

percentage of the anticipated receivables and/or inventory that does not include a borrower's 

profit. 

 d. Collateral.

 The only required collateral position on a seasonal CAPLines must be a first position lien on 

the assets being financed. A secondary position on machinery and equipment, real estate, and 

personally owned assets must only be required when the current assets, along with other credit 

factors, are not considered to be sufficient to protect the interests of the Government. Current 

assets may be used to secure other debt providing the assets being financed can be easily 

segregated. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxiii

8. Servicing of Contract Caplines Loans.

 (4) A predetermined

 a. Introduction.

 Contract CAPLines are used to guaranty the financing required to cover a business' estimated 

direct short-term working capital needs in order to perform on assignable contract(s). Prior to 

the initial disbursement to finance any contract, the borrower must have already been awarded 

the contract to be financed, and the proceeds of the contract must be assigned directly to the 

lender as collateral and the primary source of repayment. Third party acknowledgement of the 

assignment must be received by lender. 

 b. Use of proceeds.

 (1) This program is established to finance the labor and material costs on specific 

contract(s). The business must provide a specific service or product under an 

assignable contract. Contract CAPLines can not be used to finance existing 

receivables or inventory. 

 (2) The lender provides the borrower advances against the contract line for the purpose of 

financing the direct cost of labor and materials associated with a particular contract. It 

does not provide funds to cover general and administrative (G&A) or overhead 

expenses. Once an allowable portion of the contract is completed, the borrower may 

invoice the contracting authority for payment. After any necessary reviews by the 

contracting authority, payment is made. The lender has a direct assignment of all 

payments, the remittance is sent directly to the lender for application against the lines 

outstanding balance. 

 (3) Contract receivable collections generally include some profit as well as funds that may 

be needed to assist a borrower in covering his/her overhead expenses. Therefore, this 

sub-program permits less than 100 percent of the contract proceeds to be applied 

against the outstanding balance so the remainder may be returned to the SBC for their 

internal use when made on a non-revolving basis for one contract. 

 percentage (up to 100 percent) of the collection from the contract 

receivables must be applied exclusively to the Contract sub-program for repayment. 

The percentage must be no less than the amount which was advanced for labor and 

material pertaining to that receivable payment plus a percentage equal to the 

percentage of any retainage held back by the contracting authority. 

 (5) If the contract CAPLines finances multiple contracts, all proceeds collected are to be 

applied against the outstanding balance unless justified by the lender and concurred by 

SBA. Each contract's required payment is to be considered on an individual contract 

basis. 

 c. Collateral.

 At a minimum, the lender must obtain a direct assignment of the proceeds from the contract(s) 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxiv 

being financed. A secondary position on machinery and equipment, real estate, and personally 

owned assets must only be required when the current assets are not considered, along with 

other credit factors, to be sufficient to protect the interests of the Government. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxv

9. Servicing of Builders Caplines Loans.

 (2) Final sale of the project must be to an unaffiliated third party

 a. Introduction.

 This sub-program finances the direct costs for construction or renovation of residential or 

commercial buildings that will be offered for sale upon completion by small general 

contractors. Each structure either renovated or constructed must be deemed an individual 

project. Funds may only be used for the direct expenses of the project. 

 b. Loan structure.

 (1) TheSBA may allow the finished property to be rented pending sale only in cases where 

the rental will enhance the ability to sell the property. Selling some large commercial 

structures and apartment buildings is not feasible until a large percentage of the units 

are rented. Conversely, selling single family, detached homes which are rented is 

usually difficult. Decide each case on its own merits. Do not permit rental as a means 

of putting the structure into an applicant's personal portfolio. 

. There must be a true 

transfer of both legal and beneficial title to the property. This program is not to be 

used to provide the applicant with construction financing for a structure that will 

become part of the applicant's or an affiliate's portfolio. 

 The SBA must be advised upon completion of the construction or renovation, as to whether or 

not the property will be rented out until the property is sold. 

 c. Collateral.

 Funds advanced for this purpose must be secured by no less than a second lien on the real 

estate being constructed or renovated. Where the project is part of a subdivision, the prime 

lender for the subdivision is likely to hold a first lien. In such cases the first lienholder has to 

provide a "release clause" for transfer of clear title to any eventual buyer of an individual 

parcel upon receipt of a pre-established payment. 

 d. Servicing considerations.
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxvi 

EXHIBIT 1

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

EXPLANATION OF SERVICING STANDARDS

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

Monitoring and Financial Examination

 Administering a CAPLines asset based account involves numerous activities to ensure the required 

revolving feature of these loans is maintained and that sufficient value in the collateral exists to cover 

the outstanding balance. The principal activities include the following. 

: The continual review of the borrowing base certificates and 

accompanying financial information to evaluate the borrower's management of the collateral. 

Collateral Examination: Conducting periodic examinations of the collateral to verify its value and 

ability to be converted to cash, analyzing the financial data and source documents to ascertain the 

validity of the statements, and conducting an analysis of in-depth point-in-time information on the 

collateral such as what is obtained during a field examination. 

Funds Control: Perpetual control of the proceeds generated by the business as a result of having the 

use of the asset based proceeds that limit a borrower's discretionary use of the cash receipts generated 

as a result of having the loan. Potential control of the accounts which secure the loan, including the 

segregation of different classes and types of inventory. 

 The degree of monitoring and control depends upon the mode of operation and financial capabilities 

of the business, the nature of the collateral, and the risk assessment of these factors. 

 All applicants for a CAPLines asset based loan must complete an SBA Form AB 4, "Supplemental 

Information for Asset Based Lines of Credit" as part of their application documentation. The lender 

uses this information to complete their Applicant's Questionnaire and derive a score. The results must 

be used to determine the level of monitoring and control to be required on the loan. All asset based

borrowers must be subject to certain minimum standards regardless of their score and can expect to be 

subject to more stringent requirements when the factors evaluated show higher risk or at the discretion 

of the lender and SBA. 

 The requirements for all standard asset based and small asset based sub-program loans are detailed 

below. All numbered items (unless otherwise noted) are applicable to the standard sub-program. 

Items marked with an omega (Ω) are applicable to the small sub-program. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxvii

PROCEDURE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ MINIMUM MONITORI  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊NG AND FINANCIAL EXAMINATION ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 The following standards represent the servicing requirements of SBA's CAPLines asset based loans. 

These requirements are divided between the functions of monitoring and control. 

 ̊

1. Prior to each disbursement and no less frequently than monthly, the borrower must submit a 

borrowing base certificate to his/her lender who must review for accuracy, adjust for ineligible items, 

and determine the value of collateral eligible for advancement of proceeds. Prior to release of funds, 

lender must indicate the report was satisfactory. 

Ω Same as above except certificate only due monthly. 

2. Prior to each disbursement, the lender must reconcile the borrowing base certificate and establish 

the allowable borrowing base by multiplying the value of the eligible collateral derived from a newly 

submitted borrowing base certificate times the applicable advance rate. The existing outstanding 

principal balance must be subtracted from the borrowing base to determine the maximum allowable 

amount to be advanced. 

Ω Same as above, except borrowing base certificate is reconciled and borrowing base is established only 

monthly. 

3. On a monthly basis, the lender must receive selected operating reports from the borrower, including 

an aging of receivables and payables and an inventory schedule (when advances are made against 

inventory). The Lender must reviewed reports against actual borrowing base disclosures. 

Ω Same as above, except operating reports are only due quarterly. 

4. On a quarterly basis, the lender must receive selected operating reports from the borrower including 

financial statements (of a quality of the lender's choosing) within 60 days of the conclusion of each 

operating quarter. 

Ω Same as above. 

4a. On a quarterly basis, the lender must cross review the interim financial statements, current asset 

reports, and borrowing base reports for changes, inconsistencies, and deterioration. 

Ω Same as above, except cross review only due semi-annually. 

4b. On a quarterly basis, the lender must conduct a review of bad debt, obsolete inventory, and accrual 

policies. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required semi-annually. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxviii 

Ω Same as above. 

Ω Same as above. 

5a. On a semi-annual basis, the lender must conduct a ratio analysis and compare a spread of key ratios 

to analyze any changes which may impact turnover and dilution of current assets. Examples include: 

days sales outstanding; days inventory on hand; accounts payable; allowances for bad debt; allowance 

for or actual percentages of returns/credits; current ratio; etc. The lender must act on results as needed. 

Ω Same as above. 

5b. On a semi-annual basis, the lender must conduct a covenant compliance review. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

5c. On a semi-annual basis, the lender must compare the status of the borrower's accounts payable, term 

debts, and leases, with prior semi-annual periods. The lender must act on results as needed. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

6a. On an annual basis, the lender must review management information system and controls and make 

necessary remediation if required. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

6b. On an annual basis, the lender must conduct a legal review for any actions, claims, tax deficiencies, 

and liens. 

Ω Same as above. 

6c. On an annual basis, the lender must conduct a review of bad debt, obsolete inventory, and accrual 

policies. 

Ω Same as above. 

 

6d. On an annual basis, the lender must modify loan agreements, advance rates, and/or loan covenants, 

as necessary. 

6e. On an annual basis, the lender must conduct an SIC peer group review on selective items in #5a. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xxxix

PROCEDURE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ MAXIMUM MONITORING AND FINANCIAL EXAMINATION  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

1. Increase the frequency of all activities other than those done monthly as follows: annual to semiannual; semi-annual to quarterly; and quarterly to monthly. 

 Most of the required servicing can be conducted at the lender's office (off site), but selected 

requirements have to be done at the borrower's place of business (on site). 

PROCEDURE: MINIMUM ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS

FREQUENCY: Prior to initial disbursement and not less than semi-annually as follows. 

Off Site

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Ω Same as above. 

NOTE: Regardless of the score obtained from the applicant's questionnaire, lenders have unilateral authority 

to increase the frequency of any of the above stated monitoring and financial examination 

requirements without SBA's concurrence. Reduction in the frequency beyond what is authorized 

requires lender justification and SBA concurrence. 

1. Compare aging statements with borrowing bases over the concluded semi-annual period to determine 

turnover and condition of receivables pool. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

2. Mail blind verifications to 20 percent of the borrower's account debtors to determine their reported 

payables to borrower on specific date, compared with reports given to the lender voluntarily. 

NOTE: The 20 percent figure should include a representative sample of the borrower's largest customers. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

3. Conduct a red flag analysis, reviewing available information submitted by borrower for: unusual 

rollovers of accounts; changes in credit performance of specific accounts over a 90 day period; cash 

receipts not in parity with reported account turnover and deposits made to cash collateral account; 

deteriorating markets or specific accounts; unusual credit or warranty activity; changes in credit 

policy or due diligence of accounts; the advent of other financing activity causing reduction in 

collateral pool (e.g., creation of affiliated entities to extend financing not covered by the asset based 

line or investor financing of selective A/R assets). 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xl 

PROCEDURE CON'T:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ MINIMUM A/R's EXAMINATION REQUIREMENT  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊S ̊

On Site

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually. 

4. Cross-age selective data like contra accounts; specific turnover of the ten largest accounts to test for 

stability, credit adherence, etc. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

6. Compare elements of dilution (e.g., over aged A/R; contras; affiliated transactions; offsets and credits; 

concentrations; rollovers; etc.) by reviewing source documents such as cash receipts journals; credit 

memos; shipping reports; repair and warranty files; credit files/in-house agings; payable/receivable 

ledgers; foreign accounts; call reports; and various communications. 

Ω Note required. 

7. Use source documents to review current and past delinquencies for account debtor trends and compare 

to financial reports and agings given in prior financial statements and borrowing base certificates to 

lender. 

9. Summarize activity by determining revised ineligibility and advance rate standards or covenant 

changes. 

PROCEDURE: MAXIMUM ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS 

1. Increase the frequency of all activities other than those done monthly as follows: annual to semiannual; semi-annual to quarterly; and quarterly to monthly. 

5. Compare present shipping documents to invoices and A/R listing for the most recent quarters financial 

data on the largest five accounts to determine confirmation of amounts, margins, receiving statements, 

and acceptances. 

Ω Note required. 

Ω Note required. 

8. Test credit memos to financial reports and adjustments to the certificate. 

Ω Note required. 

 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xli

PROCEDURE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ MINIMUM INVENTORY EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

FREQUENCY: Prior to initial disbursement and not less than semi-annually. 

Off Site

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

1. Overview components of eligible inventory to determine items with most movement, credit/return 

potential, over-stocking, markdowns, and obsolescence 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

 

On Site

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

2. Analysis by product lines and vendor support including changes in vendors, offsets, reported purchase 

money liens, shifts in strategy or stocking, etc. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

3. Test eligibility compliance issues for needed changes. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

4. Review for red flags: unusual turnover; changes in long standing supplier relationships; selective item 

or product group turnover changes; aging of certain items or product groups; rise in returns or bad 

orders; etc.; 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

5. Review any consignments or co-tenancy arrangements which might be pre-standing. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required prior to initial disbursement and annually thereafter. 

6. Interview other personnel generally for opinions or inconsistencies from what principals might have 

reported. 

7. Selectively review how the borrower determines the carrying cost of inventory or raw materials, and 

check the same to the selected inventory accounting method disclosed. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xlii 

Ω Note required. 

9. Confirm slow moving and obsolete items and integrate results in borrowing base and future 

adjustments in loan agreement if necessary. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

10. Test reported pricing and gross margins during test counts by item or product groups. 

Ω Note required. 

11. When inspecting the inventories and raw materials, review: care and custody issues; issues which 

might impact salability/marketability; rotation of stocks; contingent liabilities (environmental, zoning, 

employee safety, etc.). 

Ω Note required. 

12. Review covenants including insurance, etc. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

13. Test and examine records for consignments and joint warehousing arrangements. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

14. Interview other personnel generally for opinions or inconsistencies in what principals might have 

reported. 

Ω Same as above, except review only required annually. 

 

Ω Note required. 

8. Tie the inventory or stocking reports given to the lender by item or group concurrently, test counts of 

20 percent of the dollars, or 10 percent of the items to determine compliance. If substantial variances 

exist, expand audit untill reasons are determined. The results should weigh in advance rates, future 

eligibility, or modification of the loan status and confirmation of asset in financial statements. 

PROCEDURE: MAXIMUM INVENTORY EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xliii

Ω Same as above. 

1. Increase the frequency of all activities other than those done monthly as follows: annual to semiannual; semi-annual to quarterly; and quarterly to monthly. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xliv 

PROCEDURE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ MEDIUM ACCOUNT CONTROL  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

1. If the borrower segregates its inventories that are subject to the lender's lien, provide the lender both a 

landlord waiver and acknowledgement of conditional control, if not acquired previously. By covenant 

support, the borrower agrees to grant the lender, or its designee, management control of the area in 

which the collateral is kept in the event of certain specific defaults or deterioration of the credit. 

Ω Same as above 

PROCEDURE: HIGH ACCOUNT CONTROL

PROCEDURE: MINIMUM FUNDS CONTROL

1. Lender to establish a cash collateral account under its control for the borrower's use to deposit all 

proceeds (cash and checks) received from the sale of any of the borrower's inventory or services 

including all collections of all receivables resulting from such sales. The lender is to clear or sweep 

the account, including deposit funds, at their discretion, but no less frequently than weekly, and apply 

all proceeds to the outstanding interest and principal of the asset based loan. 

1. Medium account control is modified to provide that the lender now either: contracts with a public 

warehouse to segregate or store collateral and release it upon instructions only; or it creates an on-site 

segregation using elements of bailment, wherein the collateral is released only from physical control 

upon instruction. This normally entails use of a third party servicer or field warehouser. 

Ω Same as above. 

Ω Same as above. 

PROCEDURE: HIGH FUNDS CONTROL

1. Minimum funds control is modified to provide that lender now either: operates, itself or by designee, 

the borrowers postal box; or transfers collections to its own postal box (lock box). The lender is to 

provide account debtors of the borrower with instructions to remit all balances due borrower to the 

account they control. 

Note: The overriding test of control is that the lender only advances against any borrowing base after they 

have established a process to receive all of the borrower's cash or near cash receipts resulting from 

the sale of any of the assets included in the borrowing base, upon their arrival, as well as eliminate 

any borrower discretion to operate outside such a system. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A28-xlv

SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-i

APPENDIX 29 

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES

ITEMS REQUIRING ANALYSIS FOR LOAN ASSUMPTION 

(INCLUDE IN LENDER'S CREDIT MEMORANDUM) 

REAS

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ON FOR REQUEST (be specific): ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Sale of business includes the real property securing the SBA loan and all business assets.

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Sale of business assets only (leased premises).  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Sale of business assets only (relocation to new premises).  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

CONDITIONS OF SALE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

Provide a brief description stating the reason(s) and conditions of the requested assumption, e.g.: 

Sale of business assets only; original borrower retains the real property and will lease property to new 

business owner. 

 ̊

Provide a summary of the sale con  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ditions 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

and

 ̊ ̊ ̊

 a copy of the Buy/Sell Agreement.  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Note: Senior lienholder(s) written consent is necessary for all business collateral. 

COLLATERAL ANALYSIS:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

FMV should be substantiated by the most recent appraisal performed by a licensed appraiser and should 

include the date it was completed. Should the market value be evaluated other than an appraisal, the 

method/source (net book value, cost or estimate) must be stated. Please include a copy of current appraisal. If 

there is no current evaluation available use FMV value as shown on loan Pro-forma. Lien balance and 

current status should be verified. If lien is a revolving line of credit, the recorded lien amount should be used, 

otherwise, use principal balance owing. 

A detailed analysis of all collateral is required for both before and after the requested assumption. If the 

proposed assumption would result in a diminished collateral position, a detailed analysis and justification 

must be included in the proposal. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-ii 

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

The net equity value should be determined by using a liquidation percentage of the market value as noted in 

Chapter 4, "General Loan Servicing Requests and Actions," in paragraph 6. b., "Valuation of collateral." 

SUMMARY OF ASSUMPTOR(s) AND OBLIGOR(s)/GUARA

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊NTOR(s): ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

REPAYMENT ANALYSIS:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Provide basic business information on the new assumptor (including management experience and knowledge 

of industry), as well as on the current and new obligor(s)/guarantor(s). Specify whether guarantor(s)/coobligor(s) guaranties "will be" secured or unsecured. 

Provide a Balance Sheet analysis of the original borrower. Are the current financial statements favorable 

(e.g., there are no adverse trends)? Comment on any areas where the Financial Statement analysis shows 

deficiencies or adverse trends. 

The assumption of a loan is the most complex servicing action we entertain. It requires a financial analysis of 

the existing small business concern (and its obligors/guarantors). It may require an analysis of the proposed 

assumptor (and proposed obligors/guarantors) if the existing borrower's business will cease to exist and we 

will have to rely on the assumptor's business to repay the debt. 

Business tax returns/financial statements for the last two years and an interim statement (if FYE statement is 

more than 90 days old) should be obtained and analyzed. 

Provide a cash flow analysis of the original borrower to determine if adequate cash flow exists to service the 

debt(s). Comment on any area(s) which shows a deficiency. If adequate cash flow is not available, explain 

the basis of the request. Include a current schedule of indebtedness which will be necessary for determining 

net cash flow. 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-iii

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

LOAN ASSUMPTION

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 

TERMS OF SALE:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Lender Credit Memorandum  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 Escrow Instructions

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 Copy of Buy/Sell Agreement  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Copy of seller carry

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

-

 ̊

back Note

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Lease Agreement  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Approval of senior lienholder

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

PURCHASER:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Personal Financial Statement of borrowers, guarantors and major stockholders (SBA Form 413 or 

770) 

 Personal Federal Tax Return (most recent)  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Business Financial Statements (FYE) including Profit and Loss Statement (two years)  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Interim Business Financial Statement (if FYE is more than 90 days old)  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Business Federal Tax Returns (two years)

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

LENDERS CHECKLIST 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-iv 

 Statement of Personal History (SBA Form 912)  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 Statements Required by Laws and Executive Orders (SBA Form 1261)  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-v

LOAN 

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.) ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Environmental Questionnaire and Disclosure Statement. If questionnaire reveals possible pollution 

problems, a Phase 1 report will be required as a minimum. If the business is on the "List of 

Frequently Polluting Industries", a Phase 1 report is mandatory. 

 Current or most recent real estate appraisal (additional collateral or on commercial real estate being 

sold) 

 Landlord Waiver (if no RE involved)  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 Business Credit report  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Credit report  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊s on all assumptors (required)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Copy of Corporate Charter or Partnership Agreement  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Copy of Resolution by Board of Directors authorizing purchase and assumption of the SBA Loan (SBA  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

Form 160)

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Other  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-vi 

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

SELLER:

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Business Financial Statements (FYE) including Profit and Loss statement  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Interim Business Financial Statement (if FYE is more than 90 da  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ys old) 

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Business Federal Tax Returns (two years)  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Current Personal Financial Statement of borrowers and guarantors.  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Personal Federal Tax Return (one year)  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Written consent from all guarantors/co  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊-

 ̊

obligors to this action/reque

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊st ̊ ̊

 Current or most recent RE appraisal (if exchanging properties)  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Assignment of Lease (seller retains RE and leases back to assumptor)  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 Guaranty release requested (explain fully)  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 SBA Form 1614, submitted in advance of reques  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊t, (

 ̊ ̊  ̊503/504 LOANS ONLY)

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 ALL DOCUMENTS MUST BE SIGNED AND DATED 

Prepared by

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

Date: 

Telephone: 

 

  ̊  ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-vii

Fax: 
SOP 50 50 4

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-viii 
SOP 50 50 4

LOAN ASSUM

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

PTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-ix
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-x 

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES (cont.)

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-xi
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-xii 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-xiii
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-xiv 
SOP 50 50 4

EFFECTIVE DATE: DECEMBER 1, 1997

A29-xv

SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A30-i

APPENDIX 30

LOAN POLICY AND PROGRAM OVERSIGHT GUIDE FOR LENDER REVIEW

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ S ̊

This Appendix has been created in WORD and is located on the Intranet. The address is: 

 "http://yes.sba.gov/offices/fa/oversight.html". 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

A30-ii 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-i

PAGE #

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊

13 C.F.R.  120.970, Servicing of 504 loans and Debentures. ............................................................ 6-16 

13 CFR  120.10, Definitions

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

13 CFR  120.220 (c), Fees that Lender pays SBA. .............................................................................. 3-7 

13 CFR  120.221, Fees lender may collect from applicant  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Extraordinary servicing ............................................................................................................ 3-8 

 No prepayment fee ................................................................................................................... 3-10 

13 CFR  120.344, Unique requirements of the EWCP. .................................................................... 6-12 

13 CFR  120.440, What is the Certified Lender's Program............................................................... 6-2 

13 CFR  120.453

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

13 CFR  120.521

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

13 CFR  120.522  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

13 CFR  120.523  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

13 CFR  120.524  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 INDEX

120 days of interest from liquidation proceeds ................................................................................... 9-7 

13 CFR 120.938, Default...................................................................................................................... 11-2  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 Close Relative ............................................................................................................................. 2-5 

 Late payment fee........................................................................................................................ 3-9 

 Out-of-pocket expenses.............................................................................................................. 3-8 

13 CFR  120.431, Suspen/revoc. eligibility to participate................................................................... 3-4 

13 CFR  120.442, Suspension or revocation of CLP status. ............................................................... 6-2 

13 CFR  120.450, What is the Preferred Lender's Program?............................................................ 6-3  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 What are the requirements of a PLP Lender servicing/liquidation...................................... 6-3 

13 CFR  120.454, PLP performance review. ....................................................................................... 3-7 

13 CFR  120.455, Suspension or revocation of PLP status. ............................................................... 6-5 

13 CFR  120.513, What servicing actions require/SBAconsent....................................................... 4-12 

13 CFR  120.520, "When does SBA honor its guarantee? ................................................................. 9-1  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 What interest rate applies after SBA purchases its guaranteed............................................ 9-5  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 How much accrued interest does SBA pay to the Lender or ........ ........................................ 9-6  ̊ ̊ ̊

 What is the earliest 'uncured payment default'? .................................................................... 9-3  ̊ ̊ ̊

 When is SBA released from liability on its guarantee?............................... 9-3, 10-1, A28-xxxi 

13 CFR  120.531, Extension of maturity............................................................................................ 5-21

13 CFR  120.600 - 120.660, Secondary Market ............................................................................... A27-i 

13 CFR  120.840, Accredited Lender's Program .............................................................................. 6-19 

13 CFR  120.940, Prepayment of the 504 loan or Debenture........................................................... 11-2 

13 CFR  120.982, Correcting CDC servicing deficiencies. ................................................................. 3-4 

13 CFR  120.983, Transfer CDC servicing to SBA/other CDC ......................................................... 3-4 

13 CFR  120.984, Suspension or revoc. of CDC certification ............................................................ 3-4 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-ii 

327 Actions Requiring Approval by Another Office .......................................................................... 4-9 

503.......................................................................................................................................................... 11-1 

504 Debenture  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

AA/FA ..............................................................................................................................................1-1, 2-3 

CAPLines - Servicing Responsibilities............................................................................................... 6-11 

327 Stamp Format or Letter Overlay .................................................................................................. 4-8 

504.......................................................................................................................................................... 11-1  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 Prepay or purchase at the debenture's semi-annual payment date .................................... 11-3 

Accredited Lenders Program (ALP) - Servicing. ............................................................................. 6-19 

Accrued interest ..................................................................................................................................... 9-7 

ACE ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-5 

Actions Available for a Workout?........................................................................................................ 7-7 

Active military duty, borrowers called to.......................................................................................... 5-12 

ADD/ED .................................................................................................................................................. 2-3 

Address of borrower, change of............................................................................................................ 5-5 

Adverse Change ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1 

Affirmative Civil Enforcement (ACE) Division................................................................................ 14-5 

ALP........................................................................................................................................................ 6-19 

Approve a loan servicing action ........................................................................................................... 2-1 

Approving official .................................................................................................................................. 2-1 

Assistant district director for economic development (ADD/ED)..................................................... 2-3 

Associate Administrator for Financial Assistance.............................................................................. 2-3 

Associate Administrator for Financial Assistance (AA/FA).............................................................. 1-1 

ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES......................................................................................................... A29-i 

Assumption of a Loan.......................................................................................................................... 5-14 

Assumptions/Approve a Borrower's Change in Organization Form.............................................. 4-18 

Authority to Take Servicing Actions.................................................................................................... 2-1 

Automated Collection Letters............................................................................................................. 15-5 

Bankruptcy Actions ........................................................................................................................... 11-12 

Basic Steps in the Loan Collection Procedure ................................................................................. 15-4 

Borrower and Guarantors, consent of ............................................................................................... 4-16 

Bribery .................................................................................................................................................. 14-1 

Business Loan Program - Loan Processing SOP .............................................................................. 3-11 

Can you Require Borrower to Correct Deficiencies as Part of th..................................................... 7-7 

Cancellation, Termination, and Expiration of an SBA Guaranty. ................................................. 10-2 

CAPLINES ......................................................................................................................................... A28-i 

CAPLines Loan Program - Servicing. ............................................................................................... 6-10 

CAPLINES PROGRAM SERVICING GUIDELINES.................................................................. A28-i 

CDC................................................................................................................................................1-1, 11-1 

 "503" and "504" Debentures prepayment provision........................................................... 11-2 

 30 Day Notice for Prepayment................................................................................................ 11-4 

 Cancellation of the prepayment request................................................................................ 11-6 

 Escrow Account Funds............................................................................................................ 11-7 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-iii

 Termination.............................................................................................................................. 3-12 

CDC Liquidating Functions.............................................................................................................. 11-17 

CDC Reviews.......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 

CDC Servicing Fees

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Suspend/terminate/reinstate ................................................................................................... 3-11 

CDC's Reporting Requirements......................................................................................................... 6-18 

Central Servicing Agent (CSA) .........................................................................3-12, 4-7, 5-2, 5-12, 11-4 

CERTIFICATE OF INTEREST, SBA FORM 156  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Loan Servicing.......................................................................................................................... 11-1 

 Prepayment Cancellation ........................................................................................................ 11-6 

 Prepayment Credit for a "discount." .................................................................................... 11-3 

 Prepayment Letter Request .................................................................................................... 11-4 

 Prepayment Penalty/Premium................................................................................................ 11-3

 Prepayment Price Determination and Notification .............................................................. 11-6 

 Prepayment Procedural Steps ................................................................................................ 11-5 

 Release of Debenture and Note............................................................................................... 11-8 

 Servicing Fees......................................................................................................................... 11-16 

 Termination of CDC Servicing............................................................................................. 11-15 

CDC Fees .............................................................................................................................................. 3-11 

 Assumption Fee ........................................................................................................................ 3-11 

 Late Fees ................................................................................................................................... 3-11 

 Reinstatement........................................................................................................................... 3-12 

 Servicing Fee ............................................................................................................................ 3-11 

 Suspension of Servicing fees.................................................................................................... 3-12 

CDC, Certified Development Company .............................................................................................. 1-3 

CDCs ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 

Certificate of Interest..................................................................................................................9-16, 10-8  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 CERTIFICATE OF INTEREST ............................................................................................ A3-i 

CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH FISCAL REQUIREMENTS............................ A18-i 

Certified Development Companies (CDC) .......................................................................................... 1-1 

Certified development companies (CDCs) .................................................................................4-1, 11-1 

Certified Development Company (CDC)............................................................................................. 1-3 

Certified Development Company Loans (504 Loans) - Servicing. .................................................. 6-16 

Certified Lenders Program (CLP) - Servicing.................................................................................... 6-2 

Certified Lenders Program (CLP), Supplemental Agreement.......................................................... 1-3 

CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT, SBA Form 596 B................................................... A10-i 

Cetified Statement Account, SBA Form 596 B ................................................................................... 5-2 

CFR ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 

CHECKLIST FOR PURCHASE DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... A26-i 

Classifying a Loan as "In Liquidation" or "In Litigation."............................................................ 7-16 

CLP.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-2 

CLSC....................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) .................................................................................................... 1-1 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-iv 

Collateral

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Colson.................................................................................................................................................... 5-39 

Commercial Loan Servicing Center  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Little Rock .................................................................................................................................. 3-2 

Commercial Loan Servicing Centers (CLSC)..................................................................................... 3-1 

Cost of money to the government....................................................................................................... 7-10 

CSA....................................................................................................................................... 3-12, 5-2, 11-4 

 Termination of CSA Servicing.............................................................................................. 11-16 

Date of default ........................................................................................................................................ 9-7 

DDD......................................................................................................................................................... 2-3 

Debenture

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 327 Actions For Purchases .................................................................................................... 11-14 

 Bankruptcy Actions ............................................................................................................... 11-12 

 Prepayment Discount for "503" debenture......................................................................... 11-14 

 Proof of claim ......................................................................................................................... 11-13 

 Purchase of ............................................................................................................................... 11-9 

Debenture's semi-annual payment date............................................................................................. 11-3 

Debentures

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Deceased Borrowers/Guarantors  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Liquidation Value ...................................................................................................................... 4-5 

 Subordination............................................................................................................................. 5-8 

 Substitution................................................................................................................................. 5-9 

Collateral Valuation .............................................................................................................................. 4-5 

Collector Reports ................................................................................................................................. 15-3 

ColPur ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 

 Acquisition of............................................................................................................................ 7-15 

 Flood insurance ........................................................................................................................ 5-29 

 Note Receivable Report ........................................................................................................... 7-11 

Colson Services Corp. (Colson) .................................................................................................5-39, 12-2  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Fresno.......................................................................................................................................... 3-2 

Commercial Loan Servicing Center (CLSC) ...................................................................................... 5-1 

Comparative Statements ................................................................................................................... 16-11 

Credit/audit confirmations.................................................................................................................... 5-4 

 Authority to waive the 30 day notice requirement ............................................................... 11-5 

CSA, Central Servicing Agent ............................................................................................................ 5-12 

DD............................................................................................................................................................ 2-3 

 503 and 504 Difference ............................................................................................................ 11-2 

 Loan Accounting after Purchase .......................................................................................... 11-15 

 Prepayment Premium for "503" debenture........................................................................ 11-14 

 Purchase.................................................................................................................................... 11-1 

 Workout alternatives............................................................................................................... 11-9 

 Prepayments ............................................................................................................................. 11-1  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-v

Declared Disaster

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Disaster, Declared

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

 Assistance for Existing Borrowers who Suffer Losses in a.... .............................................. 5-37 

Export Working Capital Program (EWCP) - Servicing. ................................................................. 6-12 

Extraordinary servicing fees................................................................................................................. 3-8 

FA$TRAK Program, Supplemental Guaranty Agreement ............................................................... 1-3 

FDIC AND SBA -- MOU................................................................................................................... A25-i 

Fees.................................................................................................................................................3-7, 3-10 

Fees, Lender............................................................................................................................................ 3-8 

FFB........................................................................................................................................................ 11-1 

Field Visits

 ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 To Borrowers for SBA-Serviced Loans ................................................................................... 3-7 

 Claims against the estate of..................................................................................................... 5-26  ̊  ̊

 Direct Loans ............................................................................................................................. 5-38 

 Existing borrowers who suffer a loss ..................................................................................... 5-37 

 Guaranty Loans ....................................................................................................................... 5-38 

 SBA/FDIC Loans, Colson........................................................................................................ 5-39 

DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT) .......................................................................................................... A14-i 

DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION) ......................................................................................... A15-i 

Default..................................................................................................................................................... 9-2 

 Earliest uncured payment default ............................................................................................ 9-3 

Deferment ............................................................................................................................................. 5-10 

Deferments............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 

Deferments of Loan Payments............................................................................................................ 5-10 

Demand .................................................................................................................................................. 9-2 

Deputy district director (DDD)............................................................................................................. 2-3 

Direct 7(a) Loans.................................................................................................................................... 6-1 

Disaster Business Loans ...................................................................................................................... 6-15 

Disaster Farm Loans. .......................................................................................................................... 6-15 

Disaster Home Loans........................................................................................................................... 6-15 

Disaster Loans - Servicing................................................................................................................... 6-15  ̊  ̊  ̊

Disclosure of Information ................................................................................................................... 13-1 

District counsel....................................................................................................................................... 2-2 

District director (DD) ............................................................................................................................ 2-3 

EWCP.............................................................................................................................................1-3, 6-12 

 Non-routine actions.................................................................................................................. 6-13 

Exceptions to Policy ............................................................................................................................... 2-4 

Export Working Capital Program (EWCP), Supplemental Agreement.......................................... 1-3 

FA$TRAK Loan Program - Servicing ................................................................................................. 6-7 

False statements ................................................................................................................................... 14-2 

Federal Finance Bank (FFB) .............................................................................................................. 11-1 

Fees prohibited..................................................................................................................................... 3-10 

Fees, SBA ................................................................................................................................................ 3-7 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-vi 

Financial Statements

 ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Audited...................................................................................................................................... 5-31 

 Compiled................................................................................................................................... 5-31 

 Reviewed ................................................................................................................................... 5-31 

Fiscal transfer agent (FTA)............................................................................................................3-6, 9-1 

FOIA...................................................................................................................................................... 13-1 

Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) ................................................................................................. 13-1 

Freeze" on the loan account................................................................................................................ 9-12 

Guarantor  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Guaranty Loan Purchased form ........................................................................................................ 9-13 

Guaranty Loan Status & Lender Remittance Form .............................................................15-3, A23-i 

Guaranty purchased (repairing) or denying..................................................................................... 9-11 

Hazard insurance................................................................................................................................. 5-23 

 Improper conduct by SBA employees.................................................................................... 14-1 

 Requests for the IG to conduct audits.................................................................................... 14-2 

IG Audit ................................................................................................................................................ 14-5 

IG Referral  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

IG, Inspector General.......................................................................................................................... 14-1 

In litigation ........................................................................................................................................... 7-16 

 Changes in form or frequency ................................................................................................ 5-31 

 Internal ..................................................................................................................................... 5-32 

FISCAL AND TRANSFER AGENT (FTA).................................................................................... A27-i 

Flood Insurance.................................................................................................................................... 5-27 

Fraud..................................................................................................................................................... 14-2 

Freedom of Information Act, FOIA................................................................................................... 13-1 

FTA..................................................................................................................................... 3-6, 9-17, A27-i  ̊  ̊

 Release/Substitution................................................................................................................. 5-18 

Guaranty............................................................................................................................................... 5-18 

 When is SBA released from liability on its guarantee?.......................................................... 9-3 

GUARANTY LOAN PURCHASED, SBA FORM 1128 ................................................................ A19-i 

Guaranty purchase ................................................................................................................................ 9-1 

Guaranty, Reinstating ......................................................................................................................... 10-4 

IG........................................................................................................................................................... 14-1 

 Irregularities committed by any non-SBA ............................................................................ 14-1 

 Written Referral Format......................................................................................................... 14-3 

IG Investigation.................................................................................................................................... 14-5  ̊ ̊  ̊

 To U.S. Attorney's Office, Criminal Division........................................................................ 14-5 

In Liquidation ...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 

Increases in CAPLines Loan Amounts. ............................................................................................. 6-11 

INFORMATION REQUEST............................................................................................................ A24-i 

Information Resource Manager (IRM) ......................................................................................5-6, 15-5 

Inspector General (IG) ........................................................................................................................ 14-1 

Inspector General Hotline................................................................................................................... 14-2 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-vii

Intensive Servicing................................................................................................................................. 7-1 

Interest Accrual Notification .............................................................................................................. 4-15 

Interest rate ........................................................................................................................................... 9-5 

IRS Form W  ̊ ̊  ̊ -9

 ̊

Late payment fee.................................................................................................................................... 3-9 

Lender Fees

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊

 Fees prohibited......................................................................................................................... 3-10 

 Out-of-pocket expenses.............................................................................................................. 3-8 

Lender or CDC File

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Installment amount adjustments........................................................................................................ 4-18 

Insurance Claims, proceeds from....................................................................................................... 5-30 

Inter-Creditor Agreement................................................................................................................... 5-13 

Interest paid-to-date ............................................................................................................................. 9-7 

 Change ...................................................................................................................................... 5-22 

Interest rate, adjustments ................................................................................................................... 7-10 

IRM ................................................................................................................................................5-6, 15-5  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification......................................... 5-16 

LAUD ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-1  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Extraordinary servicing fees..................................................................................................... 3-8 

 Late Payment Fee....................................................................................................................... 3-9 

 Set up........................................................................................................................................... 3-5 

Lender Reviews ...............................................................................................................................3-3, 3-6 

Lender's Transcript of Account ..................................................................................................9-2, 9-13 

Lender/CDC Reviews ............................................................................................................................ 3-3 

Liability, Release from ................................................................................................................ A28-xxxi 

Life Insurance ...................................................................................................................................... 5-24 

 Proceeds upon death of insured.............................................................................................. 5-25 

Life insurance or hazard insurance requirements changes ............................................................. 4-17 

Liquidation Value of Collateral............................................................................................................ 4-5 

Liquidation Values................................................................................................................................. 4-5 

Loan Accouting Update Display (LAUD)............................................................................................ 3-1 

LOAN ASSUMPTION GUIDELINES ............................................................................................ A29-i 

Loan collection status screens............................................................................................................. 15-2 

Loan Collections................................................................................................................................... 15-1 

Loan Guaranty Agreement ..........................................................................................................1-2, 9-14 

Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation)......................................................................... 1-3 

Loan Information Request............................................................................................... 5-12, 5-15, 11-5 

Loan Liquidation & Acquired Property, SOP 50 51.......................................................................... 1-3 

Loan Policy and Program Oversight Guide for Lender Reviews ..............................................3-3, 3-6 

Loan Repayment Term, changes in.................................................................................................... 5-22 

Loan transfers from one lender to another ....................................................................................... 5-36 

Low Documentation Loan Program (LowDoc) - Servicing ............................................................... 6-5 

LowDoc ................................................................................................................................................... 6-5 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-viii 

Maturity  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

Non ̊-

 ̊

routine actions

 ̊ ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊

Office of Financial Operations (OFO) ............................................................................................... 9-12 

Out-of-pocket expenses.......................................................................................................................... 3-8 

Paid in Full Loans, Processing............................................................................................................ 5-16 

Participation Certificate................................................................................................... 9-16, 10-8, 10-9 

Pay off figures....................................................................................................................................... 4-14 

PLP.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-3 

 CHECKLIST FOR PURCHASE DOCUMENTS .............................................................. A26-i 

PMGI..................................................................................................................................................... 15-1 

Post purchase reviews.......................................................................................................................... 9-10 

Pre-Authorized Debits (PAD) ............................................................................................................... 5-6 

LowDoc Loan Purchases. ...................................................................................................................... 6-6 

LowDoc: Non-routine actions .............................................................................................................. 6-5 

Management Covenants ...................................................................................................................... 5-33 

Management Covenants adjustments ................................................................................................ 4-19 

MANAGEMENT TRAINING REPORT ........................................................................................ A11-i 

Manual purchase ................................................................................................................................. 9-12  ̊  ̊

 Extension of .......................................................................................................................5-20, 7-5 

 Of Loan ..................................................................................................................................... 10-3 

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING (MOU) BETWEEN FDIC AND SBA ................... A25-i 

Modification or Administrative Action................................................................................................ 2-1 

MODIFICATION OR ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION, SBA Form 327........................................ A5-i 

MORTGAGE (DIRECT), SBA FORM 927 .................................................................................... A12-i 

MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATION), SBA Form 928...................................................................... A13-i 

MUST...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 EWCP........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 

 LowDoc ....................................................................................................................................... 6-5 

 PLP.......................................................................................................................................6-4, 6-8 

Nonpayment of Guaranty Fee ........................................................................................................... 10-3 

Note Receivable Report ....................................................................................................................... 7-11 

NOTE RECEIVABLE REPORT, SBA Form 515............................................................................ A9-i 

Notice of Fully Paid Account .............................................................................................................. 5-16 

NOTICE OF FULLY PAID ACCOUNT, SBA Form 397 ............................................................... A7-i 

OFO....................................................................................................................................................... 9-12 

PADs........................................................................................................................................................ 5-6 

Partial payments ................................................................................................................................... 9-4 

PARTICIPATION CERTIFICATE, SBA FORM 152 .................................................................... A1-i 

Payoff amount ........................................................................................................................................ 5-2 

 Adverse Situations ............................................................................................................6-4, 6-13 

 Non-routine actions.............................................................................................................6-4, 6-8 

POLLUTION CONTROL FINANCING GUARANTEES.............................................................. 16-1 

Pre-Authorized Debits......................................................................................................................... 15-1 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-ix

Preferred Lenders Program (PLP) - Servicing................................................................................... 6-3 

Prepaying development company loans............................................................................................. 11-1 

Primary bank ....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 

Privacy Act Procedures ....................................................................................................................... 13-1 

Prudent lending...................................................................................................................................... 2-2 

Purchasing development company debentures................................................................................. 11-1 

Re-instatement of Default ................................................................................................................... 4-16 

Recommending official .......................................................................................................................... 2-1 

Reduction in the SBA Guaranty......................................................................................................... 10-7 

Release of collateral ......................................................................................................................4-16, 5-6 

Reports Menu....................................................................................................................................... 15-2 

Request

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Non-Deserving Verbal ............................................................................................................... 2-4 

Request for Management Assistance ................................................................................................. 7-15 

Resources are Available from SBA to Help Borrowers ................................................................... 7-14 

Review Fees............................................................................................................................................. 3-7 

Reviews

 ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊

 Lender/CDC ............................................................................................................................... 3-3 

SBA 327 STAMP.................................................................................................................................. A6-i 

SBA 504 ("504") .................................................................................................................................. 11-1 

SBA Employee  ̊ ̊ ̊

SBA Form 1032, Statement of Loan Account .............................................................. 5-4, A16-i, A17-i 

SBA FORM 1061, REQUEST FOR MA ASSISTANCE ............................................................... A17-i 

Pre-purchase reviews........................................................................................................................... 9-10 

Preferred Lenders Program (PLP), Supplemental Agreement......................................................... 1-3 

Prepayments ......................................................................................................................................... 4-19 

Privacy Act ........................................................................................................................................... 13-6 

Process Advances/Expenses During Loan Workouts? ..................................................................... 7-15 

Purchase Privilege, SBA's unilateral ................................................................................................. 9-14 

PURCHASING SBA's GUARANTY ................................................................................................... 9-1

Real Property and Personal Property Appraisals. ........................................................................... 7-15 

Reconsideration Request....................................................................................................................... 2-4 

Referrals to the Inspector General..................................................................................................... 14-1 

Repayment Notice ............................................................................................................. 5-4, 5-23, A22-i 

REQUEST FOR MA ASSISTANCE, SBA Form, 1061................................................................. A17-i 

Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification..................................................... 5-16 

Responsibilities of the Fiscal Transfer Agent (FTA). ......................................................................... 8-5 

Rule of Two............................................................................................................................................. 2-2 

SBA 503 ("503") loans ........................................................................................................................ 11-1 

SBA Data Communications System (SBA-DCS) .............................................................................. 9-12  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊

 Servicing Actions........................................................................................................................ 2-5 

SBA Form 1050, Settlement Sheet........................................................................................................ 9-9 

SBA Form 1061, Request for Management Assistance .................................................................... 7-15 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-x 

SBA Form 1086, Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement ................4-15, 8-1, 9-15, 9-17, 15-1 

SBA Form 1128, Guaranty Loan Purchased..........................................................................9-13, A19-i 

SBA Form 1175, Quarterly Report .................................................................................................... 15-3 

SBA Form 1186

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

 Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Certified Lenders Program (CLP)............................ 1-3 

SBA Form 1347

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊

SBA Form 1918

 ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊

SBA Form 327, Modification or Administrative Action ................................................... 2-1, 4-7, A5-i 

SBA Form 397, Notice of Fully Paid Account ..........................................................................5-16, A7-i 

SBA Form 515, Note Receivable Report...................................................................................7-11, A9-i 

SBA Form 596 B, Cetified Statement Account ................................................................................... 5-2 

SBA Form 750, Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation) ........................................... 9-14 

SBA Form 750EX

 ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊

SBA FORM 888, MANAGEMENT TRAINING REPORT .......................................................... A11-i 

SBA FORM 927, MORTGAGE (DIRECT) .................................................................................... A12-i 

SBA FORM 1102, CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH FISCAL REQUIRE.......... A18-i 

SBA Form 1149, Lender's Transcript of Account .....................................................................9-2, 9-13 

SBA Form 1201, Repayment Notice................................................................................ 5-4, 5-23, A22-i  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Preferred Lenders Program (PLP) ........................... 1-3 

SBA Form 1347, Supplemental Agreement, Preferred Lenders ....................................................... 1-3 

SBA Form 148, Guaranty.................................................................................................................... 5-18 

SBA FORM 1502, GUARANTY LOAN STATUS & LENDER REMITTANCE FORM.......... A23-i 

SBA Form 1502, Guaranty Loan Status and Lender Remittance .................................................. 10-5 

SBA Form 152, Participation Certificate .............................................................. 9-16, 10-8, 10-9, A1-i 

SBA FORM 155, STANDBY AGREEMENT ..........................................................................A2-i, A5-i 

SBA Form 156, Certificate of Interest ............................................................................ 9-16, 10-8, A3-i 

SBA Form 1614 .................................................................................................................................. 11-16 

SBA Form 1614, Loan Information Request.................................................................. 5-12, 5-15, 11-5 

SBA FORM 1614, ORA & ED/SBA INFORMATION REQUEST .............................................. A24-i 

SBA Form 172, Transaction Report on Loan Serviced by Lender ................................................. 3-10 

SBA FORM 172, TRANSACTION REPORT ON LOANS SERVICED BY LENDER............... A4-i  ̊  ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊ ̊

 Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, FA$TRAK Program ................................................... 1-3 

SBA Form 232, the standard SBA loan file folder.............................................................................. 3-5 

SBA Form 327 ........................................................................................................................................ 4-7 

SBA Form 360, Comparative Statements........................................................................................ 16-11 

SBA Form 466, Transcript of Account .......................................................................................5-3, A8-i 

SBA FORM 596 B, CERTIFIED STATEMENT OF ACCOUNT................................................ A10-i 

SBA Form 750, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participation ............................................ 1-3 

SBA Form 750B, "Loan Guaranty Agreement (Deferred Participatio............................................ 1-3  ̊

 Supplemental Guaranty Agreement, Export Working Capital Program ........................... 1-3 

SBA Form 912, Statement of Personal History................................................................................. 13-5 

SBA FORM 928, MORTGAGE (PARTICIPATION) ................................................................... A13-i 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-xi

SBA FORM 929, DEED OF TRUST (DIRECT) ............................................................................ A14-i 

SBA Revocation of a Lender's CLP Status.......................................................................................... 6-2 

SBA-DCS .............................................................................................................................................. 9-18 

SBDC..................................................................................................................................................... 7-14 

SCORE.................................................................................................................................................. 7-14 

Secondary bank.................................................................................................................................... 9-18 

 Certificates..................................................................................................................A27-i, A27-ii 

 Fiscal and Transfer Agent (FTA) ......................................................................................... A27-i 

 Suspension or Revocation of Participant.................................................................A27-i, A27-x 

Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement ............................................................. 4-15, 9-15, 9-17 

Senior litigation counsel ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 

Servicing center attorney ...................................................................................................................... 2-2 

Servicing Request................................................................................................................................... 4-5 

SERVICING REQUESTS..................................................................................................................... 4-1 

Settlement Sheet..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 

Small business company (SBC) ............................................................................................................ 3-3 

Small Business Institutes (SBI)........................................................................................................... 7-15 

SOP 40 03, "Disclosure of Information" ........................................................................................... 13-1 

SOP 50 10, "Business Loan Program - Loan Processing"........................................................3-4, 3-11 

Split rate.................................................................................................................................................. 9-5 

 Changes to................................................................................................................................. 5-17 

Statement of Loan Account........................................................................................................5-4, A16-i 

SBA FORM 930, DEED OF TRUST (PARTICIPATION)............................................................ A15-i 

SBA Revocation of a Lender's PLP Status.......................................................................................... 6-5 

SBC.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3 

SBI ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-15 

Seasoned Loans .................................................................................................................................... 4-11 

Secondary Market............................................................................................................... 9-1, 9-3, A27-i 

 Definitions............................................................................................................................... A27-i 

 Pool Assemblers .........................................................................................................A27-i, A27-v 

Secondary Market Program ................................................................................................................. 8-1 

Secondary Participation Guaranty Agreement (1086 Agreement)................................................... 8-1 

Service Corps of Retired Executives (SCORE)................................................................................. 7-14 

Servicing Fees......................................................................................................................................... 3-7 

Servicing Request/Action Log............................................................................................................. 4-10 

Servicing Requests, record of ............................................................................................................... 4-9 

Short Term Loan Agreement, Supplemental Agreement .................................................................. 1-3 

Small Business Development Centers (SBDC).................................................................................. 7-14

Soldier's and Sailor's Relief Act (50 Appendix USC,  526).............................................................. 5-13 

SOP 40 04, "Privacy Act Procedures"............................................................................................... 13-1 

SOP 50 51, "Loan Liquidation & Acquired Property" ..................................................................... 1-3 

STANDBY AGREEMENT ................................................................................................................. A2-i 

Statement of Account............................................................................................................................. 5-2 
SOP 50 50 4B

EFFECTIVE DATE: OCTOBER 1, 1999

I-xii 

Submission of a LowDoc Liquidation Plan. ........................................................................................ 6-7 

Subordinations to Senior Liens .......................................................................................................... 4-17 

Substitution of Collateral .............................................................................................................4-17, 5-9 

Supervisory attorney ............................................................................................................................. 2-2 

Transaction Report on Loan Serviced by Lender ............................................................................ 3-10 

Transcript of Account ..................................................................................................................5-3, A8-i 

Transfer of Loans from One Participant to Another. ...................................................................... 5-36 

UCC..................................................................................................................................................3-1, 4-6 

Uncured payment default ..............................................................................................................9-3, 9-5 

Valuation of Collateral, Liquidation Value......................................................................................... 4-5 

Voluntary Cancellation By lender...................................................................................................... 10-2 

Wall Street Journal.............................................................................................................................. 7-10 

Wire transfer ........................................................................................................................................ 9-12 

Workout

 ̊  ̊ ̊ ̊  ̊  ̊ ̊

 Lender ......................................................................................................................................... 7-5 

Statement of Personal History............................................................................................................ 13-5 

Subordination of Collateral/Lien ......................................................................................................... 5-8 

Subpoena for Your Testimony or for SBA Records......................................................................... 13-7 

Supervisor Reports .............................................................................................................................. 15-3 

Suspension or revocation of CLP status. ............................................................................................. 6-2 

TRANSACTION REPORT ON LOANS SERVICED BY LENDER, SBA FORM 172............... A4-i 

Transcript of Account, Lender's (verification of)............................................................................... 9-9 

Typographical errors corrections....................................................................................................... 4-14 

UCC filing............................................................................................................................................... 3-1 

Undisbursed balance, cancellation of................................................................................................... 5-1 

Uniform Commercial Code National Financing Statement (UCC) ...........................................3-1, 4-6 

Unilateral Authority ............................................................................................................................ 4-12 

Unilateral purchase privilege ............................................................................................................... 9-2 

Valuation of collateral ........................................................................................................................... 4-5 

 Actions Available ....................................................................................................................... 7-7 

 SBA's policy................................................................................................................................ 7-2